ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF PAKISTANNATIONAL HIGHWAY AUTHORITY

trilxa"v rrtSrr*ivs

Asian Development Bank

National Motorway M4Shorkot - Khanewal Section Project

(ADB/rCB/M4)

BID DOCUMENT(Particular Specifications / Special Provision (Road Works)

Construction of National Motorway M-4Shorkot - Khanewal Section Project

ICB-M4-lllA: Shorkot - Dinpur Section(Km 119+2001o 116 l$Q+200)

(31 Km)

On Post Qualification Basis(Single-Stage Two Envelope)

(voLUME-Ir(A)

National Highway Authority28-Mauve Area. G-9/1 . lslamabad

Tel: 0092-5 1 -90327 27, F ax: 0092-51 -926041 I

o

a

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL

010000109001310013400152001530

DtvtstoN2-stTEwoRK

02100

0220002300

DtvtsloN 3 - coNcRETE

031000320003300

DIVISION 4 - CONCRETE

040000410004200

DIVISION 5 - METALS

0510005400

0550005600

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTSREFERENCED STANDARDSWORKS PROGMMSHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLESCONTMCTOR'S CAMP AND FACILITIESSTAKE-OUT & PRE \I"TORK SURVEY

EXCAVATION, FILLING. BACKFILLING AND DISPOSALTEARTHWORK)TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENTSTONE SOILING

CONCRETE FORMWORK & ACCESSORIESREINFORCEMENTPLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

BLOCK MASONRYBRICK MASONRYREINFORCED MASONRY

a STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKSMANHOLE, CATCH PITS AND VALVE CHAMBERS WITHC.I COVER AND FMMEMISCELTANEOUg METALSSTEEL WORKS. STEEL GATE. WINDOWS AND GRILLS

6100

DIVISION 7. MOISTURE PROTECTION

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

071000716507920

0852008800

WATER PROOFINGi EXPANSION JOINT FILLIVAPOR BARRIERCAULKING AND SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 _ DOORS AND WINDOWS

ALUMINUIi] DOORS AND WINDOWSGLAZING

Table of Content

o DIVISION g - FINISHING

09200095'100970009900

DIVISION 16. ELECTRICAL

PLASTER AND STUCCOSUSPENDED CEILINGFLOOR AND WALL FINISHINGPAINT AND COATING

a

DIVISION 1O - SPECIALTIES

1O1OO FIBRE GLASS WORKS

DIVISION 1I - EQUIPMENT

DIVISION I2 - FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION I4 - CONVEYING SYSTEM

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

1510015200'15400

1544015500156001570015990

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMVALVESPLUMBING FIXTURES & EQUIPI\4ENTPLUMBING PUlilPSSOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMSEWEMGE SYSTEMBORING / DRILLING & INSTALLATION OF WELLSTESTING OF WATER TANKS

16010

a 16020'16030

16040'16050

16060'16070'16080

16090'16't00

16 '1 10

16129

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEI\iIS-SWITCH, SOCKET FITTING & ACCESSORIES,WIRE AND CABLE,CONDUITS AND PIPESLIGHTING FIXTURES.IVIISC ITEMS FANS ETC.LOW VOLTAGE ILU DISTRIBUTION.TELEPHONE SYSTEM.EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION,WIRING AND SMALL POWER,AC DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN ELECTRICGENSETALLIED EQUIPMENTS,WATER PUIVIPS.

Table ofContent

)l

sEcTtoN - 01000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL

1.'l The General Conditions of Contract and special conditions of contractshall form an integral part of these Genefal Requirements.

1.2 The Contractor shall notify all sub-contractors of the provisions of theSoecial and General conditions of Contract and the GeneralRequirements of this Specification.

1.3 The arrangement and divisions of these Specifications is not to beconstrued establishing the limits of responsibility of sub-trades.

1.4 The Contractof is responsible for delineating the scope of sub-contractsand for coordinating allthe works.

All works shall be carried out in accordance with the followingspecifications, supplemented by detailed specifications contained in thefollowing sections. Any inconsistencies or ambiguities shall be brought tothe notice of the Engineer for his clarification/ decision. Decision anddirection of the Engineer, in all such cases, shall be final and binding.

The Contractor shall make himself thoroughly familiar with the siteconditions foresee any and all problems likely to be encountefed dudngexecution of the works, and shall be able and ready to solve themeffectively. Proposals for solutions to the problems shall be submitted tothe Engineer fof approval before proceeding with the work.

The B.O.Q, Tender Drawings, Specifications are to be read in conjunctionand shall be mutually explanatory. In case of any conflict the order ofpreference shall be as under contract Documents.

1 .5

' 1 .6

1.7

CODES, STANDARDS, CERTIFICATES

3.1 The Contractor shall supply and have at his site office:

MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS

lnstallation of manufactured items shall be in accordance withrecommended by the manufacturer or as approved by the Engineer.

3.'1.'l CoDies of all latest editions of codes and standards referred to inthese Specifications of eouivalent codes and standards asapproved bY the Engineer.

3.1.2 Catalogues and published recommendations form manufacturerssupplying products and materials for the project.

The Contractor shall provide manufactufer's or supplie/s certificates tothe Engineer for all products and materials which must meet thereouirements of a specific code of standard as state inSDesifisations.

\!/9

U01000-'t

4. UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS

The Sl System of Units $hall be used throughout the Project.

PLANT, EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

The Contractor shall provide at his cost modern plant, equipment and tools,adequate and befitting to the nature, magn,tude and size of this Contract, in strictcomoliance with the reouirements of the General Conditions of Contract.

STORAGE & HANDLING FACILITIES

The Employer will provide the necessary space if available with him, forconstructional activities including batching plant, laboratory, workshop, storage ofplant, equipment and materials and for Contractor's temporary office/camp,during the currency of the Contract. lf the space is not available with theEmployef then the contractor shall arrange these facilities without additional costto the Employer.

TEST LABORATORY TESTING AND TESTING REPORT

7.1 Testing, except as otherwise specified herein, shall be performed bytesting agency approved by the Engineer and at no extra cost to theEmployer. The Contractor shall bear the Cost of such Testing. TheEngineer may require all testing to be carried out under his supervisiononly.

The quality control testing shall be performed by the Contractor'scompetent personnel in accordance with a sit€ testing and quality controlprogram to be established by the Contractor and approved by theEngineer.

The Conttacior sball keep a complete record of all quality tests performedon srte.

All quality control and tests shall be carried out in accordance withapplicable standards and codes.

The Contractor, after the approval by the Engineer for the source of thecement and steel, shatl make available at the site sufficient stock of thematerials in advance in ordet to allow sample testing to prove qualitybefore they are used.

The Contractor shall furnish to Engineer's Representative four certifiedtrue copies of reports of the tests of all materials used in the manufactureand fabrication of all equipments and matefial. The result of these testsshall be in such form as to show compliance with the applicablespecifications, standards and codes for the material used.

CONSTRUCTION & CHECKING AT SITE

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in due time for approval andiscussion, his proposals and plans as to the method and procedure to beadoDted forthe execution of oermanent works involved.

The submitting of these suggestions and arrangemenis, and the approvalby the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities andunder the Contract.

7.2

7 .3

7 .4

8.

17^n'Y

01000-2

8.'t Site

Within the Project area limits as defined on the Drawings, the Contractorshall carry out and perform the construction works. The Contractor withprior approval of the Engineer will be permitted to construct temporaryroad-way camps, buildings and temporary works which he may require forthe execution of the work. lf the Contractor wishes to use other land forcamps he shall pay all rentals or other costs connected therewith.

BAR-BENDING SCHEDULE

Bar (Reinforcement bars) bending schedule of all drawings shall be prepared bythe Contractor and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer for approval, as per thesubmittal procedure described in the relevant section of these speciflcations.

AS BUILT DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall, at all times, keep on site a separate set of prints on whichshall be noted neatly, accurately and promptly as the work progresses allsignificant changes between the work shown on the drawings and that which lsactually constructed.

At the completion of the works, the Contractor shall at his expense, supply theEngineer with reproducible copies of these drawings.

PROTECTION OF THE WORKS

The contractor shall whenever necessary cover up and protect the works fromweather and damage by his own or other workmen performing subsequentoperation. He shall provide all necessary dust sheets, barriers and guard railsand clear away the same at completion.

RESTORATION AND CLEANING

Upon completion of the works the Contractor shall restore all items covered bythe Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer..

The contractor shall do regular cleaning and clean away all rubbish and excessmaterials that may accumulate from time to time on completion and beforehanding over. Upon completion of the works he shall obliterate all signs oftemporary construction facilities such as work areas, siructures, foundations oftemporary structures, stock piles of excess of waste materials, or any othervestiges of construction, as directed by the Engineer.

Trash shall be removed daily to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

OUALITY OF MATERIAL

13.1 All materials and suoDlies furnished under the Contract Documentsbe new and of standard first grade quality and of best workmanship adesign. No inferior of low grade materials supplies or articles will be eitherapproved or accepted and all work of construction shall be made in neat,first class and workmanlike manner.

13.2 Ptio( to procufement, the Contractor shallapproval, the name of the manufacturers ofwhich he contemplates incorporating in the

furnish to Engineer for hisall equipment and m

(l

10.

11 .

a

t3 .

01000-3

Wofks, samples of mat

'14.

15.

16 .

17.

shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Equipment, materialsupplied and articles installed or used without the Engineer's approvalshall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.

INSPECTION

All equipment and materials furnished under these specifications and all workperformed in connection therewith will be subjected to rigid inspection by theEngineer. The contractor is not relieved of his responsibility for meeting thereouirements of the Contract.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

The contractor shall provide, erect or install, maintain alter as necessary andremove on completion or when difected by the Engineer all such temporaryfacilities and services, not required by the Client, Including access roads asdescribed hereinafter and/or in the Contract Document and/or Instructed andapproved by the Engineer.

CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER GONTRACTORS

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to co-odinate and keep-up goodrelations with other contractors employed on site by the Employer.

NOTIFICATION TO ENGINEER AND DAILY ACTIVITY REPORT

The Engineer shall be notified by effective Receipt of Requisition slip in approvedformat in writing of the nature and location of the Works which the Contractorintends to perform the next day so as to enable necessary inspection andmeasurement to be carried out. The Engineer may, if necessary, direct thecontractor that longer duration notice be given for ceftain operations.

The Contractofs Site Office shall also prepare and submit to the Engineer's SiteOffice 6 copies of a Daily Activity Report summarizing the main activities to beundertaken each day, noting special activities such as tests, alignment checks,etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for expediting the delivery of all materialand equipment to be provided by him and his sub-contractors.

ACCIDENT PREVENTION, PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall comply and enforce compliance by all his sub- contractorswith the highest standards of safety and accident prevention in accordance withinternational standards and in compliance with all applicable laws, ordinanoesand statutory provisions.

All requisite baffierc, fences, warning signs, lights and other safety precautions,as required for the protection of persons and property on or adjacent to the siteshal! be provided at the Contractor's cost.

All false work, scaffolding and hand rails shall be well constructed and secured atall tjmes, be maintained in a clean and legible condition, to the satisfaction of theEnqineer.

18 .

01000-4

t9 .o

20.

SURVEY INSTRUMENT

The Contractor shall maintain on site the requisite surveying instruments inperfect working conditions to enable the Engineer to check levels and lines of thework at all times.

CONSTRUGTION PHOTOGRAPHS

As soon as work commences on Sites, the Contractor shall provide photographs(at least 10 to 12) ofthe works from positions (angles) to be selected by theEngineer. Each photographic print shall not be less than 297 mm x 210 mm andshall bear a printed description, a serial number and the date when taken.

The negatives of all photographs shall be held at the Contractor's Site Office,numbered and handed over to the Employer at the completion of the Contract.

The Contractor shall also provide from time to time as and when required by theEngineer, further photographs of the Contract works to record or illustratespecific events.

APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S LIST

Civil Works

21 .

A.lvlaterial / Articles Name of Manufacturers/Brands1. Steel Fazal, ltehad, l\ilughal, Pak Steel, City

Steel.Alcop, Alhali, Aluminum Co, Pakistancables. chawlaRobialac Berger, ICI (Dulux), Paintes etc.Alpha, Babar, Sl/lc

3.4.

2.

B.

Aluminum Works (Aluminum doors &Windows

Paints/DistemperLocks/Hardware

Water Supply / Sanitary Fittings

Material / Articles Name of Manufacturers/Brands1. Bib Cock; Mixer, Stop Cock etc2. WC (lndian) - ORISSA3. WC English4. Flushing Cisterns (Plastic)5. Flushing Cistern (ceram:c)6. Bottle Trap7. G.l Pipe8. PVC, UPVC, HDPE Pipe

9. PPRC Pipe'10. Cast lron Spun Pipe.

'1 '1. Gate valve12. Stainless Sinks13. Ceramic Tiles

Manga, l\/aster, Sonexl.C.L., Fort & Toyo, PortaLC.L., Fo.t & Toyo, PortaMaster, Baig, Super Asia, SonexlCL, Fort, SonexMaster, Faisal, Sonex MangallL (Medium), victory (lvledium).Shavyl, Galco, Beta, Builtec, RAK, Dadex,Polo, BBJGalco, Beta, FIRAT (Turkish), RAK ThermC.l. Engineering Corp:Teepu, Alpine, NPC& CMEAnwar AsiaAtlas, Super AsiaMaster, Shabbir (Stile), Forte, Emco.

01000-5

a Electrification WorksMaterial / Articles Name of Manufacturers/Brands1 .2.3.

Wires and CablesTelephone CablesCircuit Breakersi) Single Phaseii) Three Phase i/c Change over

4. Switches and sockets.5. PVC Conduit pipe

6. PVC Duct channel7. Lights (Fittings/Fixtures)

i) Flourescent Tube lights, puttyFitting office Lights

ii) carden lights, steel lights &Ceiling Mounted lights etc.

8. HT/LT main distrjbution panel.

L P.C. pole /structure

Pakistan Cables, Newage, AGE, universalSiemens, Pakistan Cables

Tera Saki, ABB, Medin GerinTera Saki, ABB, Merlin GerinSwitch Kid, Bosch, Clipsal, LegrandShavyl, Galco, Beta, Builtec, Dadex, RAKTherm, PoloDura, Adamjee

Phil ips, Paklight, and Sunlight

Phil ips, Sunlight

Siemens, PEL, ECS, PEMPAK, Electrech,ElectroMech, TechmanAs per WAPDA Specifications

'10. Fansi) Ceiling

Exhaust/Bracket

D. Gas Work.

Asia, Mil lat, Climax, GFC, Younas, PakPak, Younas, GFC

iD

Material / Articles Name ot Manufacturers/Brands'1. Cooking Range2. Gas Room, Heaters3. Water heater (geyser)4. Chulahas.5. G.l Pipe6. Water cooler7. Air Conditioners

i) Windowsii) Split

8. Pumping Seti ) Up to5Hpii) Above 5 Hp

L Diesel Generator

Sky Flame, NASGAS, CoronaNas gas, Firex, Singer, Rinnai, CannonSinger, NASGAS, ambassadorl\,4arshal, NasgasllL (Medium), Violory (Medium)lvleco, Comfort

PEL, Climax, General Agnause,Sabro, Daikin, Orient Kenwood, PEL

Golden, l\/ecoKSB, with Siemens Motors, Alama SumotoItaly.PEL, CUI/|IVIINS

22. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No measurement and payment will be made for the work involved within thescope of this section of specifications related to the relevant iterns of Bill ofQuanuties. The cost, thereof, shall be deemed to have been included in the bidquoted by the tenderer.

01000-6

sEcTtoN - 01090

REFERENCED STANDARDS

a

PART 1 . GENEML

A. Refefenced Standardg: Specifications or standards referenced herein shall bethe copies or editions current on the date of Advertisement for Bids. In case of aconflict between the referenced specifications or standards, the one having themore stringent requirements shall govern.

In the absence of other Standards being required by the Contract Documents, allwork and materials shall meet the requirement of the Uniform Building Code ofthe United States, and/or applicable American Society for Testing l\4aterials(ASTM) Specifications, and the latest American Concrete lnstitute Manual ofConcrete Practice and American lnstitute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manualrelevant to the Works, except in cases where the National Building Code ofPakistan requires a higher standard, in such cases the Pakistani Code shallgovern. Where the abbreviations listed below are used, it refers to the latestcode, standards, or publication ofthe organizations.

Should the Contractor, at any time and fof any specific reasons, wish to deviatefrom the above standards or desires to use materials or equipment other thanthose provided for by the above standards, than he shall state the exact nature ofthe change giving the reasons for making the change and shall submit completespecifications of the materials and descriptions of the equipment for theEngineer's approval, whose decisions shall be conclusive and binding upon theconlraclor.

B. Abbreviations:

AASHTO

ACIAIEE

AISCAISIANSI

ASAASCEASHRAE

ASMEASTI\iI

AWPBAWS

BSIBSICPCRSI

o

Aluminum AssociationArchitectural Aluminum Manufacturers AssociationAmerican Association of State Highway and TransportationOfficialsAmerican Concrete lnstituteAmerican Institute of Electrical Engineers (Now IEEE)Acoustical and Insulating Materials AssociationAmerican Institute of Steel ConstructionAmerican lron and Steel lnstituteAmerican National Standard InstituteAmerican Public Transit AssociationAmerican Public Works AssociationAmerican Standard AssociationAmerican Society of Civil EngineersAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning EngineersAmerican Society of Mechanical EngineersAmerican Society for Testing and MaterialsAmerican Wood Preservers AssociationAmerican Wood Preservers BureauAmerican Welding SocietyAmerican Water Wofks AssociationBritish Standards lnstituteBritish Standard lnstitute Code of PracticeConcrete Reinforcing Steel lnstitute

01090-1 EI

o CSFMFSIEEEIPCEAtv LNAAIVIIVINBFUNBSNECNEI\iIANFPANSFOSHA

PCAPCIPSISDISJISIIIACNA

SSPCUBCUPCUL

Commercial StandardFactory Mutual Engineering and ResearchFederal.StandardInstitute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersInsulated Power Cable Engineers Association[/ilitary Standardization DocumentsNational Association of Architectural Metal lvlanufacturersNational Board of Fire UnderwritersNational Bureau of StandardsNational Electrical CodeNational Electrical Manufacturers AssociationNatlonal Fire ProtectionAssociationNational Science FoundationU.S. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and HealthAssociationPortland Cement AssociationPre-stressed Concrete lnstitutePakistan Standard InstituteSteel Decks InstituteSteel Joists InstituteSheet lvletal and Air Conditioning Contractors' NationalAssociationStructural Steel Painiing CouncilUniform Building CodeUniform Plumbing CodeUnde^vritef s Labof atories, lnc.

o

o

a01090-2

a

't. scoPE

A. lmmediately afier contract awafd and prior to pre-construction meeting, prepareand submit to Engineer, for review, a proposed construction schedule in the formof a network plan utilizing the Critical Path Method (CPM) and arrow diagram.Utilize Primave€ or Suretrack software. DVD at same time as submittal of allhard copy data indicating equivalent revision level of schedule.

'L Contractor shall provide personnel, skilled in the time and cost applicationof netrrork techniques for construction projects or a scheduling consultantto prepare the network plan and arrow diagram at his own cost-

2- ln the affow diagram, show initial $tart work dates and duration for eachmajor and minor construction stage, trade operation or work sequenceand their dependency relationships. Attach a computer producedconstruction schedule showing the required information for each activiXy.ldentify each by related specification section number, name of operationor trade.

3. ldentify elements of works program which Contractor, Sub-Contractorsand/or Suppliers determine to be critical to orderly progression of workand to sequence of construction

4. Determine inteffelations of othef trades or construction sequencesaffecting critical work element.

In the arrow diagram, show not only the activities for actual constructionwork for each trade category of the project, but also such activities as theContracto/s work ot submittal of shop drawings, equipment schedules,coordination drawings, templates, fabrication, delivery and the like, andEngineer review and approval of shop drawings.

Group activities related to a specific physical drea of the project on thediagram for ease of understanding and simplification. Show activityduration (i.e., the single best estimate, considering the scope of theactivity, and the resources planned for the activity) on each activity on thediagram.

Include a cost estimate for each activity, based on and compatible withthe Bill of Quantities. The cost of activities cumulatively shall equal thetotal Contract cost.

Failure to include any element of work required for the performance ofthis Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing workrequired within any applicable completion date, notwithstandjng theEngineer approval of arrow diagrams. To the extent that the arrowdiagram or any revised arrow diagram shows anything not jointly agreedupon or fails to show anything jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemto have been approved by the Engineer.

B. Additional Data Requifed: Contractor \^/ill be informed by Engineerconstruction meeting of addiiional data required, if any.

sEcTtoN - 01310

WORKS PROGRAM

01310- 1

5.

AGREEMENT ON FINAL WORK PROGRAM

Not Used

WORK PROGRAM

General: Furnish with the arrow diagram, and each revision thereof, a computerproduced work program showing the following data for each activityi

'1. Preceding and following event numbers.

2. Activitydescription.

3. Estimated duration of activities.

4. Earliest start date,

5. Earliest f inish date.

6. Proposed start date.

7. Proposed finish date.

8. Latest start date (required start).

L Latest finish date (required start).

10. Slack or float in calendaf days.

'11. Cost estimate value of activity.

12. Percentage of activity completed.

13. Contracto/s earnings based on portion of activity completed.

Not Used

Percentage for completed and partially completed activities.

B ,

INITIAL IN-PUT DATA AND UPDATE

A. Provide to Engineef initial in-put data and monthly update of same relating toactual work activities accomplished for purpose of forecasting future workactivities and durations.

At jobsite progress meetings, present copies of the schedule and ContractPayment Report and othef required data accufately filled in and completed priorto the meeting. Job progress will be reviewed to verify:

1. Remaining dufation, required to complete each activity started, orscheduled to start. but not comoleted.

2.

3. ldentification of any problems, including cuffent, unresolved and/oranticipated delay factors and impact on other activities and what controlsteps are being taken or planned.

'r'ry

01310-2

4. Monthly progress and recommend ways to improve schedule or anticipatedelays and/or safety problems.

C. After completion of the jobsite review and the Engineer review and acceptance ofentries, submit an updated computer produced calendar dated schedule to theEngineer within five days. Also inform and update Sub-Contractors and Suppliersof the revisions to the construction schedule.

5. FAILURE TO SUBMIT NETWORK ANALYSIS

A. Failure of the Contractor to submit the network analysis or any required revisionsthereto within the time limits stated, shall be sufficient cause for certification thatthe Contractor is not performing the Work required by this Section, of that theContractor's personnel directly responsible for planning, scheduling, andmainiaining progress of the Work are not performing their work in a proper andskillful manner, or both. The Engineer may withhold approval of the Contractof'sinvoices for progress payment until such delinquent submittal is made.

01310-3

1.

sEcTloN - 01340

SHOP DR-AWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

SCOPE

Submit shop drawings, calculations, setting drawings, manufacturer's catalogcuts, product data, diagrams, schematics, wiring diagrams, equipment andmaterials lists and schedules, coordination drawings and samples as necessaryto satisfy requirements specified in various Sectjons throughout thesespecifications or elsewhere in Contract Documents.

Prepare and process specific submittals in accordance with the administfativeand procedural requirements specified herein.

DATES FOR SUBMISSION AND REVIEW

A. Designate ln the construction Schedule, or program dates for submissionand dates that reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples will beneeded, in order to maintain the project schedule.

SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLES, PRODUCT DATA, ETC.

A. Wherever it is specified in any Section of the specifications that shopdrawings, product data and samples etc. are required, submit such datafor review as follows:

1. Shop Drawings: Submit one feproducible, reverse transparency(sepia or equivalent together with trro prints to be retained by theEngineer for each required shop drawjng complying with thefollowino:

a. ldentify each drawing with the following informationplaced on each drawing:

(1) Project name and Owne/s Project numbef.(2) Date drawing prepared.(3) Name and address of Contractor.(4) Name and address of Subcontractor.(5) Name of manufacturer.(6) Number and title of appropriate Specifications

Section.(7) Drawing number and detail references, as

appropflate.

b. Leave a blank space six inches wide by four inches high inthe lower right cornef of the first sheet of the shopdrawings for the Engineer's shop drawing review stamp.

Product Data: Submit four (4) copies of each catalog cut or productdata sheet where reproduction can be accomplished by a directcopy process.

B,

t

2.

3. Samplesi Unless otherwisedirected by the Engineerspecifications.

specified submit (3) samples asor specifically called for in these

01340-1

o

B. Attach a copy of the Conhactor's transmittal letter or form to eachrequired shop drawing, manufacturer's catalog cut or other product data.When submitting reverse transparencies, provide four (4) copies of thetransmittal forms, one to accompany each such submittal-

SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION

Submit only one jtem or system per letter of transmittal properly identifiedto include the appropriate specification section and paragraphs,

When catalogs, product data, diagrams or charB are submitted with morethan one type of product manufactured, identify the particular item,including options, that is intended for use in that phase of work.

ldentify re-submittal with original shop drawing number and the letter A,B, etc. according with re-submittal order, and direct specific attention torevisions and corrections made, other than those requested on previoussubmissions.

ldentify details by reference to sheet andDrawings and to Specifications Section.

or schedule shown on

E. Manufacturer's standards, schematic drawings and diagrams:

'1. lilodify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is notaoolicable to work.

2. Supplement standard information to provide, informationspecifically applicable to Work.

SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS

A. Submit catalog sheets, product data, shop drawings and where specified,submit calculations, material samples, color chips or charts, test data,warranties and guarantees all at same time for each item.

PREPARATION

c.D.

Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.

Show perfofmance characteristics and capacities.

Show dimensions and clearances required.

Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

SHOP DRAWINGS AND BAR BENDING DRAWINGS

Submit shop drawings, including dfawings, diagrams, bar bendingschedules and per{ormance charts, as reproducible transparencies andblue line prints. So as to cause no delay in the works.

Print and distribute copies of the transparencies reviewed and stampedby the Engineer. Submit as multiple copies shop drawing material whichcannot be submitted in sepia or other transparent form. Submit samenumber of cooies as required for final distribution of reviewed submittals.

C. In shop dfawings for electrical equipment,diagrams, installation drawings showing the

01340-2

include complete rn,n5 ':

\tocation by dimensions, of

ALJ]')i:t:-,

8.

conduits, equipment and cable runs, outline drawing of major equipmentwith overall and other critical dimensions, and complete lists of equipmentand fixtures, accompanied by catalogs, catalog cuts, data sheets, andother liierature describing the equipment proposed for use. Includecomplete specifications, requifed test data, sizes and numbers ofconductors, cables and conduits.

PRODUCT DATA

Collect product data into a single submittal for each element ofconstruction or system. Include standard printed information such asmanufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard colorcharts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standafd wiring diagramsand performance curves. Where product data must be specially preparedbecause standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as ShopDrawings.

Submit product data fully edited and tailored to the particularreouirements of the Work.

Fill in all blanks, provide supplementary information required by theSpecifications, circle or undedine choices, cross out non pertinent orconf licting information.

l\/lark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printedproduct data includes information on sevefal products, some of which arenot requifed, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Includethe following information:

1- l\,4anufacturer'sprintedrecommendations2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards4. Application of testing agency labels and seals5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement6. Notation of coofdination requirements

Do not submit product data until. compliance with requirements of theContract Documents has been confirmed.

B.

c.

D,

F.

B,

E.

9. SAMPLES

Manufactureds catalogue sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedupedormance charts, illustfations and other standafd descriptive liteshall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials products orDimensions and required clearance shall be indicated.

Samples shall befabrication, allowingsample submitted.

the Enoineer reasonable time for consideration of the

The Engineer shall check and approve samples with only forconformance with the design concept of the Works and for compliancewith the information given in the Contract Documents. All work shall be inaccordance with approved samples.

C Each sample shall be properly labeled with thematerial, manufacturer's name, name of the

01340-3

o name and the date of submission, and the Specifications Article numberto which the sample refers.

The manufacturer's installation directions shall be provided with eachsample. The Contractor shall pay all transportation costs and deliversamples to the Engineer's office, Site or testing laboratory as directed bythe Engineer.

Samples shall be of adequate size to permit proper evaluation of thematerial by the Engineer. Where variations in colour, texture, dimensionsor other characteristics are to be expected, the Contractor shall submitsamples showing the maximum range of variation, Materials exceedingthe range of variation of the approved samples shall not be used on the

Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and of ContractDocuments. Transmit each submittal suffidently in advance ofperformance of telated construction activities to avoid delay.

Notify the Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations insubmittals from requirements of Contract Documents, but do not use thesubmittal process as a means for substituting products.

10 .

F In order to pefmit coordinated selection of colours and finishes, theContractor shall deliver samples of all items of interior finish to theEngineer at one time. Samples of such materials will not be approveduntil all related samDles have been submitted.

CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Review shop drawings, catalog cuts, pfoduct datasubmission. Determine and verify:

'1. Fieldmeasurements.2. Field construction criteria.3. Catalog numbers and similar data.4. ConformancewithSpecifications.5. Conformance with drawings and details.

D

E

B,

c.

E

F.

D. Do not begin fabrication or Work which requifes submittals until afterreceipt of submittals carrying favorable actjon by the Engineer.

Where adjoining work iequires shop drawings the Contractor shallprepare and submit composite shop drawings which shall show anddefine the work under all affected trades. lf the Contractor Installs workbefore coordinating with other trades so as to case interference with workof those trades, he shall make changes necessary to correct theconditions without extra cost to the Employer.

Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elementsof the Work so that processing will not be delayed by the need to reviewsubmittals concurrently for coordination. The ArchitecUEngineer reservesthe right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordinaUon with othersubmittals until related submittals are received.

Submit shop dfawings (bar bending drawings) in sufficient timeadequate study, discussion and any necessary correctionbeginning the Work they cover. No extension of Contract time

to allow

01340-4

11 .

E.

authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to theArchitect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permitprocessing.

Prior io sending in any submittals required by the Contract, includingthose of Subcontractors and suppliers, review and check eachsubmission for compliance with the Contract requirements and forcoordination of the Work as it affects other trades, and stamp and signapproval on each submittal. By approving and submitting each submittal,the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified allfield measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbersand similar data, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinatedeach submittal with the requirements of the Wo|k and of the ContractDocuments.

Review, Correction and Final Approval by Engineer: After reviewing theEngineefs comments, make any corrections as appropriate, and resubmitthe coffected submittals until no further comment is made by theEngineer.

No changes shall be made by the Contractor in the resubmitted shopdrawings in excess of the corrections spelled out by the Engineer and in aseparate note on the shop drawings.

K. Endorse by stamp with date of final approval of the submittal after allreviews by the Architect/Engineer have been made and all of theArchitecvEngineefs comments have been incorporated or otherwisesatisfactorily acted upon.

Commence no portion of the Work requiring a 6ubmittalhas Contractofs final approval stamp and endorsement.

the submittal

not indicate

not relieve the

M. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit the shop drawingson a schedule that allows reasonable time for checking and approval and

checking, correcting, and rechecking will not jus-t in time fofcompletion ofwork.

ENGINEER'S REVIEW

The Engineer will feview submittals only for conformancewith the designconcept of the Project, compliance with the provision of the ContfactDocument and with the information given in the Contract Documents.

B. For each submittal for review, allow 10 working days or as agreed by theEngineer excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.

a

C. The Engineer's approval relating to a separate itemapproval of an assembly in which the item functions.

D. The Engineefs approval relating to submittalsContractof from responsibility for any deviation.

The Engineefs approval relating toContractor from fesponsibility for errors

submittals will notor omissions in thesubmittals.O (or his subcontractois) preparation of the

01340-5

The Engineer will note that he has reviewed each submittal and will returnthe submittal to the Contractor together with notes pertaining to designconcept of the Project and information given in the Contract Documents.

Prior to Engineer's approval on required submittals, any Work done ormaterials ordered for the Work involved will be at the Contracto/s risk.

lf both Shop Drawings and samples afe required for the same item, theEngineer may require both to be submitted before approving either.

No acceptance or approval of any Shop Drawings, Product data orsample, or any indication or request by the Engineer on any ShopDrawings shall constitute an authorization for any increase in the contractSum.

No work in the shop shall be started and no material or equipmeniordered until the Engineer has approved the shop drawings.

o

01140-6

1 .

sEcTloN - 01520

CONTRACTOR'S CAMP AND FACILITIES

SCOPE

The work to be done under this section consists of construdion, erection,Installation and maintenance of the Contractofs Project Site Offices or maincamp and the Contractor's sub-camps or temporary camps, if any, and shallinclude all offices, shops, warehouses, and other operational buildings; allhousing and related facilities including accommodations for the Contractor'spefsonnel.

The location of the Contractor's camps, including all buildings, utilities andfacilities thereof, and of the camps or establishments of all persons/parties in thevicinity operating or associated with the Contractor shall be subject to approval otthe Engineer.

The work to be done under this item will terminate upon the actual CompletionDate. However, if directed by the Engineer or the Employer, the Contractor shallcontinue such work to the extent required by the Contractor's personnel duringthe period of maintenance. No compensation shall be paid for the continuedoperation and maintenance of the Contractor's Camps during the period ofmaintenance.

Upon completion of the Works, or at such time within the period of maintenanceas directed by the Engjneer, the Contractor shall remove all buildings utilities andother facilities from the Site and restore all camp areas to a neat and cleancondition.

The construction, operation and maintenance of all camps of the Contractor shallcomply with all applicable provisions of current Pakistan Labor Camp Rules.

Adequately equipped and properly staffed portable first aid stations ordispensaries shall be provided by the Contfactor at camps and other strategiclocations to administer first aid treatment at any time required and free of chargeto all persons on the Site, including employees of the Engineer and theEmployer.

PAYMENT OF WORK

No payment shall be made for the work involved within the scope of this sectionof Specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bills of Quantiiies orheretn.

The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the bid quoted by thetenderer and quoted rates of other items of the Bills of Quantities.

01520-1

sEcTtoN - 01530

1 .

STAKE-OUT & PRE WORK SURVEY

SCOPE

Under this item the Conilactor shall make the stakeout & pre work survey forconstruction purposes with competently qualified men, and surveyors jointlyalong with Employe{'s fepresentative and in the presence of Engineer'srepresentative or his designated staff. The work shall proceed immediately uponthe award of the contract and shall be expeditiously progressed to completion ina manner and at a rate satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall keepthe Engineer fully informed as to the progress of the stakeout & pre work survey.The scope of this section of specifications js covered by detailed specificationsas laid down herein.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

All instruments, equipment, stakes survey monuments, bench mark and othermaterial necessary to perform all work shall be provided by the Contractor.These instruments and equipments and shall be available to Engineer at all timesfor the purpose of checking the work of the contfactor.

All & survey monuments stakes used shall be of a type approved by theEngineer, clearly and permanently marked so as to be legible at tjmes. lt shall bethe Contractor's responsibility to mainiain these stakes in the proper position andlocation at all times. Any existing stakes or makers definlng property lines andsuryey monuments which may be disturbed during construction shall be properlytied into fixed reference point before being disturbed and accur3tely reset in theirproper position upon completion of the work.

SUBMITTALS

Submit all survey data, computations, field notes, drawings, Topo maps, contourmaps, sections and all other survey records necessary to accomplish the work.

EXECUTION .

The Contractor shall trim trees, bushes and other interferjng objects, notconsistent with the plan, from survey lines in advance of all survey work to permitaccurate and unimpeded work by his stake-out survey crews and the Engineer'ssurvey crews. The exact position of all work shall be established from controlpoints, which are shown on the plans or modified by the Engineer. Any error,apparent discrepancy in or absence ot data shown or required for accuratelyaccomplishing the stakeout survey shall be referred to the Engineer forinterpretation or furnishing when such is observed or required.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of his work gnd shallmaintain all reference points, stakes, etc. throughout the life of the contract.Damaged, destroyed or inaccessible reference points, bench marks or stakesshall be replaced by the Contractor. Existing or new control points that will be orare destroyed during construction shall be re-established and all reference tiesrecorded thereon shall be furnished to the Engineer. All stakeout survey workshall be referenced to the centerlines shown on the Plans. All computationsnecessary to establish the exact position of the work from control points shall bemade and preserved by the Conhactor. All computations, survey notes andrecords necessary to accomplish the work shall be kept nearly and

o

01530-1

available to the Engineer upon request and furnished to the Employer uponContract completion.

The Engineer may check all or any portion of the stakeout and benchmarks forborrow pits shall be established by the Contractor.

Reference points, base lines, stakes and benchmarks for borrow pits shall beestablished by the Contractof.

All required righfof-way and easement limits shall be established, staked andreferenced by the Contractor concurrent with the construction stakeout survey.

The Contractor shall Dlace at least tvvo offset stakes or references at each centerlines station and at such intermediate stations as the Engineer may direct. Fromcomputations and measurements made by the Contractor, these stakes shall beclearly marked with the correct center line, station number, offset and cut or fill soas to permit the establishment of the true center line location during construction,He shall locate and place all out, fill, slope, line grade or other stakes and pointsas the Engineer may difect to be necessary for the proper pfogress ofthe work.

The Contractor shall mark all the center lines of the columns after the layout hasbeen checked. He shall make all the center l ines on masonry pil lars in cement,and shall maintain these pillars as long as desired by the Engineer.

The above mentioned masonry pillars shall be located at a distance where theyare not disturbed by the construction activity and the designation of the centerline as given on the drawings shall be clearly marked on the external vertical faceof the masonry pil lars in non-washable paint. The pil lars shall be high enough tobe easily identifiable and low enough to place a theodolite over them.

The Contractor shall be responsible for true and perfect setting out of the sameand for correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignments of allparts thereof il at any time any error in this respect shall appear durlng theprogress of the works. The Contractor shall at his own expense rectify such errorto the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The bench marks shall be made in masonry pillars on which the plinth level of thestructure shall be established. This bench mark shall be established in relation todatum established by the Engineer. The bench marks shall be mentioned at lesttill the finjshed project is handed over to the Employer or for a durationestablished by the Engineer.

Other shakeouts required during construction shall be supplied and installed bythe Contractor, as directed by the Engineer.

PAYMENT OF WORK

No payment shall be made for the work involved within the scope of this sectionof Specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bills of Quantities ornerern.

The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the bid quoted by thetenderer and quoted rates of other items of the Bills ol Quantities.

6f.$1\ l,qvt

01530-2

sEcTloN - 02200

TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT

SCOPE

The scope of work for anti-termite treatment includes injection of insecticide insides and bottom of foundation trenches, spraying on stockpiled backfill materialand injections of the insecticide in floor sub-grade of the building. The scopealso covers treatment of all wood works with insecticides before installation inposition.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

All methods of termite protection used herein shall be in accordance with thestandard practices of National Pest Control Association, U.S.A and the BritishWood Preserving Association.

SUBMITTALS

The Contfactor shall supply samples of all the materials to be used for insecticidecontrol for approval of the Engineer and testing in accordance with the specifiedstandards. Rejected materials shall be removed from the site immediately. Allsubmittals shall be made as per the requirements of section 01340.

MATERIAL

4.1 An emulsible concentrate insecticide shall be used for dilution with water,specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not bepermitted as a diluent. Provide a working solution of the followingchemical element and concentrations.

AGENDA 25EC containing FIPRONILOrApproved Equivalent

All mixing shall be done at site and mixing proportion of insecticide withwater shall be in ascofdance with the approved manufacturelsrecommendations and shall be verified by the Engineer.

Pure turpentine shall be used for dilutionpropoftion for application to woodwork.

of Insecticide, in approved

4.

4.2

4 .3

5. EXECUTION

5.'1 APPLICATION

The chemical shall be injected into the ground at various intervals beforeconcfete has been poured and as per the instructions of the manufacturers andshall ensure a proper seal around the structure. A minimum of 3 applicationsshall be made 24 hours apart or the numbel of applications recommendedapproved manufacturer, which eve is more. The Contractor shall tanecessary precautions to protect the laborers from any hard of hazardchemical used

62\\9 i t a

RV/

' \ - " ;02200-1

EXTENT OF APPLICATION

5.1.1 Insecticide solution shall be applied with approved pressurespraying equipment maintaining a pressure of 150 psi to allapplications to, on or in earth.

5 .1 .2 Soil treatment shall begin after all work of preparation of earthprior to installation of concrete has been done. After application,no additional earth moving or work upon sub grade should bedone. No covering of earth or concrete should be applied oversoil treatment until at least 24 hours after treatment has beenmade.

All excavations, all walls and bottoms of all pits or trenches forfootings of foundations are to be sprayed ad shown in thedrawings. Pesticide shall penetfate to a depth of '1' minimum inporous earth at bottom and 2" to 3" at sides of excavations.

5.1.4 Stock piled excavated materials to be used as backfill is to betreated as above. After backfilling to plinth level, the area isagain to be sprayed.

5.1 .3

5.1 .5

5 .1 .6

5 .1 .7

After grading, compaction and leveling and before installation ofany soling under slabs, all such areas are to be sprayed withpesticides, penetrating a minimum of 1" into soil.

Insecticide solution should not be applied during wet weather, orwhen the earth suface is excessively wet. Application should bemade to all areas beneath concrete slabs-on-grade, includingsidewalks and paving abutting buildings for distance of at least 2m beyond building l ine. Solution shall be applied in amounts ofnot less than 5 l it./ Sq.M or 5 l it./ ' l0.76 Sq.ft. of area. lf appliedover gravel or sand fill, application shall not be less than 7 lit./Sq.Ml or 7 lit./10.76 Sq.ft. of area. Insecticide shall penetrate to adepth of 1-inch minimum in pofous earth at bottom and 2 inch to3 inch at sides of excavations.

Sides of foundation excavations, grade beam, and similar areasshall be treated with solution at a rate of 0.5 lit per square feetupon inner sides of such excavations, and at all locations whereconcrete stabs for platforms and simjlar work abut the building.Similar treatment shall be made at all locations whereexpansion joints, control joints, column bases and similar workoccur at or below grade slabs.

In the areas of application signs shall be fixed to show that soiltreatment has been applied. Such signs shall be removed whenareas are covered by other construction.

5 .1 .8

5.1.9 Care shall be exercised to insure lhat no marks or damageoccurs to the finished structure as a result of the work under thisseqton.

All rough woodwork for the entire project is to be insecticidetreated (before application of solignum). lnsecticide shall besprayed on all surfaces of all the wooden work viz., doorframes, blocking, furring, planks, boards etc. before installatigk

5 .1 .10

l rames, blockrng. turnng. planKs, boaros elc. oerore Inslal lal lon. - .Spraving is to be done at the site, after delivery

"tO O*ffi\

02200-2 l +\o' I\,,,,1.,",:.,

6.

installation. No spraying shall be necessary after field sawing,jointjng or installation of such material.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

ln addition to the requirements of these specifications, comply withmanufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the work, includjngpreparation of substrata and application.

A professional operator shall be engaged who shall have license inaccordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soiltreatment solution.

81.4 Anti-termite treatment on stock piled

8.'1 .5 Termite control treatment to vertical surfaces.

6 .1

6.2

7. GUARANTEEThe Contractor is to guarantee that the building shall be free from termites (whiteants), wood bores and other pests, whrch cause damage to wood or otner organlcmaterialfor '10 years from the date of acceptance of the building.

In the event of any damage caused within the guaranteed period, the Contractorshall replace at his own aost such damaged material and {inishes a{fected and

racxtittnateriat.fff

suitably preserve and treat the entire premises with the best method known to thetrade to prevent the spreading of termites.

8. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT

8.'l GeneralExcept otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost there of shall be deemed to have been included in thequoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bills of Quantities.

8.'1.'1 Termite control treatment on wood works.

8. L2 Turpentine & Water required for mixing insecticide solution

8.'1.3 Transportation of material and storage at sjte.

8.2 Termite Control Treatment

8.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of termite conttol treatrnentwill be made on the basis of number of square metre of site area treatedby measuring the two dimensions (length & breadth) of treated area. Noseparate measurement will be made for the vertical or horizontal surfacesof the foundations/excavated area.

8.2.2 Payment

8.2.2.1 Payment will be madetermite control treatment

02200-3

for acceptable measured quua

of

-*,-i\-

r1' . ,

- l , - :

on the basis of unit rate per

a meter of site area (plinth area+2m beyond) treated as quoted inthe Bills of Quantities & shall constitute full compensation for allthe works related to the item.

8.2.2.2 For "Termite treatment control", the rate is for the unit site area(plinth area+2m beyond, irrespective of the number of story's inthe building) and covers the followings operations:

i. Treatment of bed and sides of excavated foundationtrencnes.

Treatment of backfill.

Treatment offilled up earth.

Treatment of timber to be used.

Treatment of surrounding areas within 2 Meters of thebuilding.

Any other operation which the specialized firm may deemnecessary in context to their guaranteed obligations.

nt,

o

o

O

rr**S(_r;

02200-4

a sEcTtoN - 02100

EXCAVATION, FILLING, BACKFILLING AND DISPOSAL (EARTHWORK}

SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labor, equipment, transportation, appliances and materials and in performing alloperations in connection with earthwork of all underground services andstructural units, roads and temporary drainage, stock piling of suitable excavatedmaterial, disposal of unsuitable and surplus excavated material, f i l l ing andbackfilling around or under the foundations or plinth beams in accordance withthis section of specifications, the applicable drawings and subject to terms andconditions of the Contract.

SUBMITTALS

The contactor shall perform a joint survey with the Engineeas Representative, ofthe area whefe earthwork is required, plot the ground levels on the drawings andobtain approval from the Engineer before starting the Earthwork. All submittalsshall be made as oer the reouirements of sectlon 01340.

MATERIALS

Unsuitable MaterialThe material shall be declared unsuitable if the soaked CBR (96 hours) is lessthan five (5) percent and/or if falls under A-6 or A-7 of AASHTO soilclassification.

Common Backfi l l /Fil lCommon backfill materials shall have soaked CBR (96 hours) greater than five(5) percent and shall not falls underA-6 or A-7 ofAASHTO soil classification.

1 .

3.1

3.3 GranularBackfi l l /Fil l

Granular backfill materials shall meet the following requirements.

a) GradingRequirementsMm Inch

1"

19 3t4', 60 - 100

'100 '100

75 - 10055 - 100

40 - 100

20-50

5-15

4.75

2.0

No.4 50-85

No.'f 0 40-70

0.425 No.40 25-45

0.075 No.200 0-15

b) l/atedal satisfying the requirements of coarse sand falling under soilclassification A-3 (AASHTO). ln case coarse sand is utilized forgranular fill it shall be ensured that the same is confined properly withaooroved matedal.

c) The material shall have a plasticity index of not more than sixdetermined by MSHTO T - 89 and T - 90.

02100-l

o 3.4

4.

Structural FillStructural fill materials shall be A-1, A-2 or A-3 of MSHTO classification andcombination thereof and shall have a bearing capacity greater or equal to thebearing capacity for which the foundations are designed for under the prescribedinches of settlement

EXECUTION

The Contractor shall be deemed to have made local and independent inquires asto, and shall take the whole risk of, the nature of the ground subsoil or material tobe excavated or penetfated and the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive anextra or additional payment nor to be relieved from any of his obligations byreasons ofthe nature of such ground subsoil or material.

All excavations, cuts and fills shall be consiructed to the lines, levels, slopes andgradients specjfied with any necessary allowance for consolidation, settlementand drainage so that at the end of the Defects Liability Period the Ground shellbe at the required lines, levels and gradients. During the course of the Contractand during the Defects Liability Period any damage or defects in cuts and fills, instructures and other works or rolling of stones/boulders caused by blasting orotherwise, slips, falls of wash-ins or any other ground movement due to theContractor's negligence shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at his own cost

4.1 SITE PREPARATION

4.1.1 The Contractot shallset out the wotk and shall be responsible fortrue and perfect setting out of the same and for correctness of thepositions, levels, dimensions and alignments of all parts thereof. lfat any time any error in this respect shall appear during theprogress of the work, the Contractor shall at his own expenserectify such error, to the satislaction ot the Engineer/EnglneeasRepresentative.

The contractor shall construct and maintain accurate bench mark4 .1 .2

a

so that the Lines and levels can be easilv checkedEngineer/Engineer's representative.

4.2 EXCAVATIONS

4.2 .1 Excavation shall include the removal of all material of every nameano naIUre.

It is expecied that rock and other hard matedal will beencountered during excavation. The fate of excavation shallinclude the removal of the sub-surface material of every name andnature and no classification of sub-surface material shall be made.

The major portion of excavations shall be carried out bymechanical excavators and excavated materials disposed off tostock on spoil as directed by the Engineer. The excavation may bedone by normal means. Unless otherwise specified by theEngineer, leveling, trimming and finishing to the required levelsand dimensions shall be done manually. The material suitablefill and backfill if approved by the Engineer shall be

4.2.2

02t00-2

t t--.--

I within the limlts of whole of the project site/outside the site atlocations designated and approved by the Engineer.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dispose-otfunsuitable excavated material anywhere without any lead of lift.

4.2.3 The Contractor shall give reasonable notice that he intends tocommence any excavation and shall submit to the Engineer fulldetails of his proposals. The Engineer's approval shall notrelieve the Contractor of his responsibility with respect to suchWOIK,

4.2.4 fhe contractor shall preserve the completed excavation fromdamage due to slips and earth movements, ingress of waterfrom any source whatsoever and deterioration by exposure tothe sun and the effects of the weathef.

All excavations shall be kept free of water and shall be maintaineddry to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Prevent surface water andsub-surface water from flowing into the excavation and floodingthe project site and surroundings.

Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations, remove waterfrom excavations to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,under cutting footings and soil changes detrimental to the stabilityof sub-grades and foundations. Provide discharge lines necessaryto convey the water away from the excavations. Convey water,removed from excavation and rain water, to outside the limits inmanner that no damages are caused to the surrounding servicesoroDerties.

Excavation for pits, cable trenches, equipment-foundations andother structures shall be taken out to the levels and dimensionsshown on Drawings or such other levels and dimensions as theEngineef may direct.

Excavation shall extend to adequaie distance irom walls andfootings to allow for placing and removal of forms, installations offorms, installations of services and for inspection, except wherethe concrete for walls and footings is authorized to be depositeddirectly against excavated surfaces. Undercutting will not bepermitted. The additional excavation for placing and removal offorms, installation of services, for inspection and generally forworking area on slopes for stability shall not be measured forpayment and shall be deemed to be included in the rates forexcavation as measured net.

Ali excavations in foundations shall be taken to 6 inch above thefinal excavation elevations shown on the drawings and the last 6-inch shall be rimmed carefully to a smooth and level surface.lmmediately after trimming to the final elevation, a layer ofblinding/Lean concrete shall be placed to the thickness shown onthe drawings. All excavations for foundations which have beentrimmed and disturbed shall be compaconcrete by the end of the day.

4 .2 .5

4.2.6

4.2.7

02100-l

d by lean

o

4.2.8 No Excavation shall be refilled nor any permanent workcommenced until the foundation has been inspected by theEngineer and his permission to proceed is given.

lf excavation for sub-structures is carried below the required level,as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, thesurplus depth shall be filled in with concrete of same grade as oflean concrete at the sole cost of the Contractor.

4 .2 .9

4.2.10 The placing of lean concrete, placing of reinforcement and castingof the permanent work in the excavation shall be carried out in thedry condition.

4.2.11 Shoring, where required during excavation, shall be installed toprotect workmen and the bank, adjacent paving, structures andutiliiies. The ternr shoring shall also be deemed to cover whatevermethods the Contractor elects to adopt, with prior approval of theEngineer, for upholding the sides of excavation and also forplankjng and strutting to excavation against the side of roadwaysand adjoining properties in existing hardcore of any other material.The contractor will be held responsible for upholding the sides ofall excavations and no claim for additional excavation, concrete orother matedal will be considered in the respect.

4.2.12 Existing utility lines that are shown on the drawings or thelocations of which are made known to the Contractor prior toexcavation and that are to be retained, as well as utility linesconstructed during excavation and backfilling, and if damaged,shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. Anyexisting utility lines which are not known to the Contractor insufficient time to avoid damage, if inadvertently damaged duringexcavation, shall be repaired by the contractor and adjustment inpayment vvill be made as approved by the Engineer. When utilitylines which are to be removed, are encountered within the area ofoperations the contractor shall notify the Engineer in ample timefor the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption ofthe serviceS.

4.2.13 Where applicable the excavation work shall include the excavationabove water table and excavation below water table. Thecontractor shall provide all plant, equipment, pumps, sheeting,well points as required to keep the water table 3.0 feet below thedeepest foundation as shown on the drawings till the completionof foundation works.

4.2.14 Befote starting the excavation for pipelines, the Contractor shallensure the correct alignment of the pipeline on the ground thedepth and width of excavation of the trench, all in accordance withthe drawings and instructions of the Engineer. The Contractorshall make profit with cement concrete pillars.

Excavaiion shall be carried out true to lines, levels, grades andwidths as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineerensuring proper laying of the pipe line, the bedding fill,construction of chambers for appurtenances and any otherstructures. The trench bottom shall be g ide even andsubstantial bearing over the spec

aii

,{:/

struclure.

02100-4

nd of

o

4.3

Without the written permission of the Engineer, not more than 600feet of the trench shall be opened in advance of the completePiPeline

4.2.15 The Engineer may require the contractor to excavate below theelevations shown on the dfawlngs or may order him to Stop abovethe elevations shown depending upon the suitable foundationmaterial encountered.

4.2.16 ll ior any reason, the levels, grades or profiles of the excavationsare changed adversely by the Contractor, the Contractor shall athis own cost, be liable to bring the excavations to the requiredlevels and profiles as shown on the drawings or as directed by theEngineer.

EXCAVATION TOLERANCES

AII glopes, lines and gfades shall be true, correct and accurate to thoseshown in the plans or otherwise directed and approved by the Engineer.The sub-grade in cuts shall be accurate to the authorized prolile grade forthe sub-grade to +/- one inch (1"). Where discrepancies are found in thework the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections.

EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATIONFor the purpose of excavation, the soil may be classified by the Engineerinto the following classifications:

4.4.1 EXCAVATION IN COI/IMON MATERIAL

Excavation in common Material consisting of Aeolian, alluvial,residual material consisting of gravel, shale volcanic ashes, loam,sand, clay or any combinaiion of these material.

4.4.2 EXCAVATION IN SOFT ROCK

Excavation in Soft Rook includes firmmetamorphic and sedimentary rock. Softremoved by manual Chiseling.

rigid igneous,which can be

4.4.3 EXCAVATION IN MEDIUM ROCK

Excavation in Medium Rock includes firm and rigid igneous,metamorphic and sedimentary rock. Medium rock, which can beremoved by Ripper attached to a Bulldozer (200 HP) andchiseling.

4.4,4 EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK

Excavation in hard Rock includes firm and rigid igneous,metamorphic and sedimentary rock. Hard rock constitute firm andcontinuous bed rock requiring blasting for excavation, This willinclude boulders larger than one quarter ( '1l4) cubic meter involume, provided these are firm and stable lying in the continuousbed and constitute more than 50%

4.4

rock,

type of materiai.

02100-5

mpareo to

o 4,4,5 EXCAVATION REQUIRING SPLITTING AND BLASTINGThis includes hard rock and similar other formation cannot beexcavated by the use ofjumpers, wedges and hammers, etc.

Blasting shall not be performed without the prior writtenpermission of the Engineer and without obtaining the explosivelicense from the concerned authorities. The contractor shall takeall necessary precaution for safety of person, property etc., asrequired by regulations and shall be implicitly obey all instructionon blasting as may be issued, without extra payment.

4.5 FILL AND BACKFILL

4.41 fhe backfilling shallfoundation trenches,

4.4.5

4.4.6

include filling under the floors, around thepipes, conduits, ducts and channels, etc.

oThe backfi l l ing shall include loading, unloading, transporting,placing, stacking, spreading of earth, watering, rolling, rammingand compacting, etc., complete as specified hefein.

4.4.2 Backlill or filing shall be either using structural fill or granularbackfill material or common backfill as directed and approvedby the Engineer.

4.4.3 Not Used.

4.4.4 The Contfactor shall provide the approved quality of backfill andfill material required to complete the fill and back-filling workfrom the places as designated by the Engineer.

Deep filling shall be predominantly granular material and freefrom slurry mud, organic or other unsuitable matter and capableof compaction by ordinary means.

o

Material for backfilling shall be as approved by the Engineer andshall be placed in layers not exceeding six (6) inches measured ascompacted material with sufficient water and compacted toproduce in-situ density not less than 95% (unless otherwisespecified on the drawings) of the maximum dry density at optimummoisture content achieved in Modified Proator Test (AAHSTO T-180).

Depending on the depth of fill the Engineer may instruct increasedthickness of successive layers to be placed.

The filling shall be compacted by mechanical means as approvedby the Engineer.

Filling around pipes and cables shall be carefully placed with finematerial to cover the pipe or oable completely before the nomal fillis placed.

Backfilling of trenches/foundations shall be carried out only after the4.4 .7pipe line/structural works within the excavations have been ,-inspected. tested and approved by the Engineer. ,.tr::

/ E\ l( ,,\\,/"{2-*f\ \1\ +faj,

02100-6 ,li( ,,illj \- 1,'

a 4.4.8 Fill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to approval bythe Engineer. Fil l shall be brought up evenly on each side of thewalls as far as practicable. Heavy equipment for spreading andcompacting the fill shall not be operated closer to the wall than adistance equal to the height ofthe fill above the top offooting.

4.4.9 Befofe the start of fill and backfill, the Contractor shall satisfyhimself as to the levels and slopes of the fills and backfill shown onthe Drawings, the requirements of compaction, the possibility ofsettlement & all other particulars whatsoever in oonnection with thefi l l ing works.

4.4.10 All filled areas shall be left neat, smooth and well compacted, thetop surface consisting of the normal site surface soil, unlessotherwise directed.

4.5 TOLERANCES

The stabilization of compacted backfill/fill surface shall be smooth andeven and shall not vary more than 3/8 inch in 10 feet from true profile andshall not be more than 1/2 inch from true elevation.

4.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL OR UNSUITABLEMATERIAL

4.6.'l The rejected unsuitable material and surplus excavated materialshall be disposed off by the Contractor. No compensation of anylead/lift is admissible and rates quoted shall be deemed to includethe same. The surplus excavated material shall be so placed thatit will present a neat appearance and not offer any danger toabutting properties.

4.6.2 fhe disposal of surplus/unsuitable excavatedinclude loading, unloading, transporting, stacking,leveling.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

5.1 General

material shall

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in theDocuments, no measufement and payment will be made for ihe undermentioned works related to the relevant BOQ items. The cost thereof shallbe deemed to have been included in the quoted unit rate of the respectjveitems of the Bill of Quantities.

5.1.1 Timber shoring, planking, strutting and providing slope forupholding the sides of excavations.

5.1.2 Any fill with approved matefial necessitated by over excavationdue to fault or convenience of the Contractor except undefstructural members.

5.'1.3 Stockpiling the excavated material at approved locationstransporting suitable material to places requiring fill or backfil

5.1.4 Specified foundation bed preparation.02100-'7

a

a 5.1.5 Excavation involved in providing adequate woRing space aroundsides offoundation an service line trenches.

5.1.6 Providing approved quality fill/backfill material obtained ffomexcavated material as designated by the Engineer.

5.1.7 Roll ing, leveling, watering & compacting the fi l l and backfi l l torequjred density.

5.1.8 All laboratory and field tests stipulated in these specifications.

5.1.9 Disposal of rejecled surplus and unsuitable excavaled

material anYWhere.

5.1.10 De-watering to keep the foundations dry during

construction-

EXCAVATION

5.1.1 Measurement

Quantities of excavation shall be calculated / measured from the pfe-work levels of leveled and graded ground taken jointly by the Contfactorand the Englneer before commencement of the work.

The quantities set out for excavation and its subsequent disposal shall bedeemed to be the bulk quantity before excavating and no allowance shallbe made for any subsequent variations in bulk or for any extraexcavation.

Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings quantities of excavation shall bemeasured of, acceptably completed works the basis of verticalexcavations requifed in accordance with lines of concrete.

Measurement and payment of excavation for laying service line trenchesshall be included in the relevant service lines items. No separate paymentshall be made under this item.

l\4easurement for acceptably completed excavation works shall be madeon the basis of number of cubic meter of material excavated forfoundation and service trenches as shown on the Dfawings of as directedby the Engineef.

5.1.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptably measured quantity of excavation onthe basis of unit fate per cubic meters quoted in the Bills of Quantities andshall constitute full compensation forincluding but not l imiting to back fi l l ing.

BACKFILUFILLS

5.2.'1 Measurement

all the wo*s related to the item,

Measurement for acceptably completed ba bemthe basis of number of cubic meter of compacted backfillffill

5.1

o

.rvj: \ , = ;02100-8

in positi

o accordance with the lines, levels and grade as shown on Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.

5.2.2 Paymenl

Payment will be made for acceptably measured quantity of backfillfill onthe basis of unit rate per cubic meter quoted in the Bills of Quantities andshall constitute full compensation or all the works related io the item.

K'+\\/9/ '\$r

c"\ ,/ !it2"\ ./^i.l\YYd/

02100-9

o sEcTtoN - 02300

STONE SOLING

SCOPE

The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliance, materials and performance of all operationsrequired in connection with the construction of stone soling in strictaccordance with the specifications and Drawings and / or as directed by theEngineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailedspecification as laid down herein.

STONE

Stone to be used shall comprise of strong, hard, durable stone of theapproved size, free from impurities, quarry sap, dust, dirt and solubilitycharacteristics. The stone shall be obtained fiom approved quarries and shallbe sound, free from laminations and weak cleavages.

CONSTRUCTION

Preparation of Sub-grade

Sub-gnde shall be formed of suitable materjals free ol clods, sod, roots,stumps, brush or other objectionable materials.

Sub'grade material shall be placed in successive layers not exceeding 6inchin thickness and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted at optimummoisture content.

The Maximum dry weight density of the sub-grade shall not be less then 95%of Modified AASHTO requirements.

Stone Ballast Soling

The Stone Ballast Shall be well graded and bfoken hard of 2 mesh obtainedffom an approved quarry.

The stone shall be laid and packed to even grades and well rolled usingvibratory roller / plate compactor to a consolidated thickness of net less then6inch or as shown on ihe Drawings.

The whole of the surface of the compacted stone ballast soling will be blindedwith murrum or any other approved gritty material stone dust (Khaka). Afterthe lnterstlces have been filled with smaller size crushed stone, so as toeffectively fill in the voids and crevices, soling area may be watered, ifnecessary and again thoroughly rolled with the same roller to produce asmooth and even surface free ffom irregularities , true to line and level.

Care is to be taken to avoid any damage to existing structures, mains orpipes while rolling operation is in progress. ln places inaccessible for a roller,compaction shall be done by hard tampers weighing not less then 20 lb. ofpower reams as directed by the Engineer.

1 .

O

3.1

3.2

o

02.101- I

o MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 General

4.2 Measurement:

4.3 Payment

Exoect otherwise sDecified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocument no measurement and payment wil l b made for theunder mentioned sDecified works related to the relevant items ofthe Bills of Quantities. The Cost thereof shall be deemed to havebeen included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of theBills of Quantities.

Any losses of:-(a) material, whjch may resultfrom shrinkage, compactaon, waste.

Overflow erosion etc.(b) Sub-grade preparation.(c) Blinding material of approved qualit,(d) Stone Soling

l\4easurement of acceptably completed works of stone ballastsoling will be made on the basis of number of cube feetcompacted soling in position as shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofcompacted stone ballast soling on the basis of unit rate per cubefeet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for allthe works related to the items.

J-{r,

r\gi)02301-2

a

1 .

sEcTtoN - 03t00

CONCRETE FORMWORK & ACCESSORIES

SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of fumishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations inany floor and at any height in connection with the supply and installation offormwo* for the purpose of shuttering in concreting work, complete in strictaccordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable drawingsand subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

As per the requirements of sections 0'1090.

SUBMITTALS

As per the requirements of sections 01340.

MATERIALS

The Contraclor shall use the following formwo* materials for different purposesas stated below:

4,1 TIIVIBER

Form framing and sheathing only upon approval ofthe Engineer.

4.2 PLWVOOD(l\i lARlNE)

Form sheathing and panels.

4.3 STEEL

- Sheathing and panels- Heavy forms and false work- Column and joint foms- Permanent forms- Welding of permanent forms

4.4 FORM TIES ANCHORS AND HANGERS

For securing formwork against placing loads and pressures.

COATINGS

To facilitate form removal.

STEEL JOISTS

For formwork support.

STEEL FRAME SHORING/PIPES

For formwork support.

4 .5

4 .6

6"lri;^./;s/ \+\r y t 16

R\=.{9

4.7

03100- I

oDELIVERY AND STORAGE

5.'1 DELIVERYThe delivery of formwork materials shall be done in such a manner thatdamage can be pfevented.

STORAGE

Formwork should be stored, after cleaning and preparing lor re-use ifused before, in such a manner that access to all different materials isavailable.

Material which can be affected by weathering shall be stored inappropriate building or under covers and shade.

EXECUTION

6.1 WORKMANSHIP

6.1.1 Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressureresulting from placement and vibration of the concrete and shallhave sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolefances.

Where fequired details and locations of special forms to be usedare set out on the drawings. The Engineer shall refuse anyformwork in any part of the building, which has been constructedwith a non-approved formwork. The Engineer shall refuse anyconcreting which.will not be perfect or may not conform to theaPProved model.

6.'1.2 Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces ofreinforced concrete work unless required as such or permitted bythe Engineer.

6.'1.3 Mud centering shall not be permitted without the prior approval ofthe Engineer.

6.1.4 a) Formwork except props & support shall be of wroughttimber (only upon approval of the Engineer), steel, marjneplywood, proprietary building boards and such specialmaterials, as may be shown cn the drawings or approvedby the Engineef, which give the required finish to thesurface of concrete. lvlarine plywood formwork shall be freefrom loose knots and shall be well seasoned.

b) No wooden props, bamboo, (ballies), etc., shall be used assupports to beams or roofs and floors. Only steel pipescaffoldings (tubular) to be used for all works.

No wooden formwork shall be allowed to be used incolumns, roofs and floors and beams etc. All the form workshall be of steel as aoproved.

5.2

Only wooden planks of approved quality and thickness of 2inches minimum on the inner sides of plinth beams

c)

03100-2

o fillers to bridge gap behrr'een steel sheathing of forms forroof shall be allowed on the approval of the Engineer.

e) All the erected formwork shall be inspected and approved inall respects by the Engineer or his representative prior toconcreting.

f) Where concrete will be exposed to view, special care shallbe taken in the selection of the form material and theconstruction of the forms, to the end that the concrete willbe smooth, uniform in texture, true in line and face and freefrom honeycombing and other projections. All sides andjoints on the forms shall be flush (without l ipping) andinconspicuous, wood used for such work shall bethoroughly cleaned before each reuse and shall be freefrom cracks, splinters, nails, or oiher defects effecting theappeafance of the concrete.

6.'1.5 The responsibility of the safe design of the formwork shall beentirely that of the Contractor.

6.'1.6 The formwork shall conform to the shaDe, l ines and dimensions asshown on the plans and be so constructed as to remainsufficiently rigid during the placing and compacting of theconcrete, and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of liquidffom the concrete.

The design and Engineering of the formwork, as well as itsconstruction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Wherenecessary, to maintain the specified tolerances, the foi'mr,vorkshall be cambefed to compensate for anticipated deflections inthe formwork due to the weight and pressure of the freshconcrete and due to construction loads.

The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbedconditioned until final completion and acceptance of the project,sutficient control Doints and benchmarks to be used asreferences for checking upon tolerances.

6.1.7 Forms for architectural concrete shall be designed to produce therequired finish or finishes. Deflection of facing materials betweenstuds as well as deflection of studs and wailers shall be limited to0.0025 times the span or as otherwise specified. Forms shall bedesigned to permit easy femoval. Prying against the face of theconcrete shall not be allowed. Only wooden wedges shallused.

6.'1.8 Where natural plywood-form-finish, grout-cleaned-finish, smrubbed- finish, scrubbed-finish or sand-floated-finish is required,forms shall be smooth (faced with plywood, Iiner sheets, or pfe-fabricated panels) and true to line. in order that the surfacesproduced will require little dressing to arrive at true surfaces.Where any as-cast finish is required, no dfessing shall bepermitted in the finishing operation.

Where as-cast surfaces, including natural plywood-form-finish arespecified, the panels of material against which concrete isshall be orderly in arrangement, with joints between

frI rio+,

6.1 .9

03100-3

o planned in approved relation toother architectural features-

building corners, and

6.1.1owhere panels for as-cast surfaces are separated by recessed orotherwise emphasized joints, the structural design of the formsshall provide for locating form ties, where possible, within thejoints so that patches of tie holes will not fall within the panelareas.

6.1.11 Forms shall not be re-used if there is any evidence of surfacewear and tear or defect, which would impair the quality of thesurface finish. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and properlycoated with form oil before re-use.

6.1.12 The formwork shall be designed so that the soffits of slabs andsides of beams, columns and walls may be removed first, leavingthe forms to the soffits of beams and their supports in position.

6.1.13 Forms shall be sufficiently t ight to prevent loss of mortar from theconcrete. Unless otheMise specified in the Contract Documentschamfer strips shall be placed in the comers of forms to producebeveled edges on permanently exposed surfaces. Interior cornerson such surfaces and the edges of formed joints will not requirebeveling unless required by the Contract Documents.

6. 1.14 Positive means such as wedges or jacks for accurate adjustmentand for propef removal of shores and struts shall be provided andall settlement shall be monitored during concrete placingoperation. Forms shall be seclrrely braced against l-ateraldeflections.

6.1.15 Where concreting of thin members is required to be carried outwithin formwork of considerable depth, temporary openings in thesides of the formwork shall be proved where necessary tofacilitate the placing and consolidation of concrete. smalltemporary openings shall also be provided at the bottom of theformwork for columns, walls and.deep beams to permit thecleaning out of debris and observation immediately before-^n^rar . i c .16n^c i+6 ,1

6.1.16 Form ties shall be constructed so that the ends or end fastenerscan be removed without causing appreciable spelling at the facesof the concrete. After the ends or end fastenerc of form ties havebeen removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminatenot less than 2 diameter or twice the minimum dimension of thetie from the formed faces of concrete to be permanently exposedto view except that in no case shall this distance be less than 3/4inch. When the formed face of the concrete is not to bepermanently exposed to view, lorm ties may be cut off flush withthe formed surfaces. Precaution shall be taken not to rotate formties.

Through bolts may be permitted provided that they are greased toallow for easy withdrawal and the holes subsequently madegood. Through bolts are not tostauctures and basement walls.

o

a03100-4

n water-retainin

a 6.1.17 At construction joints contact suface of the form sheathing forflush surfaces exposed to view shall oveilap the hardenedconcrete in Xhe previous placement by no less than 'l inch. Theforms shall be held against the hardened concrete to preventoffsets or loss ot mortar at the construction joint so as to maintaina true surface.

6.1.'18 Forms for wall opening shall be constructed to facil i tate loosening,if necessary to count€ract svlelling of the forms.

6.1.'19 Wedges used for final adjustment of the forms prior to concreteplacement shall be fastened in position after the final check.

6.1.20 Formwork shall be so anchored to shores or to other supportingsurfaces or members that upward or lateral movement of any partof the formwork system during concrete placement will not occur.

6.1.21 Runways or planks for moving labour and equipment shall beprovided with struts or legs and shall be supported direc y on theformwork or upon the structural member without restjng on thereinforcing steel.

6.1.22 All surfaces of forms and embedded materials ehall be cleaned ofany accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and ofall other foreign material before placing fresh concrete.

6.1.23 Forms shall be $ufficiently iight to prevent leakage of groui orcement paste. Boafd forms having joints opened by shrinkage ofthe wood shall be removed and replaced. plywood and otherwood surfaces not subject to shrinkage shall be sealed againstabsorption of moisture from the concrete by eitherl

(1) a field applied, approved form oil or sealer, or

(2) a factory applied non-absorptive liner.

Vvhen forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it shattdone prior to placing of the reinforcing steel. Excess coatingmaterial shall not be allowed to stand in puddles in the forms norallowed to come in contact with the concrete against which freshconcrete wilJ be placed. Care shall be taken thal such approvedcomposition is keep out of contact with the reinforcement. Whereas-cast finishes are required, materials, which will impart a stain tothe concrete, shall not be applied to the form surfaces. Where thefinished surface is required to be painted, the material applied toform surfaces shall be compatible with the type of paint to beu5ed.

6.1.24 For reinforced concrete, in no circumstances shall forms bestruck until the concrete attains 75olo of ultimate strength.

The strength referred to shall be that of concrete using the samecement and aggregates, with the same proportions, and curedunde[ conditions of temperature and moisture similar to thoseobtaining in the work. Where possible, the formwork should beleft for longer time, as it would assist the curing. ---...

. t f03 t00_5 : +\n

\tt

o

o

In normal circumstances (generally where temperatures areabove 20' C and where ordinary cement is used, forms may bestruck after expiry of the following periods.

Walls, columns and vertical sides of 48 hours or as may beBeams decided by the

Engineer.

Side of slab (shores of props leftunqer).

6 days.

Beams soffits (shores or props left 12 days.unoer).Removal of shores or props to slabs.L Spanning upto '12 feet.2. Spanning over 12 feet.

Removal of shores or props to beams.1. Spanning upto 18 feet.2. Spanning over 18 feet.

10 days.l6 days.

18 days.25 days.

For rapid hardening cement 3/7 of the above period will besufficient in all cases except vertical sides of slabs, beams andcolumns, which should be retained for a minimum of 24 hours.

The number of shores or props, their sizes and disposition shallbe such as to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slaband beams, as the case may be,

Propef allowance shall be made for the decrease in rate ofhardening of concrete in cold weathef and the above minimumduration must be increased when the mean dailv temperature isbelow 20" C.

6.1.25 When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at an earlyage, fofms shall be removed as soon as the concrete has

. hardened sufficiently to resist damage ffom removal operations.

6.1.26 Top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete shall be removed assoon as the concrete has attalned sumcient stilfness to Dreventsagging. Any needed repairs or tfeatment fequifed on suchsloping surfaces shall be performed at once and be followed bythe specified cudng.

6.1.27 Forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon asthis can beaccomplished without damage to the concrete.

6.1.28 All formwork shall be removed without such shock or vibration aswould damage the feinforced concrete. Before the top plank andstruts are removed, the concrete surface shall be exposed wherenecessary in order to ascertain that the concrete has sufficientlyhardened. Pfooer orecautions shall be taken to allow for thedecrease in the rate of hardenino that occurs with all cement inthe cold weather.

6.1.29 When reshoring or repropping is permitted oroperations shall be planned in advance and shallapproval. While reshoring is undeMay no live

03100-6

requtreq,be subi

Ioad sha

permitted on the new construction. In no case during reshoringshall concrete in beam, slab, columns or any other structuralmembef be subjected to combined dead and construction loadsin excess of the load permitted by the Engineer for the developedconcrete strength at the time of reshoring.

Reshores shall be placed as soon as practicable after strippingooerations are comolete but in no case later than the end oiworking day on which stripping occurs.

Reshores shall be tightened to carfy their required loads withoutoverstressing the construction. Reshores shall remain;n place atleast until tests representative of the concrete being supportedhave reached the strength specified in sub-clause 6.1.23 hereof.

6,1.30 Floors supporting props or shores under newly placed concreteshall have their original supporting props or shores left in place orshall be reshored. The reshoring system shall have a capacitysufficient to resist the anticipated loads and in all cases shallhave a capacity equal to at least one half the capacity of theshoring system above. The reshores shall be located directlyunder a shore position above unless other locations areDermitted.

The reshoring or re-propping shall extend over a sufficient numberof storeys to distribute the weight of newly placed concrete, forms,and construction l ive loads in guch a manner that the designsuperimposed loads of the floors supporting shores or props arenot exceeded.

6.'1.3'1 lt is generally desirable to give forms for reinforced concrete anupward camber to ensure that the beams or slabs (speciallycantilever slabs) do not have a sag when they have taken up theirdeflection, but this should not be done unless permitted by theEngineef.

6.1.32 No loads, other than man and light plant required in conneotionwith the actualwork in hand, shall be allowed on suspended floorsuntil 28 days after concreting where ordinary Portland Cement isused and 14 days when rapid hardening Portland Cement is used.

6.1.33 Prior to placing concrete, all forms shall bedebris and extraneous matter removed. The

inspected and allform oil or release

aoent shall not react with concrete to affect nor shall itgive any colour.

7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No payment will be made for the works involved within s sectronof the specifications unless otherwise specifically stated inor herein.

of Quantities

The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in quoted unit rates ofrelevant items of the Bills of Quantities.

6t T\rj

03100-7

1 .

sEcTtoN.03200

REINFORCEMENT

SCOPE

The work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing, cutting,fabricating, bending and placing steel reinforcement and Welded wire fabric in anyfloor and at any height in concrete structures or elsewhefe as shown on thedrawings or as directed by the Engineer.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following British and ASTM Standards are relevant to thesespecifi cations wherever applicable.Bdtish Standards

2.

BS 785concrete.BS 4449BS 4461BS 4466

4483

A 305

A 6 '15A ',185

A 706

Hot rolled bars and hard drawn wire for the reinforcement of

Hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concreteCold worked steel bars for reinforcement of concrete.Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars fof the reinforcementof concrete.Welded steel wire fabrics.

ASTM Standard

In addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistan Standards, Britishstandards, American Concrete Institute Standards, American Society for Testingand Materials Standards and other standards as may be specified by theEngineer for Special Material and construction are also relevant.

SUBMITTALS

lvlinimum requirement for the deformations of deformed steel barsfor concrete reinforcement.Deformed billet steel bars for concrete reinforcement.Welded steelwire fabric for concrete reinforcement.Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Barsfor Concrete Reinfof cement

Reinforcement shall be obtained only from manufacturers approved b!the Engineer; Each consignment of reinforcement steel shall beaccompanied by the manufacturer's certificate or shall refer to a previouscertificate, if the consignment is from the same batch, showing that thereinforcement steel complies with the specified requirement. lf suchcertificate is not made available or if the Engineer considers that themanufacturels tests are inadequate, samples shall be taken foracceptance test from different consignments as the Engineer may directand shall be tested at the contractofs cost. Should the result of such testsshow that the sample does not meet with the specifications the wholeconsignment shall be rejected and removed from the site at theContractor's cost. All submittals shall be made

3.1

O

section 01340.

03200-l

the requirements of

O 3.2 BAR BENDING gCHEDULES

The Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules of all the reinforcingsteel bars and these bar bendjng schedules shall be submitted to theEngineer for his approval.

All detail ing shall be done as per ACl, standards ACI-315 & 318. Thecontractor shall obtain approval of the bar bending schedules beforestarting actual bar bending works.

MATERIAL AND SIZE OF BARS

4.1 Reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the respective British,ASTM, or other Standards as specified in the Drawings and in theContfact Documents or as may be specified by the Engineer.

4.2 Unless otherwise specified, all deformed reinforcing bars shall compl,with the requirements of ASTM A706 for deformed cold worked newstock billet steel bars and shall have a minimum characteristic strengthof 60 ksi.

4.3 Reinforcement shall be free from all loose or flaky rust and mill scale, orcoating, including ice, and any other substance that would reduce ordestroy the bond. Reduced section steel reinforcement shall not beuseo.

DELIVERY AND STORAGE

5.'1 DELIVERY

Steel reinforcement bars shall be kept in bundles firmly secured andtagged. Each baf or bundle of bafs shall be identified by marks stampedon hot or cold or painted on or by any other means. The identifyingmarks shall contain the following information:

- Name of the producer or his trade.

- Standard to which the bars have been manufactured.

- The class type and stfength. - The diameter.

- The number of the test certificate.

5.2 STORAGE

The method of storage shall be approved by the Engineer. Reinforcingbars shall be stored in racks or platforms above the surface of groundand shall be protected free from scaling, rusting, oiling, coaiings,damage, contamination and structural defects prior to placement inworks. Bars of different diameters and grades of steel reinfofcementshall be kept separately.

FABRICATING, BENDING & PLACING

6.1 Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordanwith the dimensions shown in the bar-bending schedule approvedEngineer.

03200-2o

6.2

6.3

The cutting tolerance for all bars shall be + I inch.

Where an overall or an internal dimension of a bent bar is specjfied in theschedule, the bending tolerance, unless otheMise stated, shall be as inTable 1.

Table 1:

Dimensions of bent bars

Bending Tolerances

Upto & includingfeet

Tolerance

plus mrnusinch inch

1t51 /51 t5

363

6

OverFeet

Reinforcement shall not be bent of straightened in a manner that williniure the material.

No bars shall be bent twice in the same place, nof shall they bestraightened after bending.

Unless permitted by the Engineer, reinforcement shall not be bent afterbeing partially embedded in hardened concrete.

Bars which depend for their strength on cold working shall not be heatedfor any reason.

Welding shalt be pemitted for bars only under suitable conditions andwith suitable safeguards in accordance with BS 693, BS 1856, or AWSD12.'1, provided the type of reinforcing bar has the required weldingproperties. Tack welding may be used to fix jn position bars that crosseach other, only with prior approval of the Engineer. Welding shall bedone as in lectum structural steel & metalworks.

No splice of reinforcement shall be made except as shown on theworking drawings.

Reinforcement is to be accurately placed as shown in the drawings, andsecured against displacement by using 18-20 gauge black annealed wireties or suitable slips at intersections and supported from the formwork byusing concrete, metal or plastic chairs and spacers or hangers of anapproved pattern. Where concrete blocks are used for ensuring thecover, they shall be made of mortar not leaner than 1 part of cement to 2parts of sand.

Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in thefinished structure. the portions of all accessories in contact with theformwork shall be galvanized or shall be made of plastic.

1t5't t51

6.4

6.6

6 .7

o03200-l

6.8 Concrete clear cover tor reinforcing steel shall be as follows:

6.9 Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:

6-10 Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with otherreinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. lf bars are moved morethan one bar diameter or enough to exceed the above tolerances, theresulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval of Engineer.

6.'1'1 Vertical bars in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter atlapped splices. To ensure proper placement, templates shall befurnished for all column dowels.

6.12 Exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions is tobe effectively protected from corrosion. Protection is also to be providedto reinforcement partly built into concrete where the exposed part is to bebuilt into later concrete.

6.13 All reinforcement, at the time concrete ismile scale, loose rust mud, oil grease,adversely affect or reduce the bond.

6.14 No concreting is to be carried out unti lchecked and approved by the Engineef.

placed, shall be free of looseor othef materials that may

the reinforcement has been

Structural Members Minimum Cover (inches)

loncrete cast against andrermanentlv exoosed to earth

l

r) loncrete exposed to earth or weatheri(i) For reinforcing bafs # 6 or larger 2

(ii) For reinJorcing bars less than # 6

loncrete not exposed to weather or in contact withlround:llabs, Walls 3t4

3eams, Columns:'Ties/Stirrups reinf orcement)| -1t4

1 . loncrete cover to formed surfaces 114 inch

2. Minimum spacing between bars 114 inch

3. Top bars in slabs and beams

a. Members 8 inch deep or lessb. lMembers more than 8 inch but not over 2 feetc. Members more then 2 feet deep

t 114 incht 112 incht 1 inch

4 . Crosswise of members: paced evenlv within 2 inch5 . Lenqthwise of members t 2 inch

Kr_'.si / l

w"l,p03200-4

MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT

7.1 General

Except otheMise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for theunder mentioned specified works related to the relevant items ofthe Bills of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to havebeen included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of theBills of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shallinclude work to be executed under these specification in any floorand at any height except where otherwise specifically stated in therelevant item of Bill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not beentitled to any claim or claim any compensation on this account.

Providing and installing cover blocks, chairs, supports, hooks,spacers, binding wires, and laps not shown on drawings includingwastage and rolling margin and as such are not payable. Lapsshown on drawings shall be payable.

7.2 [Iild Steel and Deformed Steel

7.2.1 MeasurementMeasurement for acceptably completed works ofreinforcement according to bar bending schedulesapproved by the Engineer shall be made by weight.

Computed on the bases of table 2. The Contractor shallnot claim for the difference in the actual weights of barsand thejr-st€ndard weights given in Table-2. . -

Nominal Bar Diameter Bar No.(lnches).1.25t8',

3t8"1t2"5ta'3/4"7 t8"1"11la"1-1t4"

Weiqht(Lbs/ft.)0.0660.1670.3760.6681.O441.503

#2#3

#7#8#9#1

.046

.1762204.60 Lbs = 1.00 tonne* to the nearest 1/7"

7.2.2 PaymentiPayment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofreinforcement on the basis of unit rate per metric tonquoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for all the works related lo the item.

The rate quoted include all lead/lift required for steel

{(

o sEcTtoN - 03300

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

SCOPE

The wo|k under this section of the specification consists of furnishing allplant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing alloperations in connection with the supply and installation of plain andreinforced concrete work complete in any floor and at any height as perdrawings except where specifically stated in the relevant item of Bill ofQuantities, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and theapplicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.The scope of this section of soecification is covered with detailedspecifications as laid down herein.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British and ASTM Standards arerelevant to these specifications wherever applicable.

2,1 ASTM (AIi]ERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS)

B 370 Copper sheet and strip for buildinq construction.C 31 SamDlino of Concrete CvlindersC 33 Concrete Aqoreoates

1 .

,

o

c40c87c88c94c 109c 117c 123c 125c 127c 128c 131c 136c 142c 143c 144c 150c 156c 171c 185c 188c 191c 260c 289c 309c 330

c 332c 494

D75

Orqanic imourit ies in sand for concrete.Effect of orqanic imourities in fine aqoreqates on of mortar.Soundness of aqqreqates.Ready mixed Concrete.Compressive strength of hydraulic cement moriars.Material finer than No.200 (0.075mm) sieve.Liohfweiqht pieces in aqqreoates.Concfete and concrete aggregates.Specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate.Specific ofavitv and absorption offine aqqreqate.Resistance to abrasion of small size coarse aooreoates.Sieve or screen analysis of fine and coarse aggregate.Clay lumps and fdable particles in aggregates.Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.Aooreoate for masonrv mortar-Portland Cement.Water retention bv concrete curinq materialSheet material for curino concrete.Air content or hvdraulic cement mortar.Densitv of hvdraulic cement.Time of settino of hvdraulic cement bv vicat needle.Air entrainino admixtures for concrete.Potential reactivitv of aqqreqate.Liquid membrane-forminq compounds for curino concrete.Liqhtweiqht aqqreqates for structural concrete.Liohtweioht aooreoates for concreie masonry.Liqhtweioht aooreoates for insulatinq concrete.Chemical admixtures for concrete.Resistance to abrasion of large size coarse aggregates.Unit weight of structural lightweight concrete.Aggregate sampling.

D 994 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete.D 1 19 Concrete ioint sealer (hot poured elastic tvpe).

D 1752 Prefocmed sponge rsbber and cork expansion iointconcrete paving and structural construction.

A'J rt;\-

\ : ' \

\*l

03300-1

paving and structural construction.Concrete joint sealer (cold application type).Wire cloth sleeves for testinq purposes.Water vapor transmission of materials in sheet form.l\4aterials for use as vapor baffier under concrete slabs.Relative humidity by wet and dry bulb psych'gmeter.

2.2 ACI (AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE)

Recommended practice for selecting proportions for normal andheavy weightconcrete.Recommended practice for evaluation of strength test result ofconcreteSpecifications for structural concrete for buildings.

304 Recommended practice for measuring, mixing, transporting andplacrngconcrete.Hot weather concreting.Recommended practice for curing concrete.Recommended practice for consolidation of concrete.Building code requirements for reinforced concrete.Recommended pfactice for concrete formwork.Pre-cast structural concrete in building.Low pressure steam curing.Fabrication, handling and erection of pre-cast concrete wallpanels.

2.3 BRITISH STANDARDS

D 1850

E ' t1E96E 154

211 .1

214301

3053083093't8347512517533

BSBSBS

BSBS

BSBSBSBSBSBS

CP

410412

882130518813148383753283869392740278110114116

5337

Poriland cement, ordinary and rapid hardening.Test Sieves.liethods for the samplino and testinq of mineralfillers.CoaFe and fine aggregates from natural sources.Batch Mixer.Methods oftestinq and samolinq concrete.Tests for water for makinq concrete.Exoanded polvstvrene boards.Structural Concrete..Rioid exDanded oolwinvl chloride for thermal insulation.Phenolic foam materials for thermal insulation and buildinSulohate-resistino Portland cement.Structural use of concrete,Structural use of reinforced concrete in buildinos.Striictural use of Drecast ooncrete.The structural use of concrete for retaining aqueous liquids.

In addition, the latest editions of other Pakistan and British Standards, AmericanConcrete Institute Standards, American Society for Testing and MaterialsStandafds and other Standards as may be specified by the Engineer for specialMaterials and Construction are also relevant.

SUBMITTALS

Suitable templates or instructions or both shall be provided for setting outitems not placed in the forms. Embedded items and other materialsmechanical and electrical operations shall have been cominspected, tested and approved before concrete is placed.

;1

3.1

03300-2

3.2a

3.4

3 .5

3.6

For special concrete finish and for special methods of construction (e.9.slip forms) formwork shop drawings shall be designed and prepared by thecontractor, at his own cost. Approval of shop drawings as well as that ofactual samples of concrete finish shall be obtained before work iscommenced.

The Contfactor shall supply to the Engineer at fortnightly intervals, testcertificates with the appropriate standard in respect of the samples ofcement from the work-site. These tests shall be carded out in a laboraloryapproved by the Engineer.

The grading of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be tested at leastonce for every '100 tons supplied, to ensure that the grading is uniform andsame as that ofthe samples used in the preliminary tests.

Where doubt exists as to the suitability of the water, it shall be tested inaccordance with BS 3148.

The Contractor shall provide Mix design by weight for each class ofconcrete.

Manufacture 12 test cylinder for each 3 mix design batches (6 Dia. x 12high) inches in accordance with the lilix design batching by weight andtest 3 cylinders each at 3, 7, 14 & 28 days intervals in the presence ofEngineeds Representative and submit all relevant data and results oftests for approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain approvalfrom the Engineer in writing for each Mix design before producing theactual concrete for the Works-

'Workability' of Concrete shall be determined by either the slump orcompaction factor tests as direoted by the Engineer and these shall beperformed in accordance with the methods given ASTM C '143.

The slump or compaction factor for each class of concrete shall bedetermined during the preliminary Test mixes and the value obtainedshall not be modified without the written consent of the Engineer.

lvlanufactureas recommendations and instructions along with the sampleof material shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

3.8

3.9 The Contractor shall, at his own cost, make optimum mix design andtesting 'for approval o{ the composition oJ Non Shrinking grout and NonShrink second stage Concrete Grout, priof to Commencement of thework.

3.10 The Contfactor shall be required to submit a sample of pre-cast unit forthe approval of the Engineer; all pre-cast units shall strictly conform to theapproved sample. The proposal for transporting and erecting pre-castunits in position shall also be submitted by the Contractor for the approvalof the Engineer.

3.11 All submittals shall be made as per the requirements of section 01340.

#s:t I

W-"".'j$03300-3

a 4. MATERIALS

4.1 Aggregates

4.1.'1 The soufces of supply of all f ine and coarse aggregates shall besubject to the approval ofthe Engineer.

4.1.2 All line and coarse aggregates shall be clean and free from clay,loam, silt and other deleterious matter' lf required, the Engineerreserves the right to have them washed by the Contractof at noadditional expense. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be deliveredand stored separately at site. Aggregates shall not be stored onmuddy ground or where they are likely to become dirty orcontaminated.

4.1.3 Fine aggregate shall be hard coarse sand, crushed stone or gravelscreenings and shall conform to requirements of PS 243 and/or BS882 and/or ASTM C 33. Only fine aggregate ot grading zones 1 to3 (BS 882) shall be used.

a- 4.1.4 Coarse aggregate shall be gravel or crush stone of hard, durable

material free from laminated structure and conforming to PS 243and/or BS 882 and/orASTI/ C 33 graded as follows for use in massconcrete as in foundations:

Total Passino B.S. Sieve Percent bv weioht3 in. (76.20 mm) 100'1.5 in (38.10 mm) 95-1000.75 in . (19 .05 mm) 30-700.37 in. (9.52 mm) '10-35

0.19 in. (4.76 mm) 0-5

O

Coarse aggfegate for all cast-in-place concrete other than massconcrete as for foundations shall be graded with the following limits:

reinforcing bars or between bars and forms, whichever is least.Pre-cast columns the nominal maximum size of the aggregi

4.1.5 Wherever feasible, the nominal maximum size of aggregate forcast- in- place reintorced concrete slabs and other membersshall be 3/4 inch. lf there are difficulties in placing such concretethe maximum size may be restricted to 1l2 inch provided therequirements for strengih are satisfied. The gradingrequirements of 1/2 inch or 3/8 inch down aggregate shall beagreed to with the Engineer as per relevant ASTM/BS standards.

The nominal maximum size of the aggregate for pre-castconcrete shall not be larger than one fifth of the narrowestdimension betvveen sides of forms, of onelhird of the depth ofslabs or three-fourths of the minimum clear distance between

O

Total Passing

19.05 mm0.38 in.0.'19 in.

4 . '1 .6

03300-4

4.1 .7

shall be limited as above but shall not be larger than two-thirds ofthe minimum clear distance between bars.

Coarse aggregates in pre-cast concrete of normal weight may beof one maximum size for all concrete placed in I day whenquantities to be placed are too small to permit economical use ofmore than one mix design.

When a single mix design is so used, the maximum nominal sizeshall be as required for the most critical condition of concreting, inaccofdance with the requirements of clause (4.1.6) above.

For use in fireproof concrete, the aggregates shall be fire clayand semi-acidic fine ground. The use of broken fire clay bricks ascoarse aggregate and waste of semi-acidic refractory particles asfine aggregate can be allowed.

o

4 .1 .4

4,2 CEMENT

4.2.1 The cement shall be fresh and of approved origin andmanufacture. lt shall be one of the following as may be specified bythe Engineer.- ordinary or Rapid Hardening Portland cements complying

with the requirements of PS 232 or BS '12 or ASTM C 150.

- Sulphate Resisting Portland/Cement complying with therequirements of PS 612 or BS 4027 or ASTlil C 150.

4.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, ordinary Portland cement complyingwith the requirements of BS 12 shall be used.

4.2.3 Fot all faif faced concrete it will be necessary to use approvedcement with a view to obtain light shade concrete as approved bythe Engineer.

4.2.4 Only one brand of each type of cement shall be used for concrete inany individual member of the structure. Cement shall be used in the' sequence of receipt of shipment, unless otherwise directed.

4.2.5 There shall be sutficient cement at site to ensure that each sectionof work is completed without interruption.

4.2.6 Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from leaky containersshall not be used.

4.2.7 Cement shall be used as soon as possjble aftef delivery andcement which the Engineer considers has become stale orunsuitable through absorption of moisture from the atmosphereor otherwise shall be rejected and removed immediately from thesite at the Contractor's expense, Any cement in containersdamaged so as to allow the contents to spill or permitting accessof the atmosphere prior to opening of the container at the time ofconcrete mixing shall be rejected and removed immediately fromthe site at the Contractor's expense.

4.2.8 The mixing together of differentpem'tted.

03300-5

types nt will not

4.3 WATER

Only clean water from the city supply, tube well installed at the site orfrom other sources approved by the Engineer shali be osed. TheContractor shall and cleaning plant and tools. Where water can beshown to contain any sugar or an excess of acid, alkali or salt, theEngineer may refuse to permit its use.

In case of doubt, the Engineer may require that concrete mixed withwater proposgd to be used should not have a compressive strengthlower than 90 percent of the strength of concrete mixed with distilledwater.

ADDITIVE

All additives such as foaming and water proofing agents shall be from amanufacturer approved by the Engineer.

Air Entraining Admixtures shall conform to ASTI\il C 260. OtherAdmixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494.

NOI\iIINAL CONCRETE MIXES

4.5.1 Proportions of Mix

a) Cement and aggregates:

Cement, fine aggregate and the coarse aggregate shall beweighed separately. The proportions of cement to fine aggregateand coarse aggregate shall be adjusted so as to provide theconcrete of the required crushing strength when tested as set outin Table 1.

o

4 .4

4.5

D) The Contractor shall regulate and arrange mixing of theingredients for the designed mix of the concrete by weightbatching. The cost of designing the mix shall be borne by theContfactof.

Water/Cement ratioi

The quantity of water used shall be just sufficient to producedense concrete of adequate stfength and workability for itspuroose. For all external work and foundations the watet/cementratio should not exceed 0,55 for concrete Class A and B.

Wo.kabil ity:'Wo|.kability' shall be determined by either the slumpcompaction factor tests as directed by the Engineer and theseshall be perfofmed in accordance with the methods given inBS 422 to BS 177 orASTlVl C 143.

The slump or compaction factof for each class of concreteshall be determined during the preliminary Test mixes and thevalue obtained shall not be modified without the writtenconsent of the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted orspecified, the concrete shall be proportioned and produced tohave a slump of 3 inch or less for consolidation by vib|ation. A

03300-6

c)

a tolerance of upto '1 inch above the indicated maximum shall beallowed for individual batches provided the average for allbatches or the most recent 10 batches tested, which ever isfewer, does not exceed the maximum limit. Concrete of lowerthan usual slump may be used provided it is properly placedand consolidated.

Shength requirements for concrete

a) Concrete made with Portland cement shall comply with thestrength requirements of Table I

Strength requirements for Portland concrete with aggregates complyingwirh ASTM c31 & c90.

Tab le 1 :

4.5.2

The strengths given in Table 'l are based on the assumptionthat average temperature is 20 degree C. Where accuraterecords of temperature are kept, allowance may bechange of temperature or the cylinders may beequivalent maturity.

All structural concrete shall conform to BS 5328.

d) Unless otherwise stated, the types of concrete sclassified on the basis of compressive strength requirements.The Contractor shall provide Mix design by weight for eachclass of concrete.

lvlanufacture 12 test cylinders (6 Dia. x '12) inches inaccordance with the Mix design batching by weighi and test 3cylindefs each at 7, 14 & 28 days intervals in the presence ofEngineer's Representative and submit all relevant data andresult of tests for approval of the Engineer. The Contractorshall obtain approval {rom the Engineer in writing for each Mixdesign before producing the actual concrete for the Works.

No payments for producing the Mix design, manufacture oftest cylinders and testing shall be paid. The Contractor shallinclude this cost in the relevant item of concrete

PVC WATER STOP/HYDROFOIL

All PVC water stops/hydrofcil shall be central bulb or ribbed typemanufacturer approved by the 'Engineef. The specific gravity of

b)

c)

Class of Concrete

Nominal Ratio is indicative only,Contractor to prepare mix Designio achieve the cylindrical strengthfor the corresponding class ofconcrele

Cylinder strength at28 days after mixing& pouring (psi)

1 :1 t2 4500

B ' l :1 .5 :3 4000

c 1:2'.4 3000

D 1:3ro 2200E (Lean Concrete) 1 :2 t4 1400

4.6

03t00-7

4 .7

water stop/hydrofoil shall not be less than 1.37 and full streich Break cutintensity when tested at nofmal temperature shall not be less than 1875pst.

The material shall have a modulus of rigidity of 850 psi at +100 C andlO,50O psi. at 20'C.

NON.SHRINK GROUT:

Grout for placement under base and bearing plates of machinery andequipment, for grouting anchor bars and dowels and for similar uses shallbe as follows:

4.7.' l Composition

a) Non-shrink grout of less than 1-inch thickness shall consistof one part Portland cement and one part of clean sharpsand conforming to the requirements of thesespecifications and 1:22,000 to 1:15000 part of grainedaluminum powder contalning non-polishing agent.

b) Non.shrink grout of '1 inch or more in thickness shall beproportioned as above except that 1-112 parls of 3/8 inchto 1/4 inch pea gravelshall be added.

c) The above-specified composition may be varied if requiredby the Engineer.

d) Proportioning shall be done by weight.

e) lilixing water shall be proportioned so as to provide a flowable mixture without segregation or bleeding. Dry packingwill not be permitted.

NON-SHRINK SECOND STAGE CONCRETE GROUT

Non-shrink second stage concrete grout shall be provided and placed inposition where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.Non-shrink concrete mix proportion shall be one part cement two partscoarse clean sand and four parts of coarse aggregates meeting therequirements of these specifications and 1:22,000 to 1:15000 part ofgrained aluminum powder containing non-polishing agent. Proportioningshall be done by weight.

The above-specified composition may be varied if required by theEngineer.

NON,SHRINK CONCRETE GROUT FOR STAIR RAILING COLUMNPOST

Grout fof Dlacement in pockets for stair columns shall be non shrink andshall be of sirength 10,000 psi.

o

4.8

4 .9

4,10 VAPOUR BARRIER

See Section 07165.

4.11 EXPANSION JOINT I\,4ATERIAL

4\03300-8

O

All materials for use in the expansion joints shall have prior approval ofthe Engineer before placing order for supply.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

5.1 Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that asupply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintainedover the period of the work, the grading of the aggregates shall becontrolled by obtaining the 3/4" maximum nominal size, the different sizesbeing stocked in separate stock piles and recombined in the correctproportion for each batch at the batching plant. The materials shall bestockpiled for a period befofe use so as to drain nearly to constant moisturecontent (as long as site and other conditions permit, p(eferably for at leasta oay).

5.2 The Contractor shall provide and erect (at his cost) a suitable plain, dry,well ventilated, weatherproof and water proof shed of sufficient capacity tostore the cement.

EXECUTION

6.1 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE WORK

6.1 .1 Batch ing

All cement, including cement supplied in bulk, shall bebatched by weight. A bag of cement may be taken asweighing 110 lb, with the prior approval of the Engineef.

Aggregates shall be batched by weight, due allowancebeing made for water content. Aggregates may be batchedby volume through conversion of weigh batching, only withthe priof permission of the Engineer. The apparatus forweight batching may be an integral part of the mixer or aseparate unit of a type approved by the Engineer. lt shall beaccurate wlthln 2% and shall be checked for accuracy atleast once a week.

The quantity of additives i.e. foaming and water proofingagents etc. shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer oras directed by the Engineer.

Where the batching plant is of the type in which cement andaggregates are weighed in the same compartment, thecement shall be introduced into the compartment betweentwo sizes of aggregates.

Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that somewater will entef in advance of the cement and aggregates.Water shall continue to flow for a period, which may extendto the end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixingtime. Controls shall be provided to prevent baingredients from entering the mixef before the prevabatch has been completely discharged.

6.1.2 Mixing

a) The concrete shall be mixed in anconforming to the requirements of

03300-9

approved batch mi

b)

c)

BS 1305. lt sha

o)

c)o

o)

o)

fitted with the manufacturer's plate stating the rates,capacity and the recommended number of revolutions perminute and shall be operated in accordance therewith. ltshall be equipped with a suitable chargjng mechanism andan accurate water-measudng device. The mixer shall becapable of thoroughly combining the aggregates, cementand water into a uniform mass within the specified mixingtime and of discharging the concrete without harmfulsegregatron

Mixing shall continue for the period recommended by themixer manufacturer or until there is apparently a uniformdistribution of the materials and the mass is uniform incolour, whichever period is longer.

lf it is desired to use a mixing period of less than 1-112minutes, the Engineer's approval shall be obtained inwrit ing.

Controls shall be Drovided to ensure that the batch cannotbe discharged unti l the required mixing time has elapsed.At least three quarters of the required mixing time shalltake place after the last of the mixing water has beenadded.

The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations thatwill interfere with mixing action. Mixing blades shall bereplaced when they have lost 10 percent of their originalheight.

Concrete shall be mixed only in quantit ies fof immediateuse. Concrete which has set shall not be re-tempered, butshall be discarded.

6.1.3 Transporting

o

The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixingto the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable bymeans, which will prevent segregation or loss ofingredients. All skip vehicles, or containerc used fortransporting the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned.

During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transportedin deeD containers. on account of their lower ratios ofsuface area to mass, which reduces the rate of loss ofwatef, by evaporation during hot weather and loss of heatduring cold weather.

Before placing of concrete, formwork shall have beencompleted; water shall have been removed; reinforcementshall have been secured in place; expansion joint material,anchors and other embedded items shall have been keptin position; and the entire preparation shall have beenapproved by the Engineer.

No concrete is to be placed into the foundation treuntil the ground to receive the same has been examiand approved by the Engineerfor this purpose.

6.1.4 Placing

67,.l)fr[ri

\i..-90r300- 10

ol

c)

n)

d)

The actual sequence of construction proposed by theContractor shall be subject to the Engineer's approvalbefore construction starts on any part of the structure, andthis sequence shall not be varied without the Engineer'sapproval-

The concrete after it has been mixed shall be placed assoon as it is practicable. Once the concrete has left themixer, no more water shall be added, although theconcrete may be mixed or agitated to help maintainworkability. The concrete shall not be used if, through anycause, the workability of the mix at the time of placing istoo low for it to be compacted fully and to an acceptablefinish by whatever means available.

The time between mixing and placing should be reduced, ifthe mix is richer or the initial workability of the mix is lowerthan normal, or if a rapid hardening cement or anaccelerator is used, or if the work is e carried but at a hightemperature or exposed to a drying atmosphere. TheContractor shall ensure that the delay between mixing andplacing including consolidation does not exceed 45minutes under any circumstances. Any concrete whichdoes not satisfy this requirement shall be rejected.

Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in itsfinal position to avoid segregation due to re-handling offlowing. In no circumstances may concrete be failed ormade to flow along the forms by the use of vibrators.

The free fall of concrete shall not be allowed to exceed 6teet. Where it is necessary for the concrete to be loweredmore than this depth, it is not to be dropped into its finalposition, but shall be placed through pipes fed by ahopper- When a pipe is used for placing concrete the lowerend shall be kept inside or close to the freshly depositedconcrete. The size of the pipe shall be not less than 9 inchin diameter.

Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers ofguch thickness that no concrcte will be deposited onconcrete, which has hardened sufficiently to cause theformation of seams or planes of weakness within thesection. lf a section cannot be placed continuously,construction joints shall be located as shown in theContfact Documents or as approved by the Engineer.Placing shall be carried out at such a rate that the concretewhich is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.Concrete which has partially hardened shall not bedeposited. Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removedwhen the concrete placing has reached an elevationrendedng their services unnecessary. They may remainembedded in the concrete only if made of metal orconcrete and if prior approval has been obtained.

Every Contractor whose work is related to thegervices or must be slrpported by it shall be given

rTAlr#

03300-11

notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnishembedded items before the concrete is placed.

6.1.5 Construction Joints

a) Construction Joints not shown on the drawings shall be somade and located as to least impair the strength of thestructure and shall need prior approval of the Engineer. Ingeneral, they shall be located near the middle of the spansof slabs and beams unless a secondary beam intersects amain beam at this point, in which case the joint in the mainbeam shall be offset a distance equalto twice the width ofthe secondary beam. Joints in walls and columns shall beat the underside of floors, slabs or beams and at the top offootings or floof slabs. Beams, brackets, columns capitals,haunches and drop panels shall be placed ai the sametime as slabs. Joints shall be perpendicular to the mainreinforcement.

All reinforcing steel shall be continued across joints. Keysand inclined dowels shall be provided as directed by theEngineer. Longitudinal keys at leasl 1-112 inches deepshall be provided in all joints in walls and between wallsand slabs or footings.

When the work to be resumed on a surface which hashardened, such sudace shall be roughened in an approvedmanner which wil l expose the aggregate uniformly and wil lnot leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate ordamaged concrete at the surface.

The hardened concrete of construction joints and of jointsbetween footings and walls or columns, between walls orcolumns and beams or flpors they support, joints in un-exposed walls and all others not mentioned herein shall bedampened (but not saturated) immediately prior to placingof fresh concrete,

The hardened concrete of joints in exposed work, joints inthe middle of beams, and slabs; and joints in workdesigned to contain l iquids shall be dampened (but notsaturated) and then thoroughly covered with s coat ofcement grout similar in proportions to the mortar in theconcrete. The grout shall be as thick as possible on verticalsurfaces and at least 1/2 inch thick on horizontal surfaces.The fresh concrete shall be placed before the grout hasattained initial set.

o)

c)

f)

o)

Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitanceshall be removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wlre orbristle, and brushed, care being taken to avoiddislodgment of pafiicles of aggregate. The surface shallthen be coated with neat cement grout. The first layer ofconcrete to be Dlaced on this surface shall not exceed 6inch in thjckness, and shall be well rammed against oldwork, particulaf attention being paid to corners and clspots.a

03300-12

wi

o

g) Stop ends for movement joints or constructjon joints shallbe made by splitting them along the lines of reinforcementpassing through them, so that eash portion can bepositioned and removed separately without disturbance orshock to the reinforcement or the concrete- Stop endsmade of expanded metal or similar material may only beleft permanently in the concrete with prior written approvalof the Engineer. Where such stop ends are used, no metalmay be left permanently in the concrete closer to thesurface of the concrete than the specified cover to thereinforcement.

6.1.6 Expansion Joints

Expansion joinls shall be provided wherever indicated on theDrawings or as directed by the Engineer. In no case shall thereinforcement, corner protection angles, or other embedded itemsbe permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint.

All expansion joints shall be carefully placed so as not to bedisplaced during concreting. The method oi placing the expansionjoints shall be shictly in accordance with the Drawings and/or asdirected by the Engineer.

6.'1.7 Placing and Connection of Water-Stops

The water-stops and expansion joint mateial shall be positionedaccurately and supported against displacement as shown on thedrawngs.

6.1.8 Electric Conduits and Pipes

Electric conduits and other pipes which are planned to beembedded shall not, with their fittings, displace more thanfour percent of the area of the cross section of a column onwhich stress in calculated or which is required for fireprotection. Sleeves, conduits, or other pipes passingthfough floors, walls, or beams shall be of such size or insuch location as not to impaif unduly the strength of theconstruction; such sleeves, conduits, or pipes may beconsidered as replacing structurally in compression thedisplaced concrete, provided that they are not exposed torusting or other deterioraUon, are of uncoated or galvanized.Similar samples of in-situ concrete fof approval by theEngineer submit two samples, 2 Sq. ft. of each type ofexposed in-situ concrete. Ail in-situ samples \,vill remain atthe congtruction site.

a)

p)

surfaces.

Forms

Sample approvals of pre-cast & in-situ concrete:

These samples will be reviewed and approved on the basis ofcolour, dimensional accuracy, and finish of surfaces and generalappearance- The same requirements for sample approval willbe required for both pre-cast and in-situ concrete exposed

a03300-13

a The contractor must maintain the forms unusually tight andbraces to prevent movement, mal-al;gnment anC bleeding thatwill result in sand streaks, honeycomb, fins, stain or unsightlyaooeafance.

lf wood forms are chosen to be used by the Contractof they shallbe constructed of 3/4 inch minimum thickness plywoodconstructed in a fashion to allow many re-uses with all surfacessealed with a polyurethane varnish.

Edges, sufaces and corners of forms shall be sealed to preventloss of any matrix or unequal absofption of water. Corners ofwood forms shall be filled with suitable compound and all contactsurfaces sealed with a polyurethane vamish.

Re-use of forms shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

Curing:

Curing shall be done in shade (out of difect sunlight) and shall befora minimum period of4 days.

Finishing procedures:

"Finishing procedures for f i l l ing air void in smooth finishedconcrete developed by a formed surface":

While the concrete surface is still damp (not more than three daysafter removal of forms), apply a thin coat of medium consistencyneat cement slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide abonding coat within any pits or blemishes in the parent concrete;avoid coating large areas of the finished surface. Before slurryhas dried or changed colour, apply a dry (almost crumbly) groutcomprised ot one part cement, of the type and brand of cementused in the original concrete, to one and one-half parts cleanmasonry sand wjth a fineness modulus of approximately 2.25 andcomplying with the gradation requirements of the ASTMSpecifications C 144. Mix proper amounts of white cement andcolouring with the parent mortar to produce a satisfactory colourmatch with the parent concrete after hardening. Use samplespreviously PrePared.

Apply the finishing grout uniformly with damp (neither drippingwet nor dry) pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 inch squareused as aJloat. Scrub the grout well into the pits to provide adense mortar in all the imperfections to be filled. Allow the mortarto partially harden, from one iron or steel not thinner Thanstandard steel pipe, have a nominal inside diameter not over 2inch and are spaced not less than thfee diameters on centers.Except when plans of conduits and pipes are approved by theEngineer, embedded pipes and conduits other than those merelypassing through, shall not be larger in outside diameter than onethird the thickness of the slab, wall, or beams in which they areembedded nor so located as to impair unduly the strength of theconstruction. Sleeve pipes, or conduits of any material notharmful to concrete and wlthin the limitations of this section maybe embedded in concrete with the approval of theprovided they are not considered to replace theconcrete.

oti f i , .

K\;L03300-14

o b) All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required toradjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior toconcreting. Voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots shall befilled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent theentry of concrete into the voids.

6.'1.9 'Mass-concrete' shall be placed in layers approximately 18 inch thick.Vibrator heads shall extend into the previously placed layer,

6.1 . '10 Consolidation

a) All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, Roding orforking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around thereinforcement, around embedded items and into comers of forms,eliminating all air or stone pockets which may causehoneycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Iniernal vibratorsshall have a minimum lrequency of 8000 vibrations per minuteand sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively.They shall be operated by competent workmen. Use of vibratorsto transport within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall beinserted and withdrawn at points approximately '18 inch apart. Ateach insertion. the duration shall be sufiicient to consolidate theconcrete but not excessive so as to cause sdgregation, generallyfrom 5 to 15 sec. A spafe Vibrator shall be kept on the job siteduring all concrete plaaing operations.

Where the concrete is to have an as-cast finish, a full surface ofmortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration process,supplemented, if necessary, by spading to work the coarseaggregate back from the formed surface.

b) lf there is any tendency for the mix to segregate duringconsolidation, particularly if this produces excessive laitance, themix proportions shall be modified to effect an improvement in thequality of the concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer and inconformity with the provjsions of CIause 5.

c) Vibrator shall not be allowed to contact the formwork for exposedconcrete surfaces.

d) Mechanical vibfators shall be of a type suited in the opinion of theEngineer to the particular conditions.

e) Over-vibration or vibration of very wet mixes is harmful and shouldbe avoided.

1. 1 1 Curing and Protection

a) Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected frompremature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanicat,injury and shall be maintained with minimum moisture loss at a relativeconstant temperature for the period necessary fof hydration of the cementand hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of curing snailbe subject to approval of the Engineer.

o

ir,rhort\----\*

01100-15

f o)

c)

e)

For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the followingprocedures shall be applied immediately after completion of placementand finishing:

- Ponding or continuous sprinkling.

- Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet.

- Application of waterproof sheet materials approved by theEngineer.

- Application of other moisture-retaining covering as approved.

- Application of a curing compound conforming to AST[/ C 309.

The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendatiorrsof the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen, which maydevelop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface. lt shallnot be used on any surface against which additional concrete or othermaterial is to be bonded unless it is proved that the curing compound willnot prevent bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove itcompletely from areas to receive bonded applications.

Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal formsexposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the formswet until they can be safely femoved. Afier form removal the concreteshall be cured until the end ofthe time prescribed for curing.

Curing in accordance with sub-clause 'a' & 'b' above shall be continuedfor at least 10 days in the case of all concrete except concrete with rapid-hardening Portland Cement for which the period shall be at least 3 days.Alternatively, if tests are made of cylinderc kept adjacent to the structureand cured by the same methods, moisture retention measures may beterminated when the average compressive strength has reached 70percent of the minimum specified wofks cylinder strength.If one of the first four cudng procedures of sub-clause 'b' is used initially, itmay be replaced by one of the other procedures of that sub-clause anytime after the concrete is one day old provided the concrete is notpermitted to become surface dry during the transition.

When the mean daily outdoor temperatufe is less than 5 degree C (41deg. F) tempersture of the concrete thall be maintained between 10 and20 degrees c (50 to 68 deg. F) for the required curjng period of sub-clause'd'.

When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering insulation orhousing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement andshall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury dueto concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used during thefirst 24 hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of theconcrete to exhausl gasses, which contain carbon dioxide.

During hot weather when necessary, provision for wind-brakes,shadingcoroureofor spraying, sprinkling, ponding or wet covering with a light

material shall be made, in advance of placement. Suchmeasures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hafdening and finishloperation wil l allow.

o

d)

,6f\o' - ! / . ' \

iNi'\a-Fa903300-i6

s)

n)

a Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concreteduring and immediately following the curing period shall be kept asuniform as possible and shall not exceed 3 deg. C (37 deg. F) in anyone hour or 10 degree C (50 deg. F) in any 24 hour period.

During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damagingmechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock andexcessive vibrations. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protectedfrom damage by construction equipment, materials or methods byapplication of curing procedures, and by rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to over stressthe concrete.

6.1 . '12 ADplication of Non-Shrink Grout

a) Concrete surfaces to receive non-shrinking grout shall beroughened, cleaned and dampened.

b) Fom shall be provided to retain the grout until sufficiently hard tosuooort itself.

c) Grout shrll he poured in place and thoroughly rodded or washed toprevent the formation of voids.

d) After non-shrink gfout has received its initial set, it shall be keptdamp fof 24 hours.

6.1.13 Placing of Vapour Barrier

' Vapour barrier shall be laid in position wherever shown on the Drawings.

The material shall be supplied in rolls and laid by rolling over the preparedsurface at the levels and position in the areas shown on the Drawings.Where joint is necessary at the side or end of a sheet, this shall be adouble weld folded joint made by placing the edges together and foldingover twice continuously taking the top edge prior to concreting. TheContractor shall protect the film sheets from damages durlng laying andsubsequent operations and shall replace at his own cost all damaged filmsheets to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

6,2 WORKS IN EXTREME WEATHER

6.2.'l Unless adequate protection is provided and approval is obtained from theEngineer, concrete shall not be placed during rain.

Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor todamage the surface finish.

6.2.2 When the tempefature of the surrounding air is expected to be below 5deg. C during placing or within 24 hours thereaftef, the temperature of theplastic concreie, as placed, shall be no lower than '13 deg. C for sectionsless than 12 inch in any dimension nor 10 deg. C for any other sections.

When necessary concrete material should be heated before mixing andcarefully protected after placing, in general, heating or mixing water aloneto about 60 deg. C may be sufficient for this purpose. Dependencenot be placed on salt or other chemicals for the prevention of freezi

lldzl)ir,[-1$

f.fr{l;,n \

wl,):;r:j.;

) :a/0_1300-17

frozen material or materials, containing shall be used. All concretedamaged by frost shall be removed. lt is recommended that concrete

6 .2 .3

exposed to the action of freezing weather should lave entrained air andthe water content', of the mix should not exceed 5.5 gallon/bag ofcement.

lf water or aggregate is heated above 38 deg, C the water shall becombined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added.Cement shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of water &aggregate having a temperature greater than 38 deg. C.

During hot weather, the temperature of the concrete as placed shall notbe so high as to cause difficulty ffom loss of slurnp, flash set, or coldjoints and should not exceed 32 deg. C. For massive concrete, thistemperature should not exceed 21 degree C. When the temperature ofthe concrete exceeds 32 degfee C, precautionary measures approved bythe Engineer shall be put into effect. When the temperature ofthe steel isgreater than 50 deg. C, steel forms and reinforcement shall be sprayedwith water just prior to placing the concrete. The ingredients shall becooled before mixing, or flaked ice or well crushed ice of a size that willmelt completely during mixing may be substituted for all part of themixing water if, due to high temperature, low slump, flash set or coldjoints are encountered.

Other precautions recommended by ACI Standard 305-72 shall also beadopted.

PRE-CAST CONCRETE

Pre-cast concrete units shall be faif faced orland textured as per approveddesign/pattern, cast to the sizes and dimensions as indicaied on the Drawings.The concrete used for pre-cast units shall conform to the specifications laid downfor cast in situ reinforced cement concrete unless otherwise required and directedby the Engineer.

Pre-casting platform of the size and at the location approved by the Engineer shallbe constructed. The concrete in one pre-cast unit shall be placed in oneoperation, in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.

The material and design of formwork and the method of pre-casting the units shallbe approved by the Engineer. The erection/installation and removal of the pre-cast units from the pre-casting platform shall not be permitted until and unlessthey are properly cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer.All pre-cast units shall be smoothly finished to the required lines, grades, angles,etc. Holes, grooves, pockets and hooks shall be provided as shown and/or asdirected by the Engineer. The units shall be properly stacked on a platformwithout causing any cracks and damages. Curing of allthe pre-cast units shall bedone in accordance with the relevant BS code/approval of the Engineer.

6.3.'1 Erecting Pre-cast units

All the pre-cast units shall be transported and erected into positionmannef as approved by the Engineer.

Lifting Beams

The Contractor shall us lifting beams at his own cost for erectjngmembers where the Engineer so directs. Lifting beams shall beand erected by the Cc tractor, at his own cost, at all points where

ce

6.3

#\*# 03300-18

6.4

necessary for maintaining the plant but is inaccessible to mobile cranes or,alternatively, covered by overhead traveling cranes. The Contractor,however, is to supply the trolleys and erect them on the lifting beams, andto lest operation of installed equipment.

CEIiIENT CONCRETE PAVEMENTS

Full co-operation shall be given to trades l ike electdcal, mechanical and otherservices. For all concrete work relevant specifications of this section shall apply

6.4.' l Side Forms and Construction

Side forms shall be of steel or any other suitable material and of a designas approved bY the Engineer.

ln general, only materials and methods that have proved theiracceptability by past performance will be considered. All form shall beconstructed so that they can be removed without hammering or pryingagainst the concrete.

Horizontal joints in the forms will not be permitted. Forms shall bethoroughly cleaned and oiled with linseed/mineral oil shall be given twocoats of niter-cellulose lacquer each time they are used.

The forms shall be set on a thoroughly compacted base true to line andIevel and firmly secured in position by appropriate methods. Conformitywith the alignment and levels shown on the Drawings shall be checked asand when required by the Engineer. Where necessary corrections shallbe made immediately before placing the concrete; where any form hasbeen disturbed it shall be reset and rechecked.

Pavements shall be constructed in panels of sizes as shown on theDrawings. The panels shall be laid alternately, the adjoining panels beingconcreted when the side forms are struck and the jointing materialsplaced, inspected and approved by the Engineef. Each panel is to beconcreted in one operation and no interruptions shall be permitted duringthe operation. The concrete shall be tipped from the trolley slightly inadvance bf the working place and then shoveled into position. Thespreading shall be carried out very carefully. Compaction shall be doneby means of vibro-compactors of approved surface vibrators. lf a vibro-compactor is used, if shall be operated on the concrete and will not beallowed to strike or displace the forms. The spreading and compacting ofthe successive layers shall proceed without interruptions and as quicklyas practicable so as to ensufe that the slab is monolithic throughout itsdepth.

The wearing surface shall be laid while the base concrete is still wet andscreeded to line and level. When the initial set takes place the surfaceshall be troweled smooth with a steel trowel to provide a dense closedsurface.

All the joints shall be carefully formed as shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer. The joint filler together with performed grooveshall provide complete separation of adjacent slabs. The joints shall all besealed with bitumen as shown on the Drawings and as directed by theEngineer.

03300-19

6.4.2 Protection and Curing

- GeneralReouirements:

Concrete shall be protected adequately from injurious action bysun, rain, flowing water and mechanical injury, and shall not beallowed to dry form the time it is placed until the expiry of theminimum curing periods specified hereinafter. Water curing shallbe accomplished by keeping the surface of the concretecontinuously wet by covering with water or wjth approved watersaturated covering. Where wood forms are left in place for curing,they shall be kept sufficiently damp at all times to preventopenings at the ioints and dtying out of the concrete. All portionsof the structure shall be kept moist for the .full curing periods,specified hereinafter.

When liquid membrane curing compound is used the surface ofthe concrete shall be protected form traffic or other abrasiveaction, which may break the membrane, for the full period ofcuring. The membrane cudng compound snail be colourless oliight coloured and shall be approved by the Engineer and shallcomply with ASTM Designation C 309.

- Curing Periods

The curing period shall be at least '10 days, or as directed by theEngineef.

Removal of Fcrms

The Contractor shall exercise great care in avoiding damage tojoints, arjses, dowel bars etc., while removing the forms. Underno circumstances will the use of pry bars between the forms andoavement be oermitted. Side forms shall not be removed until atleast 40 hours have elapsed from the time of completing theconcreting of the slab, which they contain. In no case shall formsbe removed until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permitremoval without damage to the concrete. Concrete work shall beprotected from injury resulting from the storage or movement ofmaterial during construction.

6.4.3 Finishing

All unformed surfaces shall be finished with a wood float except asotheMise specified. Visible vertical surfaces shall have all projectionsand irregularities removed. The entire surface shall be rubbed if requiredby the Engineer, with a No. 16 carborundum brick, or other abrasive untileven, smooth and of uniform appearance, and shall be shed clean.Plastering of surface, application of cement or other coating will not bepermitted.

All exposed corners shall be chamfered,unless otherwise mentioned or shown onEngineer. Concrete surfaces which will beshall be screeded without floating.

1"x 1" (2.5 cms x 2.5 cms)the plans or directed by thecovered with other materials

rTM03300-20

6.4.4 . Spreading, finishing and floating of concrete in pavements

General Requirements

The striking off, compacting and floating of concrete shall bedone by mechanical methods, if approved by the Engineer.Where the Engineer determines that it is impracticable to usemechanical methods manual. methods of spreading, f inishing andfloating may be used on pavement lines as indicated on theDrawings.

Mechanical Methods

The concrete shall be spread uniformly between the forms,immediately after it is placed, by means of an approved spreadingmachine. The spreader shall be followed by an apprcved finishingmaohine equipped with two oscillating or reciprocating screeds.The spreading machine orthe finishing machine shall be equippedwith vibrating equipment that wili vibrate the concrete for the fullpaving width. Internal vibrators shall be used adjacent to thelongitudinal edge of the pavement. These vibrators shall beattached to the rear of the spreading machine or to the finishingmachine. Vibrators shall not rest on view pavements or side formsor contract with any dowel barc and the arrangement of powersupply to the vibrators shall be such that when the motion ofmachine is stopped, vibration shall cease. The rate of vibrationshall be not less than 8000 vibrations per minute. The concreteshall be spread to full width before being struck off and compactedso that the surface will conform to the finished grade and cross-section as shown on the plang and at the same time leavesufficient material for the floating operation. The spreading &finishing machine shall move over the pavement as many timesand at such intervals as may be required by the Engineer toensure thorough compaction.

Except as otherwise specified, after the pavement has beenstruck off and compacted, if shall be finished with an approvedlongitudinal float. The Contractor may use a longitudinal floatcomposed of one or more cutting and smoothing floatssuspended from and guided by rigid frame. The frame shall becarried by four or more visible wheels riding on and constantly incontact with the forms.

The contractor may use a longitudinal float which works with asawing motion, while held in a floating position parallelto the roadcentre line and passing gradually from one side of the pavementto the other. lvlovements ahead, along the centre line of the road,shall be in successive advances of not more than half the lengthof the float.

Instead of using other type of longitudinal float a single machine,which will affect satisfactory compaction, finishing and floatingmay be used. This machine may be towed by a spreadjngmachine. This combination, f inishing floating machine shall beequipped with screeds and vibratorc as hefeinafter specified forspreading and finishing machine. Floating shall be accomplishedby means of a non-oscil lating float held in a suspended positiolorm the frame.

03300-21

lf any spreading, finishing and floating equipment is notmaintained in full working order or if the equipment as used bythe Contractor proves inadequate to obtain the results prescribed,such equipment shall be improved or satisfactory equipmentsubstituted or added at the direction ofthe Enqineer

Manual Methods

When striking-off and compacting by manual methods isDermitted. the concrete shall be leveled and then struck-off tosuch an elevation that, when properly compacted, the surface willconform to the required grade and cross-section. The strike boardshall be moved forward with a combined longitudinal andtransverse motion, the manipulation being such that neither endsis raised from the side forms during the process. While striking off,a slight excess of concrete shall be kept in front of the cuttingedge at all times. Priorro tamping, the concrete along the formsshall be thoroughly spaded or vibrated. The entire area ofpavement shall be tamped or vibrated a manner that will ensuremaximum compaction. The concrete shall be brought to therequired grade and shape by the use of a tamper consisting of aheavy plank whose length exceeds the width of the pavement by 1foot or by the use of a mechanical vibrating unit spanning the fullwidth of the spread. The tamper shall be constructed with properlytrussed roads to stiffen it and prevent sag and shall be shod with aheavy strip or metal for a tamping surface. The tamper shall bemoved with a combined tamping and longitudinal motion, raising itform side form and dropping it so that the concrete will bethoroughly compacted and rammed into place. A small surplusmaterial I is com acted and rammed into front of the tamper orvibrating unit and taming or vibrating shall continue until the truecross-section is obtained reed and the mortar flushes slightly tothe surface.

On gfades in e. excess of 5 percent where hand methods arepermitted, a little strike board shall follow at a speed of 25 ft to 50ft per hour back ofthe heavy strike board, and shall be used in thesame way, so as to remove waves caused by flow of concfete.

Where hand tamping is permitted, not less than two striKe boardsor tamoers shall be used for oroduction in excess of 350 Cu.ft.After the concrete has been compacted, it shall be smoothedwith a wooden float where necessary, as directed by theEngineer.

Longitudinal Floating

Manual floats shall be at least 12 ft. In length not less than 6inches in width and shall be properly stiffened to prevent bendingor warping. In using the float, it shall be held parallel to centre lineof the pavement at all time and shall be moved laterally acrossthe pavement from one side or edge to the other until all highareas are cut down and floated into depressions, leaving asurface that is smooth and true to orade. Batch transversepassage of the longitudinal manual f loat shall lap the ppassage by half.

) :

,/21!rlnx4r\(!Y'-'<.Pt 1; \ )

€)-..---2.:03300-22

f)a

First Straight Edge Testing

lmmediately followjng final floating the entire area of thepavement shall be tested with a 10-ft. (approx. 3. meters) straightedge. Any depressions found shall be immediately filled withfresh concrete which shall be struck off compacted and finished.High areas shall be worked down and refinished. The straightedge testing and re-floating shall continue until the pavement hasthe required surface contour.

Burlap (Coarse Canvas) Dragging

After the first straight edge testing and when most of the watersheet has disappeared from the surface and just before theconcrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be dragged with astrip of burlap (coarse canvas) 3 ft. to 10 ft. wide and having alength 4 ft. more than the width of the slab.

.l he burl of shall be

dragged along the surface of the pavement in a longitudinaldirection. Burlap shall be clean and kept free from coatings ofhafdened concrete. lt shall be moist at the time of use.

Second Straight Edge Testing

After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking onit, the surface of the pavement shall again be tested with a 10-ft.straight edge. Any portion of the pavement which shows avariation from the testing edge of more than 1/8 inch shall becorrected by cutting, or shall be removed and replaced at theexpense of the Contractor.

6.4.5 Expansion and Contraction Joints

i. All the expansion and contraction joints shall be carefully formedas shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Asregards dowel bars and joint assemblies, such stakes, brackets orother devices shall be used, as necessary to keep the entire jointassembly in true vertical and horizontal position. The joint fillertogeiher with lhe prefotmed grcove shall provide complete.separation of adjacent slabs. The joints shall be sealed with thespecified non-extruding sealing compound set in a 3/4 inch widepreformed chase as shown on the Drawings. The lie preformedchase shall be thoroughly oleaned of all dust, debris, stone orother had material prior to its sealing. The riser of all joints shallbe founded to a radius as shown on the Drawings before theconcfete hardens,

The joints sealing compound shall be hot poured bitumen orapproved sealing compound for concrete pavements complyingwith Bs-2499 for hot tropical climates and heavy duty industrialsite subject to severe exposure. All joints are to be filled withflexell expansion joint filler, or an approved elastic, compressible,durable and roFproof equivalent of sufficient rigidity to enable it tobe satisfactorily installed in the joint and resist deformation duringthe passage of the concreting equipment. The filler is to be of thesame thickness as the joint width. Holes to accommodate thedowel bars shall accurately be drilled or punched out. Whefeshown on the Drawings, dowel bars of requifed diameter shall beplaced at the specified spacing. The bars shall be lubricated wian approved lubricant. One end of the dowel bar at expanslc

03300-23

l t l

joints shall be provided with a closely fitting sleeve 3 inch long,consistang of bitumen coated plastic or other approved material topermit expansion. A loose plug 1 inch deep of approvedoompressible filling material shall be inserted into the sleeve asshown on the Drawings at the end of the bar. All the dowel barsshall be mild steel bars of the size shown on the Drawings andshall conform to the requirements as specified in the section'Concrete.

Contraction joints shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

The assembly and method of constructing the expansionjoints/contraction jqints shall be subject to the approval of theEngineer.

',

In general all PVC water stops/hydrofoil shall be placed in thecenter of the structural rnember. Each piece of the water stop-hydrotoil shall be of maximum pfacticable length. An ordinarysharp knife saw or any othef sharp tool can be used to cut thewater stop. Joints at inter sections and at ends of pieces shall bemade in the manner most appropriate to the material being usedJoints shall develop effective water tightness fully equal to that ofthe continuous watef stop material and shall permanently retaintheir flexibility. For straight line connection melting method oiconnection can be used by passing two water stops intended forconnection against a heated iron or copper sheet When they aremelted , the two are cqmbined .

Afterjoining, the water stop should be allowed to cool.

For all other connections such as T{ype or L{ype, the weldingmethod of joining should be used. Welding rod of same materialas the water stop shall be used. The welding rod & the water stopshall be heated & melt ai the same time, by means of heated airjetting from the hotjet gun.

TEST OF CONCRETE QUALITY

o 7.1 The Contractor shall provide samples of concrete for testing at theEngineer's direction. Proper facilfties shall be provided for making andcuring the test specimens. A competent person shall be employed by theContractor whose first duty shall be to supervise all stages in thepreparation and piacing of the concrete. All test specimens shall be madeat site and tests canied out under his direct supervision.

Cylinder test shall be performed in accordance with the discretion of theEngineer. The standard of acceptance for preliminary and works testsshall be as given below.

The usual test for concrete with maximum size of aggregate upto 1-1/2inch is the 6 inch cylinder tesled in compression. Details of the testing aregiven in ASTM C 39.

For all grades of concrete; pfeliminary cylinder strength test with themixes and materials to be used shall be performed in accofdance withASTM C31 before the work is begun and subsequently wheneverchange is to be made in the materials or in the proportions of materibe used, or as required by the Engineer. The strengths shall complthe standard of quality specified in accordance with Table

03300-24

ffi*i,6J ,'.'rGlr

'\:llil

O accordance wlth ASTM C 39. The cost oJ such testing shall be borne bythe Contfactor.

Test sample shall be taken at the mixer or as directed by the Engineer.The test sDecimens shall be cured in accordance with ASTM c 3'1.

Records shall be kept of all test cylinders identifying the mix used thesection of work for which the concrete was used and the date poured.

Five test cylinders are to be tested for compressive strength as specifiedin ASTM C 39. These tests shall be carried out at site or in a laboratoryapproved by the Engineer. Two cylinders shall be tested at the age ofseven days and three at 28 days and the strengths determined are tocomply with the standard of quality specified. The laboratory tests shall becarried out by an independent organization, such as Government TestjngLaboratory or such other undertakings approved by the Engineer. Theoriginal tesl reports received from the above authorities should besubmitted to the Engineer.

For all grades of concrete, the appropriate strength requifement shall beconsidered to be satisfied if none of the strengths of the cylinders is belowthe specified cylinder strength or if the average strength of the threecylinders is not less than the specified cylinder strength and the differencebetween the greatest and the least strength is not more than 20olo of theaverage.

When the results of works cylinder tests show that the strength of anyconcrete is below the minimum specified, the Engineer may giveinstructions for the \/hole or Dart of the work concerned to be removedand reolaced at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall bearthe cost of any other part of his, or any other contractofs work, which hasto be removed and replaced as a result of the defective concrete. lf anyconcrete is held to have failed, the Engineer may order the propoftions ofthai class of concrete to be changed in order to pfovide thestrength.

8 . FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES

8.'1 GENERAL

8.1 .'1 After removal of forms, the surfaces of concrete shallof more of the finishes specified below in locations designated bythe Contract Documents.

8.1.2 When finishing is required to match a small sample furnished tothe Contractor, the sample finish shall be reproduced on an areaat least 100 Sq. ft. in an inconspicuous location designated by theEngineer before proceeding with the finish in the specifiedlocation.

8.'1.3 Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignmentprofile grades and dimensions are specified in clause 10.Tolerances for concrete construotion and defined as tolerancesthat are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish asdescribed herein. The finish requirements for concrete surfacesshall be as generally specified in this clause and as indicated onthe Drawings. Finishing of concrete surfaces shall be peonlv bv workmen who are skilled in concrete finishes.

7 .6

o 7.7

7 .8

f,

o03300-25

c The Contractor shall keep the Engineer advised as to whenfinishing of concrete will be performed. Unless inspection iswaived in each specific case, finishing of concrete shall bperformed only in the presence of the Engineer. Concretesurfaces will be toted by 'the Engineer where necessary todetermine whether surface irregularities are wjthin the limitsherein after specified. Surface irregularities are classified asabrupt or gradual.

Offsets caused by displaced or misplaced form sheeting orsections, or otheMise defective form limbef will be considered asabrupt irregularities, and will be tested by direct measurements.All other irregularities will be considered as gradual irregularities,and will be tested by use of a template, consisting of a straightedge or the equivalent thefeof for curved surfaces. The length ofthe template will be 6.5 ft. for testing of formed surfaces and 10ft. for testing of unformed surfaces.

8,2 AS-CAST FINISHES

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings the classes offinish shall apply as follows:

8.2.1 Rough form finish:

No selected form facing materials shall be specified for roughform finish surfaces. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. Finsexceeding 1/4" in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off.Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the textlrre imparted by theiorms

8.2.2 Fair face finish:

Fair face finish applies to concrete formed surfaces, theappearance of which is considered by the Engineer to be ofspecial importance, such as surfaces of structures prominentlyexposed to public inspection. Surfaces of concrete structuresrequiring fair face finish is shown in the Drawings. Surfaceirregularit ies, measured as described in sub-clause 8.2.1, 'Rough

form finish', shall not exceed 1/4 inch for gradual irregularities and1/8 inch for abrupt irregularities, except that abrupt irregularitieswill noi be permitted at construction joints. Abrupt irregularities atconstructlon joints and elsewhere in excess of 1/8 inch andgradual irregularities in excess of 1/4 inch shall be reduced bygrinding so as to conform to the specified limits. Abruptirregularlties at construction joints shall be ground on level of 1 to20 ratio of height to length.

Unless othe|wise approved, repair of imperfections in formedconcrete shall be completed within 24 hours after removal offorms. The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard,uniform texture on the concrete. lt may be plnvood, temperatedconcrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, plastic paper, or otherapproved material capable of producing the desired fair facefinish. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly andsymmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practicalminimum. lt shall be supported by studs or other backing capaof preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grainsurfaces, worn edge, patches, dents, or other defects whi

a

6r*\' i { )

M 03100-26

8.2.3

impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tieholes and defects shall be patched. All ins shall be completelyremoved.

Architectural Finish Concrete:

Architectural finish to concrete formed surfaces as shown on theDrawings is required by the Engineer where the architecturalappeafance of surfaces of structures exposed to public view is ofspecial consideration and importance. The Contractor shall useapproved special material for formwork and design the forms inconfomity with the specified architectural patterns, textures andfinishes in order to obtain first class architectural finish on formedconcrete surface without any defect, irregularities, blemishes,imperfections and encrustation's.

Samples

'1. Sub to the Engineer a minimum of two units or portions ofunits of each pre-cast item required. Each pair of sampleswhen accepted will describe the allowable- limits betweenwhich variations can be acceptable.

2. Similar samples of in-situ concrete for approval by theEngineer submit two samples, 2 Sq. ft, of each type ofexposed in-situ concrete. All in-situ samples will remainat the construction site.

Sample approvals of pre-cast & in-situ concrete:

These samples will be reviewed and approved on the basis ofcolour, dimensional accuracy, and finish of surfaces and generalappearance. The same requirements for sample appDval willbe required for both pre-cast and in-situ concrete exposedsufaces.

Forms

The contractor must mainiajn the forms unusually tight andbraces to prevent movement, mal-alignment and bleeding thatwill result ln sand streaks, honeycomb, fins, stain or unsighUyappearance.

lf wood forms are chosen to be used by the Contractor theyshall be constructed of 3/4 inch minimum thickness plywoodconstructed in a fashion to allow many re-uses with all surfacessealed with a polyufethane varnish.

Edges, surfaces and comers of forms shall be sealed to preventloss of any matrix or unequal absorption of water. Corners ofwood foms shall be filled wilh suitable compound and all contactsurfaces sealed with a polyufethane varnish.

Re-use of forms shall be subject to appfoval by the Engineer.

n9:

Curing shall be done in shade (out of direct sunlight) andfor a minimum pedod of 4 days.

o

03300-27

Finishing procedures:

"Finishing procedures for f i l l ing air void in smooth finishedconcrete developed by a formed surface":

While the concrete surface is still damp (not more than three daysafter removal of forms), apply a thin coat of medium consistencyneat cement slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide abonding coat within any pits or blemishes in the parent concreteiavoid coating large areas of the finished surface. Before slurfyhas dried or changed colour, apply a dry (almost crumbly) groutcomprised of one part cement, of the type and brand of cementused in the original concrete, to one and one-half parts cleanmasonry sand with a fineness modulus of approximately 2.25 andcomplying with the gradation requirements of the ASTMSpecifications C 144. Mix proper amounts of white oemeni andcolouring with the parent mortar to produce a saiisfactgry colourmatch with the parent concrete after hardening. Use samplespreviously prepared.

Apply the finishing grout uniformly with damp (neither dripping wetnor Pry) pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 inch square usedas afloat. Scrub the grout well into the pits to provide a densemortar in all the imperfections to be filled. Allow the mortar topartially harden, from QX to two hours, depending upon theweather. Avoid direct hot sunlight. if the air is hot and dry, keepthe concrete surface damp during this period using a fjne fogspray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can bescraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel withoutdamaging the grout from the small pits of holes, cut off aii that canbe removed with a trowel without delay; next allow the surface todry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean, dry burlap tocompletely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout shallremain after this rubbing. Complete the entire cleaning andgrculing operation for the grout to dry alter it has been cut with thetrowel, so it can be wiped off clean with the burlap.

On the day after the repair work, the concrete surfaces shouldagain be wiped off clean with dry budap to remove anyinadvertent dust; leave no builfup surfaces on the parentsurfaces. Employ, if possible, a used piece of burlap containingold hardened mortar to act as a mild abfasive. Use of fineabrasive stone if needed to remove any remaining builFup filmwithout breaking through the surface film of the original concfete.Such scrubbing should be light and sufiicieni only to removeexcess material without working up a lather of mortar orchanging the texture of concrete.

Following the final bagging of stoning operation, provide athorough wash down with stiff bristle brushes to remove allextfaneous materials and spray the concfete surface with a finefog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition forat least three days after application ofthe pit repair grout.

Rust Stains:

All rust stains are to be removed employing theprocedurel

/^*'f-\td / \

I- 6 \ |

\9\_--1ra03100-28

8.3

The rust stain shall be soaked fo|10 minutes with a solution of0.055 lb. of sodium citrate in 0.33 lb. water (brushing the solutionat short intervals is satisfactory), Then the surface is sprinkledwith crystals of sodium hydrosulfite and covered with a paste ofFullefs Earth and water. On a vertical surface, the paste isapplied with a trowel, with the crystals first sprinkled on the pasteso they will be in direct contact with the stain. The paste isallowed to dry fof 10 minutes then scraped off and the treatmentrepeated if necessarY.

. Repairing of Formed Surfaces:

It is the intention of Specification to require fofm mixture ofconcrete and workmanship so that concrete surfaces, whenexposed, wil l require no patching. Any concrete which is notformed as required and conforming to approved samples or forany reason is out of alignment or level or shows a defectivesurface, shall be removed from the job by the Contractor at hisexpense unless the Engineer grants permission to repair thedefective area. Permission to patch any such area shall not beconsidered a waiver of the Engineefs right to require a completeremoval of defective work if the repair does not, in his opinion,satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface.The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability ofaopearance.

FINISHES OF UNFORMED SURFACES

8.3.'1 Monolithic Concrete Floor Finish

Where monoliihic concrete floor finish is shown on the Drawings,placing shall proceed continu6usly for-the full thickness of the courseor RCC slab without change in concrete mix. lvlixing water shall bethe minimum required for proper area shall be kept damp for 7 days.Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wail,which will be exposed.

9.2.5 Where as-cast finishes are speoified, the quantity of patched areashall be strictly limited. The combined total of patched areas in as-cast surfaces shall not exceed 2 sq ft. in each 1000 sq.ft. of as-castsurtace. This is in addition to form tie patches, if the project designpermits ties to fallwithin as-cast areas.

9.2.6 Any patches rn as-cast architectural concfete shall beindistinguishable from surrounding surfaces. The mix formula forpatching modar shall be detemined by trial to obtain a good colourmatch with the concrete when both patch and concrete afe curedand dry. After initial set, surfaces of patches shall be dressedmanually to obtain the same texture as surrounding surfaces.

9.2.7 Patches in architectural concrete surfaces shall be cured for 7 days.Patches shall be protected from premature drying to the same extentas the body of the concrete.

TIE AND BOLT HOLES

being cleanedand thoroughly dampened, the tie and bolt holes shapatching mortar. lf architectural appearance reqfilled solid with

03300-29

o

these holes may be filled partially creating ihe desired round clear holespattern on surfaces exposed to view.

9.4 PROPRIETARYMATERIALS

lf permitted or required by the Engineer, proprietary compounds foradhesion or as patching ingredients may be used in l ieu of or in addition tothe foregoing patching procedures. Such compounds shall be used inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with prior approvalof the Engineer.

IO. CONCRETECONSTRUCTIONTOLERANCES

Where tolerances are not stated in the specifications or drawings for anyindividual structure or featufe thereof. maximum permissible deviations fromestablished lines, grades and dimensions shall conform to the following. TheContractor is expected to set and maintain concrete forms so as to ensurecomplete wo|k within tolerance limits. These allowable tolerances shall not relievethe Contractor of this responsibility for correct fitting of indicated materials. Thesetolerances are not cumulative.

'10.'1 Variation ffom the plumb (or the specified batter for inclined walls.)

'10.1 .1 ln the l ines and surfaces of columns. piers, walls and in arrises:

In any '10 feet of length or height

ln any storey or 20 feet length

114 inch

3/8 inch

1/4 inch

112 inah

Maximum for the entire length ofheight. 'l inch

10.1.2 For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves and otherconspicuous l ines.In any bay or 20 feet maximum

l\ilaximum for the entire lengthor height

10.2 Variation from the level orfrom the gfades indicated on the dr3wings.

'10.2.1 In floors, ceilings, beams soffits and in arrises measured beforeremoval of supporting shores.

In any 10 feet of length 114 inch

In any bay or in any 20 feet length 318 inch

lvlaximum for the entire length 3/4 inch

10.2.2 Fo{ exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal groovesconspicuous lines.

n)L#

03300-30

and

In any bay or 20 feet length

lvlaximum for the entire length

10.3 Variation of the linear bujlding lines from establishedrelated positjon of columns, walls and partitions.

In any bay or 20 feet of length

lvlaximum for the entire length

10.4 Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, flooropenings and wall openings.

114 inch

112 inch

position in planancl

112 inch

l inch

t1l4 inch

o

'10.5 Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thethickness of slabs and walls.

t\,,tinus

Plus

10.6 Footings

10.6.1 Variation in dimensions in plan

Minus

Plus (plus variation applied to concreteonly, not to reinforcing bars or dowels).

10.6.2 l\,4isplacement oreccentricity

2 percent of the footing width in thedirection of misplacement but not more than(applies to concrete only,not to reinforcing bars or dowels).

10.6.3 Thickness

Decrease in specified thickness

Incfease in specified thickness

10.7 Variation in Steps

10.7.1 ln a fl ight of stairs

114 inch

1 /2 inch

I 12 inch

2 inch

2 inch

a5%

No limii

Rise

Tread

10.7.2 In consecutive stews

Rise

Tread

+ 1/8 inch

+ 1/4 inch

+ 1/16 inch

+ 1/8 inch

ffi)A\*J

03100-_ll

10.8 Tolerances for Pre-cast concrete construction

Forms must be true to size and dimensions of concrete members shownon the Dlans and be so constructed that the dimensions of the finishedproducts will be within the following limits at the time of placement of theseunits in the structure, unless otherwise noted on structural-architecturaldrawtnos:

10.8.1 Overalt dimensions of members

'1 0.8.2 Cross-sectional dlmensions

Sections less than 3 inch.

Sections over 3 inch andless than 18 inch.

Sections over 18 inch.'10.8.3 Deviations from straight l ine

in long sections.

Not more than

1/16 inchper '10 feet

1 /16 inch

1 /8 inch

l/4 inch

'1l8 inchper '10 feet.

'10.8.4 Deviation from specified camber + '1l16 inch perMaximum differential between l0 feet span.adiacent units in erected position

4 inch.

11, ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE

11,1 GENERAL

11.2

'11.1.'1 Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirementswill be accepted subject to the other terms of the ContractDocuments.

11.1.2 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more of therequirements and which has been repaired to bring it intocompliance will be accepted subject to the other terms of theContract Documents.

'11.'1.3 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one of more of therequirements and which cannoi be brought into compliance may beaccepted or rejected as provided in these Specifications or in theContract Documents. ln this event, modifications may be requiredto assure that remaining work complies with the requirements.

DI IVIENSIONAL TOLERANCES

11.2.1 Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outl ines smaller thanpermitted by the tolerances of clause 10 shall be consideredpotentially deficient in strength and subject to the provisions of subclause l '1.4.

11.2.2 Fotmed surfaces re-suiting in concrete outlines larger thanpermitted by the tolerances of clause 10 mad, be rejected and theexcess material shall be subiect to removal. if removal of theexcess material is permitted, it shall be accomplished in su

r-xt-#

01300-32

o manner as to maintain the strength of the section and to meet allother applicable requirements of function and appearance.Permission is required if excess material is to be removed inaccordance with this clause.

'1 1.2.3 Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected ifthe strength, appeafance or function of the structure is adverselyaffected or if misplaced items interfere with other construction,

'11.2.4 Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding the limits ofClause l0 or of Clause 6.1.6 of Section 'Formwork' and whichare exposed to view, may be rejected and shall be repaired orfemoved and replaced if required.

11.3 APPEAMNCE'11.3.1 Architectural concrete with surface defects exceeding the

limitations of Sub-clause 6.1.6 of the Section, 'Formwork' shallbe removed and replaced.

1'1.3.2 Othef concrete exposed to view with defects which adverselyaffect the appearance of the specified finish may be repairedonly by approved methods.

'11.3.3 Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection fordefective apoearance.

11.4 STRENGTH OF STRUCTURE

11.4.1 The strength of the structure in place will be considered potentiallydeficient if it fails to comply with any requirements, which controlthe strength of the structure, including but not necessarily limitedto the following conditions.

Concrete strength requifements not considered to besatisfied in accordance with Clause 6 hereof.

Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position orarrangement at variance with the requirements as listedundef specification of 'Reinforcement' or in the ContractDocuments.

Concrete which differs from the required dimensions orlocation in such a manner as to reduce the strength.Curing less than that specified.

Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes oftemperature during eady stages of hardening and strengthdevelopmeni.

Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents ofpremature removal of formwork likely to result in deficientstrength:

Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength,

11.4.2 Structuralwhen thedeficient,

analysis and/or additionalstrength of the structure

03300-33

ffiM

a1'1.4.3 Core tests may be required when the strength ot the concrete in

place is considered potentially deficient.

'11.4.4 lf core tests are inconclusive or lmpractical to obtain or if structuralanalysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load testsmay be required and their result evaluated in accordance withBrit ish Standard BS 81'10 or ACI Standard 318.

'11.4.5 Concrete work judged inadequate by structufal analysis or byresults of a load test shall be reinforced with additionalconstruction if so directed by the Engineer or shall be replaced, atthe Contractor's expense.

11.4.6 The Contractor shall pay ail costs incurred in providing theadditional testing and/or analysis required by this section.

11.4.7 The Employer will pay all costs of additional testing and/oranalysis which are made at his request and which is not requiredby these Specifications, or by the Contract Documents.

12. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

12.1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost thefeof shall be deemed to have been included in thequoted unit rate ofthe respective items of the Bills of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim ofclaim any compensation on this account,

12.1.1 Providing, f ixing, striking, etc. of formwork.

'12.1.2 Providing, placing and fixing of anchor bolts or any other embeddedparts.

'12.'1.3 Providing and install ing all type of joints inincluding expansion joints.

12.1.4 Providing and fixing water stoppers.'12.2 Plain and Rein{orced Concrete

'12.2.1 Measurement

Concrete shall be measured as executed but no deduction shall bemade for the following:

- Volume of any steel embedded in the concrete.

03300-34

o Volume occupied by water pipes, conduits etc. notexceeding 10 square inches each in cross-sectional area,

Voids not exceeding 4 square inch in work given in squarefeet. lf any void exceeds 4 square inch, total void shall bededucted.

Voids, which are not to be deducted as specified above refer onlyto openings or vents which afe wholly within the boundaries ofmea6ured areas.

Openings or vents which are a1 the boundaries of measured areasshall always be subject to deductions irrespective of size.

Concrete work shall be classified andlisted under items of Bills of Quantities.

Junction between straight and curyed works shall in all cases bedeemed to be included with the work in which they occur.

measured separately as

_ {)utho;\\

,;;i"]+-\gt t iR+:---l.9

03300-35

1.

sEcTtoN - 04000

BLOCK MASONRY UNITS

SCOPE

The work under this section of the specification consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances, materials and in performing all operations inconnection with supplying and constructing brick masonry, or concrete masonrycomplete in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and applicabledrawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The scope ofthis section of specification is covered with detailed specificaiion as laid downheretn.

APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

Latest editions of the following ACI codes and ASTM Standards referred toherein, are appljcable to these Specifications.

ACI Codes

ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry StructuresACI 530.1 Specifications for l\/lasonry

ASTIVI Standards

ASTM C 129 Non-Load Bearing concrete Masonry UnitsASTlil C 90 Load Bearing Concrete Masonry UnitsASTI\4 C 216 Facing Bricks (Solid Masonry units made from clay or shale)

ASTM C 67 Sampling and Testing Bricks

AST[./] C 270 Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 207 Moftar for Unit Masonry

ASTMA615 Defomed and plain billet bars for concrete reinforcement

3. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Products or materials certified Manufacturerc shall be used wheneverpossible in lieu of other supplier or manufacturer.

Provide the services of qualified masons with at least five yearsexperience in installations of a similaf nature.

Furnish masonry units, cured by one process, of uniform color andtexture, withoui spalls, chips or other deficiencies that impair strengthand/or appearance, and conforming to the physical requirements of thestandard Building Code and to Florida Concrete and ProductsAssociation.

A.

I

D. Perform laying, finish:ng and grouting of masonry work in accordance withthe requirements of the American Concrete Institute, ACI 530, BuildingCode Requirements for Masonry Structures, and Acl 530.1,Specifications for Masonry Structures.

04000 - I r,f>a'u\:=.;,.;.,r

o E, Provide mortar materials and mortar application in compliance with therecommendations of the National Lime Association and PortlandCement Association.

F, Job Mock-Up: Erect at the job site, one sample mock-up masonry wallpanel 4 feet long by 4 feet high, constructed to represent masonry workfor quality, appearance, materials and workmanship. Upon approval bythe Engineer, the panel shall become the standard of comparison for allmasonry work built of the materials represented in the sample panel. Donot move, alter or destroy the sample panel until all masonry work iscomplete.

L Color is to be within normal manufacturer's range represented by sampleto be approved by Engineef

4. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver masonry units and mortar materials to the site undamaged, onpallets, stacked to allow air circulation and covered and protected fromrain, ground water, soil-age, stain-age, or intermixture with earth or othermaterials.

B. Store mortar matefials off the ground, under cover using tarpaulins, feltpaper, or polyethylene sheets, and in a dry location. Remove damagedmaterials from the site and replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

SUBMITTALS

A Manufacturer's Data

Submit in accordance with Section 0'1340 of the General Conditions, twocopies of product data, manufacturer's technical information andinstructions ior each manufactured product and other data for each typeof brick or masonry as applicable and accessory required. Instructionsshall be included for handling, storage, installation, and protection ofunits and accessories.

B Samples: Submit the following samples:

'1. Submit three samples of each type of brick and accuracy required,also samples of the full range of exposed texture to be used in thecompleted work.

2. unit masonry sampies for each type of exposed masonry unitrequired in sufficient quantity to show full range of exposed colorand texture to be expected in completed work. Submit colorvariations available for Engineef s selection.

3. Anchors, Ties, Joint Reinforcement: Two of each type proposedfor use.

Mortar: Two cured mortar samplesselection.

matching Engineer's

a

4. col

Certificate

'1 . Submit manufacturer's written certification thatmasonry units meet or exceed all the requirementsSection.

the conc

*:.;'5(lt.9/ \i l I

\ q \ / ,

\y.-",tc.

04000 - 2

set forth in t

2. Submit the grout mix design.

3. Cement.

4. Reintorcing Steel.

D. Shop Drawings, Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication,bending, and placement of wall reinforcement. Comply with ACI 3'15,Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced ConcreteStructures.

E. IgglBgpgrtsReports for compressive strengths of brick and mortar; and tensile testsof reinforcing steel.

Construclion tolerances

A. Variation From Plumb:'1. For vertical l ines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises, do not

exceed the following:

a. 7;' in 10 feet.b. 3/8" in any story height, maximum 20 feetc. Y2" in 40 leel ot more.

2. Fot external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and otherconspicuous lines, do not exseed the following:

a. y4" in any slory, maximum 20 feet.b. %" in 40 feet or mofe.

3. For vertical alignment of head joints, do noi exceed 318" in 10 feet.

B, Variations From Level:

For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets,'1 .

c.

D,

hoizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed ihefollowing:

a. %" in any bay, maximum 20 feet.b. %" in 40 feet or more.

2. For top surface of beadng walls, do not exceed 1/8"adjacent floor elements in l0 feet or 1/'16" within width of a singleunit.

Variaiion of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and relatedportion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed the following:

1. %' in any bay. maximum 20 feet.

2. 7;' in 40 feet or more.

Variation In Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness ofwalls, do not exceed minL]s y4" g( plus y2" lront dimensions shown.

Variation in Mortar Joint Thicknessi Do not exceed indicated bed iointthickness by more than plus or minus '1l8", with a maximum thick

".-.#q\/_--\'/ \4

'i..\ ./.6)^^! e--'- .'7l

E.

04000 - 3

a limited to %" Do not exceed indacated head joint thickness by more thanplus or minus 1/8"

Job conditions

A. Protection of work: Durjng erection, cover top of walls with waterproofsheeting at end of each days work. Covef partially completed structureswhen work is not in progress.

B. Do not apply uniform roof loading for at least 12 hours after buildingmasonry walls or columns.

C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after buildlng masonrywalls or columns.

Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonryto be left exposed or painted. lmmediately remove grout or mortar incontact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mudand mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and overwall surfaces.

Protect sills, ledges and projections from dropping of mortar.

D.

8. PRODUCTS

8.,I CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Provide concrete masonry units having nominal face dimensionsof 16" long by 8" high, smooth textured, sound and free fromcracks, chipped edges or other defects that would interfere withpfoper setting or impair strength or durability of the construction.tjse units of special shapes and size for lintels, comers, jambs,sash, control joints, headers and other special conditions asrequifed to complete the work shown. Where units are to beexposed on the interior of the building, use units free of surfacedefects that would be noticeable and objectionable at a distanceof 12-feet from the finished wall.

B. Non-load bearing concrete Masonry Units: Provjde unitconforming to ASTlil C 129, Type ll, and normal weight, withnominal face dimensions of 8' by 16", thicknesses as shown onDrawing and with external corners bull-nosed.

C. Load Bearing Concrete l\rasonry units: Provide units conformingto ASTM C90, Type ll, of normal weight having strength of 2000psi.

D. Deliver units to the job site in an air-dry condilion and protect themat the job from ground water and rain pdof to and duringconstruction of the walls. Provide units that are suitably aged attime of delivery to meet linear shrinkage potential requirements ofASTM C 426.

a.2 Blocks

Building Bricks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 62. Size ofbuilding bricks shall be 8" x 16" x 8" and as approved. The Contractorshall submit samples of building blocks for approval prior tocommencement of work. Defective bricks shall used.

f-\q[.38.3 Mortar Materials

04000 - 4

B.

c. 1.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Typeentrainment and of naturalcolor.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 9'1.

non-staining, without air

Premix Mortar for concfete lvlasonry: ASTM C 37, Type M.

Methods and equipment used for mixing mortar will besuch so as to accurately determine and control the amountof each separate ingredient entering into the mortar, Mortarshall be mixed only in sufficient quantities for immediateuse and shall be used within 30 minutes after mixing.Stiffened mortars shall be re-tempered by adding water torestore the required consistency. lvlortars not used within2-1D howa after initial mixing shall be discarded. Themixers shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed at the endof each day's work.

Mortar: AST[/ C27O for Brick Masonry.

Mortar shall conform to the requirements ofASTM, c-270.l\/lortar shall be of type S having a minimum Compressivesirength of 1800 psi.

Proportioning for mortar shall be in accofdance with thereouirements of ASTM C 270. However it shall not be lessthan 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand.

2.

D. Aggregate:

1. For Mortar: ASTM C144

2. For Grout: ASTlil C404.

Water: Potable water free of deleterious materials which wouldimpair the strength or bond. All water used in the manufacture ofbrick sand in the preparation of mortar shall be free fromobjectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salts andother impurities. The waier shall be tasted in accordance with BS-3148, where directed by the Engineer.

Hydrated lime: ASTIVI C 207, Type S.

Waterpfoofing: Master Builders Steafox or equal.

Water Repellant lvlortar Mix: Equal to WR. Grace Dry-Block forarchitectural units or equal

Colored Mortar Pigments;

1. Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,compounded for use in mortar mixes. use only pigmentswith record of satisfactory performance in masonrymortars.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the followingi

Centurion Pigments by Centurion

True Tone Mortar colors by Davis Colors,subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc.

04000 - s

E.

F.

t .

a .

b .

c.o

8.4

9.2

8.6

SGS llloriar Colors by Solomon Grind-ChemServices, inc.

3. Integral water repellant agent added to mortar (Type "S').

4. Color to be selected by Engineer.

ANCHORS AND TIES

A. Zinc coated steel or coDper coated steel. Provide anchors and tiesas indicated on the Drawings, or as required for installation ofvarious items. Provide anchors of the tvoe best suited for thesituation.

HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Duf-O-Wal Ladder, g-gauge, Iadder type, CSR Rinker orHchmann & garnard Lox-All No. 8, or equal

B. As shown on drawings and approved by Engineer.

MISCELLANEOUS

A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 6'15, Grade 60.

EXECUTION

9.1 Construction

Construct all work plumb and true and buift accurately to dimensionsshown, Provide and place such special units as fequired to form allcorners, returns, offsets and maintain proper bond. Where interiorconcrete masonry partitions meet othef interior partitions or exterior walls,provide a masonry bond or the equjvalent in approved metal ties.

Bond

Lay all masonry units, except architectural masonry units, in running bondby lapping units in successive coufses a distance of one-half a unit. Layall courses level with joints of uniform width and finished flush. Providefull mortar coverage of the face shells in both the horizontal and verticaljoints. Point all joints solid with modar on both sides of wall. Firmlycompact joints in exposed work with a pointing tool when partially set.

MORTAR MIX

A. Proportion mortar by volume, in accordance with Florida ConcreteProducts Association "Mortar Requirements - Table 2" for Type l\/and S mortaf. as follows:

Mortar Type

Portland Cement

lvlasonry Cement

Hydrated Lime or LimePutty

Aggregate, Damp, Loose

Aver. Comp Strength at28 days

%

3 max. combinedvolumes aoove

2500

M

1

I (Type ll)

2 Y2min . lo

2500

%

2,o a.

{$t04000 - 6

B. Use all mortar and grout within 30 minutes of initial maxing and discardany that has begun to set. Re-tempering of mortar in which setting hasstarted will not be permitted. Mortar may be re-tempered as necessary tokeep it plastic, providing it has not begun to set or older than 30 minutes.

C. Water Repellant l\/ortar Mix - Site Mixed: (Basis of DesignDry-Block or accepted equal).

Grade

D,

2.

L

1.

3. Product: Water repellant mortar produced at jobsite with CSRRinker masonry cement, Dry-Block mortar admixtufe by W.R.Grace, and integral color supplied by csR Rinker Demaco Corp.,color match to Architectural CMU

Water Repellant Mortar Mix: Plant-lvlixed.

A plant redi-mix mortar, delivered to jobsite, integrally colored ifrequired, with extended workability up to 48 hours, dependant onprevailing environmental conditions and containing integrally-

A jobsite mixed mortar containing admixtures consisting of liquid,integral color pigments, non-chloride and non-corosive setaccelerator, and/or corrosion-inhibitor as required for projectconditions.

Physical Properties:

a. Type: ASTIVI C 270, Type S.

b. Water Permeation: ASTM E 514-74, achieves Class Erating with no watef visible on back of wall above flashingat end of 72 hours.

c. Flexural bond Strength: ASTIVI E72 and C 1072 minimumflexural bond strengih equal to mortar without admixture.

d. Compressive Strength - With life extending adm,xture:ASTM c 270 and C 780, minimum compressive strengthequal to mortar without admixture.

added polymeric water-repellant admixture, life extendiadmixtufe, and corrosion-inhibiting admixture.

2. PhysicalPropertiesl

a. Typei AST[4 C 1142, type RS.

b. Water Permeation: ASTI\4 E '14-74, achieves Class E

3.

with no water visible on back of wall above flashing at eof 72 hours.

Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM E 72 and C 1072, minimumflexural bond strength equalto mortarwithout admixture.

E.

Compressive Strength - with extending admixturelASTM Cto monar270 and C 780, minimum compressive strength equal

without admixture-

Product: Water repellant mortar produced with (Rainbow, Blue Circle)Plant - mixed colof mortars (to match Architectural C[IU) and W.R.Grace Dr-Block Admixtures.

CUT UNITS

Cut all odd size masonrypower dfiven masonry saw.

units in a finally exposed wall withChlpping of units will not be permitted.o

fTil*-1J

9.4

04000 - 7

9.7

JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Providehorizontaljointreinforcementthroughoutexteriormasonrywalls, '16-inches on center vertically.

FRAMES, MULLIONS AND SPACES

A. Fil l solidly wiih grout all hollow metalframes, mull ions and spacesaround built-in items.

LINTELS

Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings ofmore than 'l foot are shown.

For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with reinforcing bats placed as shown and filledwith grout cf consistency required to complete fill space betweenreinforcing bars and masonry unit. Texture and appearance tomatch the split face masonry units.

9.8

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwiseindicated.

CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonrywhere shown. Build in related masonry accessory items as themasonry work progresses.

Build in flanges of factory-fabricated expansion joint units.B ,

C. Provide jojnt fillers07920. Joint widthindicated.

PLACING

The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortarshall be such as will not damage the brick nor delay the use of mixedmortar. Bricks shall not be placed during heavy rains to washing awa)t themortar from the brick. Mortar already spread which becomes diluted byrain shall be discarded and replaced before continuing with the work. Allbricks to be used in brick masonry shall be soaked in water for three tofour hours before they are used to ensure that each brick is thoroughlyand uniformly wetted. All bricks shall be free from water adhedng to theirsurface p when they are placed in the brick masonry.

Bricks shall be Iaid "frog" upward with modar joints and in stretcher bondor as appfoved by the Engineer. Both bed and vertical joints shall be 3/8"in thickness completely filled with mortar as specified herein, and eachbrick shall be bedded by firmly tapping with the handle of trowel. Allhorizontal joints shall be parallel and all vertical joints in -alternatecoufses shall be directly over one another. Excess mortar at the outefedges shall be removed and joints drawn stralght. Work required to beembedded in the brier: masonry shall be installed as the work progresses.At the completion of the work all holes or defective mortar joints shall becut out and repainted.

where shown. and as specified in Sectionfor sealants shali be 3/S unless otherwise

They shall be laid true to l ine, level and plumbs, All joints shall beperfectly straight. parallel and sharp. Facing brick of irregular shape.__.size. damaged and defeciive edges and faces shall be rejected outrFnf f

o4ooo-8 i:( x\' \ . . .. . ' ' ' . '

/z!, ,1. r' .ij\y'*l-{ail 1=l le\ iN-o_\ ,/ '

r-\-Fi's*

6 - 000t0

'raeur6ul eql ol lsocpe lnoqlm iolceJluoc aLll Iq papnl?ul eq lleqs

',clo burplojJeeslsoS uaur)JoM jo esn JoJ oJes €peu pue poueqloueJls ue€q sBq

lt l[un pesn eq lou lleqs Jaeu!6uf eql ]o uorurdo aql ur s]?sun sr qcrqloutplojlecs esuadxo uMo srq te slLloreq pue sla^al llB le uaLlrlJo^ loesn roJ rlloueJls elenbepe Jo burplogecs eles epr^ord lleqs Jolceluoc eql

9Nlc'loJJvcs e l 6'spunodLUoc luelees ro

6ur)lnec to uoll?clldde roj perederd ̂pedo]d 'ecueJeedde uJolrun'leeu e epr^ord ol )]o^\ luacBfpP pue s6uluado 's.rou.roc ro sluroflle dnJurod reuoLu r.llr^\ llu ̂lelelduroc puB 'seloq dee/'^ ldecxe'soloq Jo spro^ Iue aoJelue ',slurolJo oulool eql 6uuno ioulurod I

'luouJo0eldor Jo ecuept^a

eleururle cl pelurod 'lnoj6 Jo JBUou.l rjseJJ ul llelsur pue slrunoururolpe qclelu ol sllun Mou epr^ord papualur se slrun bururolpeqcleu lou op slrun Jr Jo 'pe6euJep esl/l,\Joqlo ro peurels 'uelo.rq'peddtqc 'osool ere qcrLl^ slrun ̂Juoseur eoeldal pue a^oureu V

gN[NtOd ONV UtVdfU Zr'6

,(lelerpeLuLur Lepou peceldsrLue^oLlrou bururels lsureoe sacBfns fuuosEru pesodxe lcolojd E

^lerncas pleq pue slle^ to sapls qloq ur,\oppeel z lseel le oulpuexe ouerqulaut bururels-uou 'looldJelea'6uo.rls l-lll/,1 slleM Jo sdol eql 6u!Ja^oc Iq 'sseroord ur lou sr )roluoq^ 'reqlee/ll\ eql tsureoB fuuoseu palelduJog ^lleqJEd lcelord V

NOlLSSrOUd I1. 6

'Jeau!6uf oql ̂q '6u[uM

ur 'pa/uolle sselun €lqeldecce eq lou llrl ee.re a [3erap aql to 6u!L]c]€dro Jredau reeurOu3 ol lsoc leuonrppe lnoql^1 'ropejluoC eql Iq pecplderpue pe^oueJ eq lleLtrs ll 'acelns e^llcelep E sMoqs Jo 'sbuu\^etp eqlUo u/v\oqs 'sle^ol pue seutl eql ol tll.loJuoc lou saop.lo 'le^el Jo luauuollBur lou atB s un aql 'lJoM fuuoseur lguq lue Jo uoielduroc eql JeUe 'll

s)clJqJO eJnpeJnuBu eq] ul posn rele^l JoJ suorlecrlr9eqs eql Jo EueureJrnoelaql loel! lleqs 6uunc Jol pesn ]elBM lar ,{lsnonutluoc porng oq olse?efns ll? doe) llr,v\ qcrq^r\ poqleur pe^oJdde uB fq slep ue^es lseel l?ro,le^ lde) aq llBr.ls pue pernc rale^ sq llEqs tuuoseL! lusueg )ctJq lM

utvdtu oNv 9NtHnc 01 6

'slurolelll olul reuouJ aql sse.rduJoe ol s! lurol oql6ur)Uls to paho aql se o6pe 6ur$nc e dole^ep lou op slool ouHuls alllleql ue)iel eq lleqs areC qclou n E ql|M )pnrls eq lleqs slurol lecrua^ pue1u1of pe.raqleem e u.rjol ol lcnJF eq lleqs slurol lBluozr.roH lool buBulod er.llr^\ sturoleq] qslull pue plel ueeq seq ljo \ lcuq eq] Ja e Jeuour uaaloeql 6uqer Iq )pnJls eq lleLts slurol aLlI punoq ol clls?ld ̂DuolcuJns lllslnq les ̂llelued srrel.rouJ orll uetlM euop eq lleqs 6urlool spaecord Xo^eql se slurol eql oupiuls ,{q p€qsruu oq lleqs slle^^ eql Jo secel Joua}f

pue o^rlcoJep lle 'tsoc leuorlrppe

aql pue pepalal aq lleqs secel pue

'slJo^r\ alqeldacceunlnoqlu aceloer lleqs Jopeluocse6pe e^rpajap Lllr/l^ auop s)JoM

Damage to masonry from scaffolding or from any other cause shall berepair-d by e Contractor at his own cost.

9.14 DAMP PROOF COURSES

All damp proof courses unless otherwise specified shall be 2 inches thick,consisting gf cement concrete having a 28 day minimum cute strength of21 N/mm2, mixed with approved quality water proofing compound as permanufacturer's specifications and shall be laid at required levels as perdrawings and instructions of the Engineer. The damp proof course shallbe tamped, consolidated, leveled and edges and corners made to therequirements of the relevant drawings including finishing and curingcomDlete.

No separate payment will be made for providing and laying damp proofcourse.

9.I5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

At the completion of the work, all holes, and defective mortar joints shallbe cut and re-pointed. Exposed masonry shall be protected againststaining or othef damage and excess mortar shall be cleared off thesurfaces as the work progresses All exposed masonry shall be clean,smooth, fine and shall be of acceptable finish approved by the Engineer.

9,I6 ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY

All masonry unitg shall be anchored to structural elements in accordancewith UBC-97 or as per detail shown on drawings

IO MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

l0,l General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment wil l be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in thequoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bills of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim any compensation on this account.

'10.'1 .'1 Cutting & chiseling of masonry wherever required.

'10.1.2Cement sand mortar used in laying bricks includingwastage.

10.1.3Curing and repairing the masonry work, cantt strip andmaking ofweep holes.

10.1.4A11 steel anchor bars/dovetail/wall t ies for cavity wall andanchors etc. in masonrY wo|k,

10.1.5 Damp proof course of class 'C' concreteproofing agent and deep struck pointing.

,#*\l { |

M04000 - 10

including water

o 10.2 Masonry'10.2.1 lvleasurement

ln case of different thickness of slab in ditferent areas or room orfor any other reason whatsoever, if chiseling of masonry lsrequired; the Contractor shall do so at his own cost. No deductionshall be made for the area of cavity in a cavity wall.

Where, for any reason whatsoever, the height, of the wall is shortof ceil ing height, the actual height shall be made good with 1:2:4nominal mix concrete. This concrete shall neither be measurednor be paid under item of concrete but will be paid for under itemof wall masonry. Similarly where the lintel heights are such thatthe Contractor has to chisel the masonry or provide cast-in-placeconcrete to make up the height of the course, no paymenl will bemade for chiseling, but whefe such cast-in-place concrete isprovided, payment for the same will be made at the unit rate formasonry.

Measurement of acceptably completed works of respective type ofbrick masonry will be made on the basis of number of cubic feetprovided & installed in position as shown on the Drawing or as.lir6^r6i{ hu tha Fn^i6aar

5.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofrespective iype of brick n'rasonry on the basis of unit rate per cubicfeet quoted in the Bills of Quantities against the respective itemand shall constitute full cornpensation for all the works related tothe item.

04000 - 11

o sEcTloN - 04100

BRICK MASONRY UNITS

l. ScoDe of Work

The work to be done under this section covers the brickwork including reinforcedbrickwork required to be constructed under these specifications and shall consist of thematefials herein specified. Mortar shall be proportioned, mixed and placed inaccordance with the requirements stated herein. The requirements set forth hereinshall apply to all brickwork, except when such requirements are specjfically modifiedby the Engineer in charge for any pa(icular item of work.

2. Materials

All materials and operations of the Contractor in constructjng and completing brickworkshall be in complete conformity with the applicable requirements of the specificationsand shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

2.1 Cement

All cement for mortar shall oonform to the applicable requirements set forth inspecifications for Concrete - General.

2 .2 Sand

Sand for mortar used in brickwork shall meet the requirements Set forth in ASTIVIDesignation Cl74-81 "Standard Specifications for Masonry Mortar'. The maximumpercentage of deleterious substances shall not exceed the limits provided in fineaggregate requirements set forth in Specifications for Concrete General. The Finenesslvlodulus of the sand shall range between 1.9'l to 2.78 and the grading shall be withinthe following l imits.

Sieve Size Percent Passing

Natural Sand

No.

No

No

No

No

No

No

4

B'16

30

100

200

(4.76 mm)

(2.38 mm)

( 1 .18 mm)

(600 mm)

(300 mm)

(179 mm)

(74 mr.r')

100

95 to 100

70 100

40"75

10 '35

25 max

10 "

04100-1

a Sand shall be stored at the site in such a manner as to prevent its deteriofation or- inclusion of foreign mattef. All methods employed by the Contractor for unloading,

loading, handling and storage shall be subject at all t imes to the approval of Engineer.Sufficient quantiiy shall be maintained at the site at all t imes to assure continuouswork.

2.3 Water

The water used in the manufacture of bricks preparation of mortar and curing shall bein complete conformity with the stipulations and requirements set forth in specificationsfor Concrete General.

2.4 Bricks

Bricks shall be first class made from good loam or clay. The earth be free fromobjectionable quantities of lime, gravel, coarse sand, roots and other organic matter.The salt contents shall not exceed 0.3 percent and calcium carbonate contents shallnot be more than 2 percent.

All bricks shall be manufactured by Trench Kiln method or other standard methodapproved by the Engineer. The moulds to be used in the manufacture of bricks shall bethoroughly sanded before each use and shall be sufficiently larger than the size of thebricks to allow for shrinkage of nominal size 9" x 4-l,12" x 3" (229 mm x 117 mm x 76mm). lvlaximum tolerance in length shall be + 6 mm and in breadth/width the toleranceshall be + 3 mm. The frog shall be 6 mm deep on upper face. The bricks shall bethoroughly burnt without being vitrified and shall be regular, uniform in shape and sizewith sharp and square size, parallel faces and of deep fed or copper colour. The brickshall be homogeneous in texture and emit a cleaf ringing sound when struck and shallbe free from flaws, cracks, chips, stones and modules of lime. A brick in an oven driedcondition shall not absorb water more than 1/6th of its weight when immersed for onehour in water at 21 to 27 degrees centigrade and shall not show any signs ofefflorescence on subsequent drying.

The bricks shall be sorted out and arranged in stacks of one or two thousands or asdirected by the Engineer-in Charge. Each stack shall be '10 courses high and twobricks thick so that at least one end of every brick is visible. At least 0.6 meters spacebetween the stacks shall be left for the purpose of inspection. For the purpose ofinspection and tests the sample bricks shall be selected by the Engineer or a personauthorized by the Engineer for this purpose. These samples shall be furnished by theContractor withort charges. The sampling shall conform to ASTIVI Designation C67-81.For the modulus of rupture, con'rpressive strength and absorption determinations atleast 10 bricks shall be selected from each lot of 10,000 bricks or a fraction thereofcontained in the lot. ln no case shall less than 5 bricks be taken. Each specimen shallbe marked so that jt may be identified at any time. lvlarkings shall not cover more than5 percent of the superficial area of the specimen.

The bricks shall comply with ASTM Designaiion C67-81. Physical requirements of thebricks shall be as below:-

o

ry \^*il#

04t00-2

OBricks

lvl inimum oompressivestrength (brick flatwise)

(Kg.cm2)

Gross Area)

lvlaximum WaterAbsorption by 5-

hour Boil ing(Percent)

MaximumCo-efficient

lndividual 175 25.O 0.90

Average of 5Bricks

150 22.0 0.88

(The saturation co efficient is the ratio of absorption by 24-hours submersionwater to that after 5 hours submersion in boil ing water).

lf 10, bricks per thousand are defective or of density less than 1.72 (+ 0.05) or thebricks are out of dimensjon the whole lot shall be rejected and the contractor shallremove the rejecied lots from the site.

a The testing shall be carfied out by the Contractof at his own cost under the supervisionof the Engineer or his authorized representative at a laboratory approved by theEngineer.

Brick Tiles

Materials and manufacture of burnt clay ti les shall comply with the requirementsspecified herein for bricks except that the frog will not be required. Nominal size of tilesshall be 9" x 4-112" x 1-112" (229 mm x 117 mm x 38mm).

2.6 Reinforcing Steel

The brickwork shall be reinforced where shown on the Drawings. Reinforcing steelshall comply with the applicable requirements of specifications for reinforcing steel asper section 04200.

cold

o2.7 Damp Proof Concrete (DPC)

DPC shall be 50 mm thick or otherwise specifiedaggregaies in ('1:2r4). Two coats of hot bitumenspecified before the brick work pfoceeds.

on the drawings. lt shall be in fineshall be applied on the DPC as

EXECUTION

Placing

Mortar for all brickwork shall be as specified in contfact Agreeme

shall be mixed only in suificient qualit jes for immediate use and all mortar notwithin 30 minutes after addition of watef shall be wasted. Re-tempering of mo

Drawings. Whefe.difected by the Engineer for increasing workabil ity, hydrated l jmeputty approved by the Engineer shall be added to the mortar, but shall not exceed 25percent by volume of dry cement. Methods and equipment used for mixing mortar shallbe such as wil l accurately determine and control the amount of each ingrediententering into the mortar and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. lvlortar

o.a- r

04100-3

a not be allowed. Mixing troughs and pans shall be thoroughly cleaned wand washed atthe end of each day's work.

The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortar shall be suchas wil l not damage the bricks nor delay the use of mixed mortar. Bficks shall not beplaced during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash the mortar from the bricks.Mortar already spread which becomes diluted by rain shall be removed and replacedbefore continuing with the work. Freshly laid brickwork shall be covered withpolyethylene or tarpaulin sheeis to avoid dilution and removal of mortar by rain.Workmen shall not be allowed lo walk on the brickwork before it is fully set. All bricksto be used in brickwork with mortar joint shall be moistened with water from three tofour hours before these are used. The method used for moistening shall ensurethorough and uniform wetting of bricks. All bricks shall be free from water adhering totheir surface while placing in brickwork.

Brick masonry shall be laid where possible form one face only. Each brick shall be setwith both bed and verticaljoints filled with mortar. The frog shall face up and the bricksshall be bedded-in by firmly tapping with trowel handle. Bricks courses shall be carriedup as neatly as possible in a uniform manner during construction. All unavoidablechanges in slope shall be raked back at a slope of two horizontal to one vertical- Allanchors, reinforcement, hangers, sleeves and similar items required to be embeddedin the brick masonry shall be installed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by theEngineer during construction. The exposed face of all brick masonry shall heve fhesmoothest finish and shall be kept clean and free from mortar streaks. Where eversuch streaks are formed these shall be washed off immediately and shall not beallowed to harden. Hoiizontal ioints shall be parallel and vertical joints in alternatecourses shall be directly over one another.

The thickness of the vertical joints shall be approximately 6 mm and the thickness ofthe horizontal joints shall be 10 mm. Except where otheruise specified on the Drawing,excess mortar at the outer edges shall be removed and joints drawn straight with thetrowel edge and a straight edge. At the completion of the work all holes or defectivemortarjoints shall be cut out and repointed.

All brick work shall be bonded where it abuts other brickwork, concrete walls andcolumns. Brickwork of intersecting walls shall be interlocked and straight abutting jointswil l not be permitted. Where bfickwork abuts conciete wall, t ies engaging in dove tailslots shall be provided at every fourth course. Eight centimeter long dove tail slots castin cement concrete members at every fourth brick course height shall be provided orlVl.S bar ties shall be pfovided in place of dove tail slots where shown on the Drawings.

Brickwork shall be wedged to the undefside of f loor and roof slabs. Top most joint shallbe filled with well compacted mortar. Scaffolding holes shall be along headers and notmore than one brick in length. Scaffolding holes shall be neatly bricked in when nolonger required.

3.2 Repaifing of Brickwork

After completion of brick work if any brick is out of alignment or is not level or does notconform to the lines and grade shown on the Drawings, of shows a defective surface, ifshall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, unless theEngineer grants permission in writing to paich the defective area.

04100-4

o 3.3 Curing

All brick work in cement mortar shall be cured by water curing. Brickwork shall be keptwet for 17 days by covering with water saturated material or by a system of perforatedpipes, Technical sprinklers, porous hose, bonding or by any other method approved bythe Engineer. The method employed shall ensure continuous curing of all surfacesWater used for curing shall meet the requirements specified for water used in concreteand cement mortar manufacture.

3.3 Brickwork in Arches

Brick shall be properly made or cut and rubbed to proper lines shown on the Drawingsor as directed by the Engineer. Template shall be approved by the Engineer prior tocommencement of brickwork in afches. The joinls in brickwork shall not exceed 6 mmin thickness. Where half brick rings are shown on the Drawings or allowed by theEngineer, header brjcks or lacing courses shall be executed as directed by theEngineer. Cenlering shall be approved and struck as directed by the Engineer

4 Measutement and Payment

Measurement will be made of the number of cubic meters of brickwork acceptablyconstructed in accordance with the dimensions, l ines, grades and thickness shown onthe Drawings. The thickness of brickwork shall be a multiple of 115 mm. Noconsideration on account qf mo(ar in the joints shall be made for determination ofthickness. In case of brickwork built in with brick on edge the thjckness shall bemeasured as 75 mm or multiple of 75 mm. No deduction shall be made in brickwork foropening not exceeding 0.35 square meter in area and for plates, strings, felieving,arches, l intels sil ls etc. 150 mm deep and fire place flues.

For arches built in cut and rubbed bricks shall be measured separately. The contentsof arches will be deducted from brickwork. No deduction will be made for cambers ofthe arches. Width of the cavity shall not be included while deteimining thickness ofcavity walls. Payment will be made fof the number of cubic meters of brickworkmeasured as provided above at the respective unit price per cubic meter for itemsprovided in BOQS and shall constitute full compensation fof fufnishing all materialsexcept cement and steet reinforcement which shall be provided by the departmentformwork scaffoldings, dowels whefe fequired, f inishing, curing, labour, plant,equipment and all other work related to the item except D. P.C, plastering and steelreinforcement which shall be paid separately under respective items of BOQS.

o

04100-s

o sEcTtoN 04200

REINFORCED UNIT IVIASONRY

PART ,1 - GENERAL

'1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor required to complete thereinforced unit masonry construction in accordance with the drawings andspecifications.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A Section 04000, Unit lvlasonry

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, product data, mixes, etc., in accordance withSection0'1340.

B. Submit complete shop drawings, including bar l ist and placementdrawngs.

C. Submit mill test certificate for reinforcing steel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 I\,IATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Seciion 04000 or 04'100 for masonry matedals andaccessories not included in this Section.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM Designation A 615, Grade 60, unless otheMisespecified.

C. Construct all exterior/interior walls of reinforced concrete masonry inaccordance with drawings as follows:

'1. Concrete l\ilasonry Units: ASTM C 90, Type I, normal weight unitswith minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi Blocks or Bdcks

Premix lvlortar: ASTM C 387, Type M.

Vertical Reinforcing: Provide as shown on the Drawings.

conorete Grout for Filling Cells: 3/8-inch pea-rock mix withminimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi.

Horizontal Reinforcing: 9-guage ladder type at 16" o.c or as shownon drawings and approved by the Project lvlanager.

2.

3.

4.

04200^l

o PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACINGREINFORCEMENT

Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth or other materialswhich will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement barswith kinks or bends not shown on Dfawings or final shop drawings, orbars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

Place reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and securevertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may beplaced as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shownin close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less thanthe nominal bar diameter or 1-inch, whichever is greatef.

For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance betweenvertical bars as shown, but not less than 1-112 times the nominal bardiameter or '1-'112 inches, whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties asshown.

D. Splice reinforcement bars only as shown. Do not splice at other pointsunless approved by the Englneer. Provide lapped splices. Unlessotherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, tiesplices with wire.

E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required bygoverning code.

F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimummortar cover of s/8-inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 -inch at otherlocations.

G. Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated

3,02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL

A. Perform general installation of unit masonry in accordance with thereouirements soecified in Section 04000 or 04100

B. Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support ofreinforced masonry elements. Design, erection, support, bracing andmaintenance of formwork is the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown andsufficiently right to prevent leakage of mortar grout, of concfete (if any).

D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member hashardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonabletemporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. Do notremove fofms and shoring supporting the weight of concrete in beams,slabs and other members until concrete has attained its specified 28 daycompressive strength.

3,03 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

c.

General:

Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).

04200-2

a 2. Place CMU with full-face shell mortar beds Fill vertical headjooints (end joints between units) solidly w:th modar from face ofunit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thicknessof longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of startingcourses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths as shown,or if not shown, provide 3/B-inch joints.

3. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay units with full mortar headand bed joints.

B. Walls:

1. Pattern Bond: Lay C[ilU wall units in running bond with verticaljoints in each couEe centered on unlts in courses above andbelow, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock eachcourse at corners and intersections, and use special-shaped urritswhere shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, controljoints, l intels, bond beams and other special conditions

2. Maintain vertical continuity of core of cellcavities, which are to bereinforced and grouted, to provide minimum cleaf dimensionsindicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coveragefor vertical reinforcement barc. Keep cavities free of mortar.Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to feinforced cores orce s.

3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, usespecial units or modify regular units to allow for placenent ofcontinuous horizontal reinforcement bars Place small meshexpanded metal lath or wire screening in moftarioints under bondoeam courses over oores or cell of non-reinforced vertical cells' orDrovide units with solid bottoms.

4. Option: Where all vertical cores are not shown to be gfouted,Contractor may elect to fill all vertical cores with grout, in whichcase, requirements for mortar bedding of cross-webs and closingof core spaces below bond beams will not apply.

C. Columns, Piers and Pilastersl

'1. Use CMU of the size, shape and number of vertical core sshown. lf not shown, provide units which provide minimclearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertic?lreinforcement bars shown

2. Pfovide pattern bond as shown, or if not shown, provide alternatehead joints in vertical alignment.

3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, construct wall andpilaster units together to the maximum pour height specified

D. Grouting:

'1. Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 4-inches in bothhorizontal directions.

2. Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 4-inches inhorizontal directions.

,{-ul!,iF/

04200-3

t-002n0

uruoqs oupeds pue ozrs eql Jo sa[ leJa]Ellecrue^ q ^ sllun eql olecuqel '6ulcEldpatealqep)o sr lusuls9JoJural eJaq^il

sJeq luauiacJojurararoJaq Erun o6ec olur

'legl

ot rou sleleurerp req z6L ourpaacxa lou sle^Jalur le lueLuecJolurallecrue^ uooons lueluecJoJuror punoje ]o .re^o nnc peeJLllpue uMol]s aJaqM /fuuoseu] Jo eseq le slo/rop ol luouJo9roJurellecrue^ arf 6uDnoJ6 eJojaq lueLuacJoJulal leclue^ eceld

paleclpul eslMloqlo ssolun 'sllEM ̂luoseLuelelcuoc Molloq eq M elburs Jo! ',lea! vz lo lqoleq urnulxelue ol Jnod FoJ6 pue looj g Jo lqbreq urnurxeur ol slll ]noJ6 ]ru.r"l

tnoJO 6ulcBld ol Jold'peulceds rnod lnor6 urnuIXeL! Jo lr.l6req llnl ol ̂ruoseur lcn.rlsuoc

lleqs eceJ euo ur s6uruedo lnc ro 'suoddns )cLrq elalcuoc qll^^s]run JepBall esn Jo 'a^oqe sIUn roj suoddns /fueJodLual epr^o.rdpue pa^oueJ llaqs acBJ 3uo qln4 slrun osn noJ6 qlrll palll aq olore qcrqM slle3 lecrl.re^ lle le asJnoc lsrlJ ul seloq lnoueelc opr^ojd

'Ile^ogadser'ur bs 0L pue seqcur e sr eale pue uolsuaulp ̂ll^ec uJnuJlu[!sselun ny\c lo 6unnoJ6]o, enbruqcal 6u[noJ6 u[-L]6rll asn ]ou oc ',

:6uDnore U!l-qbrH

'u.reeq puoq e^oqe seJoc le9!uo^ 6ullllJ oroJoq esrnog ueeq puoqur lnor6 eceld u/t^oqs se peddPl suollcesJalul puE srouro9 qlrMsLUBeq puoq ur luourecroJuter leluozuoq sseld esJnoc ueaq puoqMoleq sallcul z/1,-l sllec lecue^ ur lnor6 eleururel :surea8 puog

'.rnod lo es.rnoc dol Molaq sellcur Z/t-! sJnod por6 eleururol lnoq euo ueql erour ]oJ lnor6 Jo ouunodldmolur iou oC .{lsnonuBuo? nol6 acetd dulceld 6uunp o)eiqn]o por pue elnqg Iq .ro lnods qlr^ .reureluoc 6ulsn lnor6 ]nod

LuEaq puoq ̂\oleqes]noc le rnod dols lr]6req laej I eql Molaq sJncco ueaq punoq]l

'leej I ol lr..l6leq Jnod lru.rl lqoroq rnod unurlxeur ot nnc ^e'1

'leeJ 0L rou sloleuerp req z6L ourpeecxa lou slP^Jalul

lecrpe^ lE uo0rsod ul u uoddns pue oulcllds rol Molle ol pernbeJse lq6leq .rnod unu.rxeu Jo uorle^ele e^oqe luauracJojulellecuaA pueuS nrlcJo 6ur^el olroud luau.recrorura le9rlre^ eceld

'pelnojb eq ol seJoc lecrue^ u|'u|'bs8JO eeJe Jealc pue saqcul-z Jo uorsuouJrp rEolc unurul.! e epr^ord

:6urmoJ0 1l!-i-Mo'l

'.4 Ollolr.lc[.ll s]uor.lertnbar eql o] ]calqns sanbruqcol 6umoi6 url-q6rq ]oljrl-Mol .raqlo osn 'uolldo s..rolceJluoc eql lv :anbruqcal 6urlnoJg

o Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units arelaid.

Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar ioints where shown asmasonry units are laid.

Where lateral ties are shown in contact with vertical reinforcementbars, embed additional lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints.Place as shown, or if not shown, provide as required to preventgrout blowout or rupture of CIVIU face shells, but provide not lessthan No. 2 bars or 8-gage wire ties spaced 16 inches o.c. fofmembers with 20 inches or less side dimensions, and 8 incheso.c. for members with side dimensions exceeding 20 inches.

Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and cleanout the grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loosepieces of masonry and other foreign materials fro grout space$.Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean topsurface of structural members supporting masonry to ensurebond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes andbars closures to resist grout pressures.

Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted hasattained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry unitsand braking of mortaf bond. Install shores and bracing, if required,before starting grouting operations

Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternatemethods are acceptable to the Engineer.Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in oneworking day with not more than one hour interruption of pouringoperation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow notless than 30 minutes. nor more than one hour between lifts of agiven pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.

Place gfout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuouspour.

15. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top ofpour, fill bond beam course to within '1-inch of vertically reinforcedcavities, during construction of masonry.

'16. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry,exiend reinforcemeni beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within '1-112

inches of top course of first pouf. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units andplace reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if morepours are requrreo

7.

9 .

10 .

11.

8.

12.

13.

14

04200-s

a sEcTloN - 05100

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS

SCOPE

The work covered by this section, consists of supply of all material, labour,plant, equipment and appliances including welding, bolts, nuts, washers,anchor bolts, embedded parts etc, fabrication, erection and painting inaccordance with the specifications and as per drawings and as directed by theEngineer.

2. DRAWINGS

Design drawings shall be prepafed by the Engineer and supplied to theContractor. These shall contain main dimensions, sizes of members, typlcaldetails ofjoints.

Workshop drawings shall then be prepared by the Contractor from the designdrawings supplied and submitted to the Engineer for approval. All submittalshall be made as oer the reouirements of section 05100.

3. MATERIAL

Except otherwise staled in the drawings, the material specifications shallconform to the following. Wherever necessary the Contractor may useequivalent alternatiye rnaterial subject to approval of the Engineer.

3.1 Structural Steel

Structural steel for structu{es shall conform to the requirements o{ASTIVI A-36 or equivalent

3.2 Steel Forging

Steelforging shall conform to the requirements of ASTI\,'|

3.3 Steel Casting

Steel casting shall conform to the requirements of ASTI\/

3.4 Welding

Welding Electrodes for manual shielded metal arc welding shallconform to AWS A 5.1 latest edition or the A 5.5 latest edition.Equivalent locally manufactured electrodes may be used subject tothe approval ofthe Engineef.

3.5 Common Bolts, Anchor Bolts, Nuts and WasheF Bolts and Nutsshall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 307.

3.6 High Strength Bolts

High strength carbon steel bolts including nuts and washers shallconform to the requirements of AST[, A325 latest editionsAISI B18.2

t .

05100-1

a Washers

Cut Washers: Shall be of structural grade steel and shall conform tothe dimension of the manufacturer's regular standard for plainwashers for the size of bolts used.

Cast lron

Shall conform to the requirements of latest edition of ASTM A 48.

3.8

3 .9

4. FABRICATION

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer about any problems or doubts/errorsdiscovered in the drawings for clarification/rectification well in time to preventany fabrication errors. Fabrication shall not be commenced until approval hasbeen obtained ffom the Engineer.

4.1 Straightening of Material

Rolled material, before being worked upon must be straightenedwithin tolerances by ASTM specifications AO Straightening,necessarily shall be done by mechanical means or by the applicationof a limited amount of localized heat, The temperature of heatedareas, as measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 1100EFfor A 5'14 steel or 1200EF for other steels.

Cutting

As far as possible cutting must be done by shearing, Oxygen cuttingshall be done where shear cutting is not possible and shall preferablybe done by Machine. All edges shall be free from gauges, notches orburs. lf necessary the same shall be removed by grinding.

Holes Punching Dril l ing.

Holes shall be punched where thickness of the material is not greaterthan the diameier of bolt + 1/8". Where the thickness of the materialis greater the holes shall either be drilled or sub-punched andreamed to size. The die for all sub-punched holes and the dril l to all

diameter of the rivet or bolt. Holes for A514 steelthick shall be dril led.

Welding

4 .4 .1 General:

The execution and Inspection of welding wil l be done inaccordance with the provisions of the American weldingsociety code for welding in Building construction, D1.0.No welding for piping/electrjcal supports shall be madetransversely to any tension flanges of trusses, beams orcolumns.

4.2

4.3

4.4

05100-2

o 4.4 .2

4 .4 .3

4.4.5

Automatic sub-merged Arc Welding:

For all builfup members, i.e. sections fabricated fromplates and flat bars or compound rolled sections, plateand box girders, where long continuous, welding is to bedone, should be executed by Automatic submerged ArcWelding process in accordance with relevant AWSspeciflcations.

Maximum and minimum size and lengths of filletweldsshall be in accordance wjth AISC specifications.

Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag,rust, grease, paint or any other foreign matter except millscale which, withstands vigorous wire brushing.

Tolerances

A variation of I mm is permissible in the over all length ofmembers with both ends finished for Contact bearing.The bearing surfaces prepared to a common plane bymill ing.

Members without end finished for contact bearing whichare to be framed to other steel parts of the structure shallhave a variation from detailed length not greater tha

o

SURFACE PREPARATION/PAINTING

Surface Preparation

All structural steel matedal i.e. rolled steel sections, plates,

5 .1

flat bars; chequered plates shall be cleaned free from loosescale, rust, burrs slag, etc. by means of sand blasting.

oPainting

a) lmmediately after surface preparation allone prime coat of rust preventive paint.

b) After fabrication one shop coat of primeof enamel paint shall be applied.

material shall be given

paint and then one coat

c) One final coat of enamel paint shall be applied aftef erection of allcomponents.

d) The type of primer and enamel paints to be applied shall be asspecified on the drawings or as approved by Engineer.

e) All other requirements for the speoified paint system shall be inaccordance with the paint manufacturer's specification /recommendations.

f) The Contractor shall use the best quality of the type ofspecified and shall get the same approved by the Engineer.

05100-3

s) Steel shall be painted in shop or prime coated (one coat) and withnot less two field coats.

Paint shall not be applied when the steel is damp, air is misty, orwhen in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are unsatisfactoryfor the wo*.

Painting shall be done in a neat manner and may be applied withhand brushes or by spraying (without the addition of a thinner).Aluminum paint shall preferably be appl;ed by spraying. By eithermethod adopted the coating applied shall be smoothly anduniformly spread so that no excess paint will collect at any point.

All surfaces which will be inaqcessible after fabrication orerection, with the exception of contact surfaces, shall prior toassembly, receive the full protective treatment specified for thecomponent of the structufe including any additional priming coatand finishing coats, which for accessible surfaces would beapplied subsequent to erection

The cleaning and painting of all structural steel parts shall besubject to detailed inspection and approval of the Engineer.Contractor shall be resoonsible for all defects or faults and thecorrection theteof at his own expense during fabrication, erectionor subsequently discovered before or during the Period ofMaintenance

Steel worldsurfaces not to be painted

i) Steel work to be encased/embedded in concrete orsurface in contact with concrete or grout shall not bepainted, but shall be given a cement wash after sandblasting.

i i) Machined finished surfaces shall not be painted but shallbe coated with rust preventive compound, (approved bythe Engineer) immediately after finishing. Such surfacesshall also be protected with wood pads or other suitablemeans for transportation. Unassembled pins, keys, and

))

n)

bolt thread shall be greased and wrapped yq-"ryq!resistant paper. /'_\o\)-<

INSPECTION AND TESTS

Manufacturer's Work Test, Certificate for all material

The Contractor shall arrange for analysis and test of alllocally at a testing labofatory selected by the Engineer,

Inspection of Welding.

6 .1furnished by the contractorfor Engineer's scrutjny and approv

6.2 Roll ing tolerance of all shapes and profi le according to AISC shall be inaccordance with the pfovisions of the American Society for Testing andMaterials Designation 4.6. These shall be checked by the Contractorbefore being worked upon and shall be rejected if found not within limits.

o . J

6.4

05100-4

material rolled

The inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance withAmerican Welding Society specifications, as directed by the Engineer.

6.5 Rejection

Materials or workmanshiD not in reasonable conformance withprovisions of these specifications shall be rejected at any time duringprogress of the woIk orthe completlon and erection at site.

the

thethe

7. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT

7.1 General

7 .1 .2

7 .1 .3

Except otherwise sDecified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will (be, made for theunder mentioned-specified, works related to the relevant items ofthe Bill of Quantities. The cost thane of shall be deemed to havebeen included in the quoted unit rate of the respect" -e items of theBill of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contfactor in the Bill of Quantities shallinclude works to be executed under this specification in anv floor andat any height.

7.1.1 Nuts, bolts, screw, rivets, heads, f i l lets, welds weldingrods, locks, rollers, rolling tracks etc.

Anti-corrosive prjme coat.

Cleaning with sand blasting.

7.1.4 Painting.

7 .1 .5 All metal embedded parts, metal fittings and fixturesrequired for the operational process.

05100-5

e sEcTtoN - 05400

MANHOLE, CATCH PITS AND VALVE CHAMBERSWITH C.I COVER AND FRAME

SCOPE OF WORK

This section covers standard, drop, and special sewer manholes. The work to bedone under this section of the specifications includes turnishing all plant, labor,equipment, appliances, material and performing all operations required inconnection with construction of manhole, valve chamber, of Gfease trap etc.,including provision and installation of cast iron cover with frame, ladder rungs,valves, etc., complete as specified herein, or as shown on the drawings, or asdirected by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

1 .

oConcrete

ReinforcementPortland cementSand

Mortar

Non-shrinkable

lvlortar

GasketsMastic

Flexible joint

uncKs

Materials, handling, forms, finishing, curing, and other workas sDecified in Section 2100 or 2200 Concrete.As indicated on drawings.ASTM C150Concrete sand (fine aggregate) sieved through 8 meshscfeenOne part Portlandlirne, ASTII C-207Pfemixed or job

cement, 3 parts sand, 1l4 part hydrated

job mixed shall be one partshrinkablecorrecting aggregate, one part Portland cement and onepart sand.

the joint so that abe smoothened otf

Enough material shall be applied tominimum of % inch bead is visible,after completion.Preformed "0" ring; butyl rubber or bituminous polymersare acceptable. Natural rubber is not acceptable.Bdcks shall be l"tclass burnt bricks as per requirements ofspecifications No. 4200.

Wall/slab thickness Thickness shall be in accordance with those indicated ondrawlngs.

APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF SPECIFICATIONS

The following specification sections shall beassociated with this section.

followed for carrying-out civil works

s.No.

1.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .

Section

EarthworkFormworkReinforcementPlain and Reinforced ConcreteBrick MasonryPlumbingCast lron Cover with Frame and Ladder Rungs

i4!:{D

05400-l

4.a CONSTRUCTION

l\/lanholes, Valves chamber or Grease trap etc. shall be of Reinforced Cementconcrete/Brick Masonry of the sizes, thickness and class of concrete as shownon the applicable drawings. Where soil is alkaline sulfate resistant cement shallbe used for concrete work. The work of excavation, backfilling, disposal ofsurplus/rejected earth, plain and reinforced cement concrete, Formwork,reinforcement, benching, pipe connections and provision and installatior'l of C.l.cover with frame, ladder rungs, valves etc., are to be done undef this section andshall be executed in accordance with the specifications as stated above. C.l.frames, valves and ladder rungs shall be well set in place at the time of pouringconcfete-

Ail mortar shall be used within 40 minutes after mixing. Mortar, which has begunto take on init ial set, shall be discafded and shall not be mixed with additionalcement or new cemenl.

lvlanhole inverts shall be constructed of concrete conforming to the requirementsof section 3100 & 3300. with exception that the concrete shall have minimum 28-day strength of 3000psi.

In no case shall the invert section through a manhole be greater than that of theoutgoing pipe. The shape of the invert shall conform exactly to the lower half ofthe Dipe it connects. Side connections shall be connected with as large radiuscurve as possible. All inverts shall be troweled to a smooth clean surface.

All manholes under construction shall be covered in an appropriate manner toprevent the entry of any storm water run-off, trench water, sand, earth or anyother foreign substances at any time during constructlon or while the manhole lsunattended.

4.1 CONCRETE MANHOLE SECTIONS

Manhole bases shallon a firm foundation.concrete.

be pre-cast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete,Flow channels and benches shall be shaped

Riser and base sections shall have cast or augured cufouts of therequired diameier for connections and outlet pipes; maximum size of cut-outs shall be equal to the outside pipe diameter plus four (4) inches. Aclearance of at least nine (9) inches of concrete shall remain betweenadjacent connection and outlet pipe holes and between riser joints andholes in pre-cast risers and base6. Lesser clearance wiil be consideredonly if additional reinforcing steel is provided and details are submitted foraDDroval

For manholes on sanitary and oombined flow sewers 24 inches andsmaller diameter, the Contractor shall install a lubricated, rubber gasketentry seal into the manhole wall to effect a watertight connection betweenthe connecting sewer pipe and the manhole.

Entry pipe shall be cut f lush with the inside wall ofthe manhole,

Manhole risers shall be constructed of pre-cast concfete elements wherefeasible, otherwise of brick masonry. Risers and cone tops shall befurnished with manhole steps 12 inches on c€nter. Manhole steps shallbe aligned on vertical section of sidewall having no pipe entry, withlegs embedded 3-3/8 inches into the concrete.

05400-2

CTRCULAR BRICK MANHOLE SECTIONS.

Manhole brickwork shall be plumb except for the eccentric top section,true to line with level and accurately spaced courses, with each coursebreaking joint with the course below. Joints shall not be less than 318inch nor more than

-/2 inch with a minimum of one header course to every

six (6) stretcher courses. Each brick shall be placed with a full joint in afull bed of mortar, shoved up against adjacent brick so that the mortarrises between and completely fills verticaljoint, Exterior surfaces of brickmanholes shall be completely coated with a'lz inch mortar parging andmade watertight. Brick Masonry wall shall be nine (9) inches thick;thickness shall be increased to '13.5 inches when manhole depth exceeds8 feet.

Brick masonry shall not be placed when the ambient ait tempetature isbelow 40 deg. F and when it appears probable that temperatures below40 deg. F will be encountered before mortar can set, unless adequateapproved means are provided fol protecting the work ffom freezing. Workshall be protected by heating and maintaining the temperature of themasonry materials at not less than 40 deg. F. on both sides of themasonry for not less than 72 hours. Work with, or on, a frozen material isprohibited.

Dudng hot weather, masonry shall be protected from direct rays of thesun. All finished work shall be covered and kept damp for a period ofseven days after Placement.

Mortar shall be freshly mixed for prompt use; no mortar shall be usedafter setting or beyond 40 minutes after the addition of water. Re-tempered mortar and freeze preventive chemical additives are prohibitedThe mixing machine, batch size, and mixing time shall be approved bythe Engineer. When hand mixing is done, mixing shall be accomplished ina clean, leak proof; nonporous mortar box constructed for the purpose.

Proper size manhole steps shall be aligned on section of side wall that isvertical to frame and cover, with step legs embedded 7-318 inches into thebrick work.

The Contractor shall furnish manhole frames drilled with two 3/4 inchesdiameter holes, 180 degrees opposed in frame flange. With frame inproper position at required grade, corresponding holes shall be drilledwith a minimum ot tv,/o (2) inches inio the brick masonry upon which theframe sits. Steel dowels shall be inserted through these holes to preventlateral movement of frames during backfill and paving operations. Dowelsshall be No.5 re-bars, three (3) inches minimum length, or approvedeouivalent. A mortar bed shall be constructed around the frame flange

COMBINED CONCRETE/BRICK SECTIONS.

Where approved by the Engineer, manholes may be constructed from acombination of brick masonry, and cast in place reinforced concrete Aftthe point where the different materials join, a watertight joint shall beprovided that leaves interior walls straight and \moothy'1ffi

4.3

o05400-3

8_

o

DAMP-PROOFING

Surfaces to receive damp-proof material shall be dry. Before bacKilling is started,the exterior surfaces of manholes shall be painted with two heavy coats of coal tarpaint.

STUBLINES

Stublines for future connections shall be provided in manholes at the locationsindicated on drawings and shallterminate in a belland plug.

COVERS

covers shall be set and securely fastened in place with concrete. The covers forsewef manholes shall be set at leveis designated by the Engineer; but in generalshall be as follows:

l. In paved areas, the cover shall be 1/8 to 1l4surrounding pavement.

ll. In graveled traffic ways or parking, the coverinch above surrounding surface.

be set from 114 to 3/4

In traffic ways of un-surfaced streets, the covers shall be setapproximately level with the ground surface.In grassed areas and the un-traveled portions of streeis, the covers shall

inch above the surface of

t .

be set from I to 2 inches above the surface.V. ln ditches or other drainage ways, the covers shall be set high enough to

be above the water in rainstorms.

MANHOLE STEPS

Mild steel steps (ladder rungs) of y1 diameter shall be buift into the walls ofmanhole bases as shown on drawings, with legs embedded at least 3-3/8 inchesinto the concrete and at least 7318 inches into the brickwork. First i.e. topmoststep shall be 18" below the top of manhole. Intermediate steps shall be placed @12" c/c, while the lowermost step shall be, maximum 2'0" above the invert ofmannote.

MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT

IlIEASUREIMENT

Measurement of acceptably complete works of manhole, valves chamberetc., will be made on the basis of actual quantities of manholes, valvechambers or Gfease trap etc., constructed and installed in position asspecified herein, as shown on the drawings and/or as directed by theEngineer.

PAY[/ENT

Payment will be made for acceptable actual measured quantiUes olmanholes; valve chamber etc., on the basis of unit rate quoted in therelevant items Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation forthe works related to the item.

9 .1

9.2

,#P\UJ05400-4

2.

3.

1 ,

4 .1

sEcT|oN;soo

MISCELLANEOUS METALS

SCOPE

1.1 Provide miscellaneous metals, sections, shapes and sheets, fittings, fasteners,wirework, etc., not specified elsewhere in these Specifications and as shownon the Drawings.

RELATED WORK

2.1 Section 09900, Painting

SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, indicatingfabrication, assembly and erection details, sizes of members, profiles,fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns, clearances and connection toother work, before fabrjcation begins.

Submit complete materials list of all items proposed to be provided underthis section.

3 .1

3.2

4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Standards:

2.

3.

4 .

1 . Uniform Building Code.

AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication andSteelfor Buildings.

American Welding Society Code AWS D1.1.

OSHA Standafds.

5 .1

MATERIALS

ceneral: Pfovide material that is free from defects impairing strength,durability or appearance, that is of best comrnercial quality for purposes specitied,and that has structu|al properties to safely sustain or withstand strains andstfesses to which normally subjected. Throughoul the facil i ty, provide materialshaving the same inherent textufe and color of exposed surfaces for like locations.Insofar as practicable, provide non-conosive, non-staining and concealedfastenings. Whefe fastenings must be exposed, match materials, color andfinish as material to which applied, countersink and finish flush. Grindexposed welds smooth to form a neat uniform fi l let without weakening basemeial. Remove all slag from welds before applying shop coating. Form molded bentor shaped members with clean, sharp arrives, without dents, scratches, cracks orother defects. Provide all anchors, bolts, shims and accessory items asrequired for building into or fastening to adjacent work. Unless otherwisespecified, use only galvanized fenous metals.

Steel: Provide miscellaneous steel plates, shapes, profi les, bars andconnections conforming to the requirements of ASTM Aapproved manner or else galvanized by the hot

36, duly painted in

fabrication in accordance with the requirements of ASTIVI A'123.dip method aftf l, ' .1-.i:..

(tfi1)il#

5.2

05500-1

5.3

5.4

Steel Pipe: Provide steel pipe for miscellaneous members and connections thatconforms to the requirements of ASTIVI A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40or 80 as shown on dfawings, galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

Anchor Bolts And Fasteners: Use Type 3'16 stainless steel wedge anchors, asmanufactured by Phil l ips Dril l Company or equal for securing equipment andassemblies. Use adhesive anchors consisting of self contained vinylester adhesivecartridges and Type 304 stainless steel anchof rods equal to HVA adhesiveanchoring system, as manufactured by Hilti, or equal, of the size and at thelocations shown on the Drawings. Provide all oihef fastenings, bolts, nuts, washersand anchofs as shown in the Drawings. Zinc coated fastenings will not beapproved except at wood nailers, or when othertypes of corrosion resistant materialsare not available. Use fasteners of adequate strength for purpose intended.When steel anchors are indicated, use a one-piece design with expander ringconsisting of steel zinc-coated and chrome plated, as manufactured byMcCullough Industries, lnc., Kwick Bolt, or equal.

Welding Electrodes: Provide welding electrodes for structural steelconforming to AWS A5.5, E70XX. Use 4043 filler metal for aluminum. Use E308electrode where the base metal is Type 304 stainless steel and Type E 309 where thebase metal is Type 316 stainless steel or where stainless steel is welded to carbon$eel.

Steel Pipe Guards: Provide galvanized steel pipe guards as detailed on theDrawings, including pipe sleeves, concrete fill, crushed fill and grouting to secureparts. Use schedule 40 steel pipe conforming to ASTIVI A 53.

FABRICATION

Insofaf as possible, f it and shop assemble fabricated matedal ready forerection. Provide welding equipment and perform welding in compliance withAmerican Welding Society's Code tor Welding in Building Construction, latestedition. Construct all work to be square, plumb and true, accurate-! wth

6 .1

tight joints and intefsections. Finish exposed work smoothsmooth.

und

6.2 Painting and Protective Coating:

Except for galvanized surfaces, properly clean all fe andcoat surfaces with one shop coat oi primer compatible with coatingsystem specified in Section 09900, Painting. Coat anchors that are builtinto masonry with asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized. Do notcoat metal wo* to be encased in concrete unless specified or notedotherwise. Clean castings that are to be left unpainted and coat with acoa!-tar-pitch varnish.

Provide products fabricated from rolled, pressed or forged steel shapes,plates, bars and strips with hot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings incompliance with ASTM A 123. Provide assembled steel products withhot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings in compliance with ASTIVI A 386.

Provide shop coaiing of galvanized or zinc coated surfaces only where

1 .

3.

2.

specifically specifiedsuch sufaces Priorpaint.

oforto

shown on the Drawings . Chemica l l y t reapplying the coating to provide a bond for

o':;.rit?

,/&1.---<t \ll:l/ \+t1 \

rYq\--./"-9

05500-2

ERECTION

Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis, separate thecontact surfaces of the metals using not less than one coat of zinc chromateprimer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint on eachsudacei or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, use not less than onecourse of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashingcement. Clean finished works and remove excess cement.

Adequately anchor all work in place at proper elevations, planes andlocations. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary forsecuring miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction includingthreaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolis, lag bolts, holdfasts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

Cutting, Fitt ing and Placement:

1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneousmetal fabrications.

Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, and make plumb,level. true. and ffee from rack, measured from established lines and levels.

Provide temporary anchors in form work for items which are to be built intoconcrete or similar construction.

Fit exposed connections accurately togetherto form tight hairline joints.

Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot beshop welded because of shipping size l imitations.

Grind exposed joints smooth, and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld,cut, or abfade the surface of exteriof units which have been hot-dlpgalvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed fieldconnecttons.

7 .1

7 .2

2.

3.

4 .

5.

6 .

7.4 Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shieldedmetal-arc welding, appearance and quality of weld made, and methods incorrecting welding work.

7.5 Touch-Up Painting: lmmediately after erection, clean field welds, boltedconnections, and abraded area of shop paint and paint exposed areas withsame material as used tor shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provideminimum dry fi lm thickness of 2.0 mils.

,/;,fti l i- d l

I

M

05s00-3

1 ,

sEcTloN 05500

STEEL WORKS, STEEL GATE, WINDOWS AND GRILLS

SCOPE OF WORK

The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consist of furnishing,transporting and storing all plant, equipment, appliances labour and materialin performing all operations in connection with the fabrication, welding,erecting and painting of steel units complete in strict accordance with thedrawings and/ or as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

All materials shall be new of the best standard commercial quality and shallbe approved by the Engineer.

CAST IRON

Cast iron should be of good gtey metal, sound. free from all flaws such aspitt ing due to impurit ies or sand from the pattern, cold shuts (i.e., irregularit iesdue to casting at too a low temperature, blow-holes etc. lt should have a cleansmooth surface, true to pattern.

WROUGHT IRON

Wrought iron should be of good tough metal with an even silky fibrous grainwhich wil l be apparent if twisted and bent. A good iron must be neither ccldshort (i.e., britt le when cold due to production from an inferior core) nor hotshort (i.e., a tendency to cracking at the surface edges when working at red

o

hot due to the Presence of sulfur).

5" DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall prepare all necessary shop and erection drawlngscovering the steel to be lurnished under these Specifications. No fabricationand erection shall be taken in hand unti l these drawing have been approvedby the Engineer.

All work under this Section shall dri l l , tap, cut and fit the work included hereinas required, to accommodate work of other trades in conjunction with it.

The Contractor shall furnish all information and instructionsby other trades. Samples of material specified shall be subwhen required by the Engineer.

FABRICATION

All works shall be equalfabrication of structuralspecifications or drawings

to the best modern practice in thesteel notwithstanding any omissio

All fabrications shall conform to BS-449

Betore being laid out or worked in any way, the steel shall be straight and freefrom kinks and bends. lf straightening is necessary it shall be done by methodsthat witl not injure the metal. Shearing and cutting by torch or eleclric shallperformed careful. and all portions of the work which will be exposed to viewcompletion shall be finished neatly.

0s600-1

All holes shall be cylindrical, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,perpendicular to the member and clean cut without buried or ragged edges.Holes in the material shall be drilled to full size and shall be accurately andcarefully placed. The length of bolts shall be in 1l4 of an inch variation, and whenin the steel gate, the bolts shall extend attests 1/4 of an inch beyond the nuts.

WELDING

Welding shall be done by qualified and licensed welders under the supervision ofexpert Fabrication Engineer. All the welding shall be executed according to BS-538.All defective and damaged works shall be rejected at the sole risk and cost of theContractor.

Where welding is required in the works as per drawings of as required by theEngineer, the welding shall develop the full strength ofthe adjoining steel.

ERECTION

The method of erection and propping the frames and windows, shall beaccording to the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shallinspect and approve all the equipment temporary works and other remasesproposed to be adopted for the erection and safety of the steel sections. TheConlractor shall be responsible for the safety of damage to any person or to anypart of the building while the work is in progress.

All steel sections shall be accurately assembled and erected as shown on theDrawings, on the scheduled dates in complete harmony and coordination withthe progress of other construction works in the building. All of the material shallbe handled carefully so that no part will be bent, broken or damaged otherwise.Hammering that will injure or distort the members will not be permitted

Prior to erection of the steel, all shoe plates, down holding bolts etc.,., shall befixed/grouted dead aocurate in levels and alignment as per details shown on thedrawings or as directed by the Engineer.

STEEL GRILL/RAILING

Grill and railings shall be of design and type shown in the drawings of of thepattern approved by the Engineer., MS. Flats of approved size shall be welded tosteel fame of similar section which shall be fixed /screwed to winframes. Grills and railings shall be installed on the inner or outer meas indicated and shall be painted with two coats of pimer of

8.

approved quality enamel paint.

10. G.I. ROLLING SHUTTERS

Rolling shutters shall be mounted on the face of the wall, oshall conform to the design and size shown on the drawings.

The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings for approval to the Engineerbefore starting the fabrication of Rolling Shutters. The shutters shall bemanufactured from 20 guage G.l. Sheets having track channels of 2" wide onboth sides. The top covering case shall be fabricated from 24 guage G.l. sheets.Best quality imported springs shall be used fof rolling the shutter. Adequatenumber of holdfasts 10" long shall be provided by making holes in the RCt

05600-2

11 .

'12.

"oturnJna beams for the installation of rolling good, including installing and

fixing of rolling shutters is inclusive of the cost of shutters.

Spray painting with approved shade of enamel paint shall be done over a coat ofred oxide primer before installing the rolling shutter and a final coat shall be doneafter installation as per directions and satisfaction of the Engineer.

MANHOLE COVERS

Cast iron Manhole Covers of approved quality and pattern will be used.

STEEL LADDERS

The Steel Ladder shall consist of mild steel f lats in strings and 25mm dia. mildsteel bars in rungs. The mild steel rungs shall be riveted and welded in 25mmdia. holes in the flats. The ends of each climb of the ladder shall be embedded inthe concrete.

All components of the steel ladder shall be first painted with two coats ofapproved red oxide primer and then with three coats of black enamel paint. Thesteel ladder shall be fabricated and installed as per drawings and as directed bythe Engineer.

LOCKERS

Steel Lockers shall be manufactured form l\ils sheet of 14 gauge and shallconform to BS Specifications 15 and 449. All the welding work in the locker shallconform to as specified there-in-before. The locker shall be fitted with best qualityPak-made locks and be finished duly painted with approved quelily enamel paintas described here-in-before except that painting shall be carried out by spraying.

ALUMINIUM RAIL ING

Aluminum Railing for fixing in staircase or Balcony shall be manufaatured of 1-'1\4" x 1-1\4" hollow square aluminum section having a 3/4" dia. MS bars insertedwithin. These will be embedded 3" in the steps at distances a indicated in theDrawings. 1-1\4" x 1-1\4' MS Flat section shall be welded at the top having holesdrilled at '1'-6" center to center to screw for attaching the wooden handrail ofspecified hard wood. Wooden hand-rail shall be polished/painted as perdirections of the Engineer.

STEEL GATE

Steel Gate shall be manufactured ol the type and design ol steel grllls described

Kitchen hood shall be manufactured with laminated chip board (20mm thick)26 gauge galvanized iron sheet as lining. The related shop drawings of kitchenhood shall be submitted by the Contractor, before starting the work for theapproval of Engineer.

At the bottom opening of the hood 25mm size angle iron shall be fixed along tentrance pedmeter. The exit opening of hood shall pass through walls or ceas difected by the Engineer and the height of exit above roof shall be 600

13 .

14 .

15"

16.

),,

r: l.].:- ;

05600-3

17.

The cost of cutting holes through walls or ceiling and making good he same shallbe inclusive of the cost of kitchen hood. A canopy shall be installed over the exitof hood to protect the kitchen from rain water.

The entire body of the hood shall be hanged by angle iron frame and holdfastsfitted with the walls and ceiling.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or herein, all the workand costs involved within the scope of this Section of Specifications shall bedeemed to be in collusive of but not limited to the followingsl

i. Contractor's establishment charges, overhead charges, profit, interest.

ii. All other expenses, charges, taxes specified in the Conditions of Contract.

iii. Labour and all costs in connectlon therewith.

Use of plant, equipment and machinefy and all costs in connectiontherewith e.9., mobil ization, transporting, fuel, energy, grease, oil,install ing, operation, storing, watching, retiring, replacing, handling,maintaining, idle stand, parking, removing damaged, destroyed andsalvaged items.

Material and goods, e.g. marketing, selecting, conveyance, loading,unloading, storing, watching, returning, handling, hoisting, Iowering,cutting, bending, placing, binding wires, supplying splice, reinforcing steel,jointing, fixing, wastage, removing destroyed, damaged salvagedmaterial.

vi. Cost of all laboratory and field tests and collection of samples stipulatedin these sDecifications.

The measurement for payment of steel items shall be by weight in TONNES orotherwise stated, of miscellaneous metal works acceptably pfovided, fabricated,painted and installed.

The payment of Kitchen Hood acceptably provided, fabricated and installed shallbe made as per bottom area of hood above bufners.

The measurement of payment of aluminum raiiing with one of two wooden hand-rails shall be by actual area measured in square meter, acceptabl\i provided,fabricated and installed.

a05600-4

sEcTtoN.06100

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

SCOPE

'I,1 GENEMLThe work covered under this sectaon of Specifications consists of providing allmaterial, labouf, plant, equipment, appliances and performing all operations inany floor and at any height connected with the fabrication and erection of allwoodwork, mill work, construction assembly, surface finish treatment andbuilding in of all cabinet type items, supports etc. of wood or metal andincidentals, associated woodwork appurtenances, procuflng and applyingpreservatives, installation of "Finish Hard Ware" in connection with finishwoodwork as per details shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer

All wood work required to be furnished and installed in connection with finishtreatment of exposed interior surfaces or spaces, that is cut, fifted, built-in andfinished and building structure is hereby classified as "MillWork".

All finished mill work that is constructed. assembled and provided with surfacefinish treatments in a shop outside building structure is hereby classified as'CABINET WORK" Refefence to surface Finish Treatment includes the fllling,staining, shellacking or waxing of all cabinet type wood work, unless noted tocontrary.

,1,2 GENERAL APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTSIn connection with general requirements of the General Conditions of theContract, contractor's specific attention is directed to the paragraph on [/'iaterialsand woft manship, Construction procedures, Protective Measures, TemporaryConstruction. Utilities and furnish and/ or perform all work and / or gervicesrequired therein, and in particular in relation to "Protective measures" involvingtemporary railings, field office, stairways, toilet enclosures, ladders and the like instrict accordance with first class building construction practice and all applicablelocal building, fire and sanitary code requirements. In all instances compliancewith aforesaid requifements shall be subject to Consultant's satisfaction andapproval. Where external cornersunder wood protection.

MATERIALS

occur provide heavy tape over exposed edges

Timber and Lumber wood

a

2.1:)

All lumber and wood for rough carpentry shall, unless showiibfr drawingsof approved otherwise be new lumber, S4S, well-seasoned, air dried firstquality native partal or deodar, or any othef specie conforming torequirements thereof or equivalent kind and quality. Wood for blocking,grounds, nailing strips, and/or other woodwork incident to carpentfy andjoinery and/or for use of other trades unless specified otherwise, shall besecond quality partal or deodar, perfect sound and free from lose knots,clusterc or surface knots that would interfere with or preclude the soundattachment thereof and/or sacrament to the work.

Unless specified therwise, general lumber grading requirementsconform to British Standards 1186 Part-'1 and/or similar local lu

06100-1

approved by the Engineer.

2.1.6 Nails and Screws

All nails and screws shall oomply with requirements ofNO. 1202 and BS NO. 1210 respectively.

2.2 Ply Wood

The ply wood shall comply in all respects with BSI No. 1455:1963 A11 the

quality requifements. The moisture content of lumber shall be more than1oo/o.

2.1.I Hard Wood:

Hafd wood shall comprlse of Oak, beech, Walnut Mahogany,Teak, lroko and Sheesham.

2.'1.2 Soft Wood:

All soft wood shall consist of pines, spruce, hemlock and douglasfir or cedrous deodar (referfed in the document as deoder), woodlocally known as'Partal 'to be used in shutter core wherespecified.

2.1.3 GeneralCharacteristics:

All the timber shall be in accordance with the requirements ofBSI No: 1186, 'Quality ofTimberand Workmanship in Joinery'.

The whole of the timber shall be from the heart of sound and fullygrown tree, uniform in substance, straight in fibfe, first classqualiiy properly seasoned, ffee from large or loose dead-knots,open shakes and excessive sapwood. The scantlings of alltimbers shall be bright, sound and square edged. The moasturecontent of timber shall not be more than 10 (ten) percent in caseof soft wood and 7 (seven) percent in case of hard wood

,1 4 Preservation ofWood:

Prior to installation of all finish wood works in their respectivepositions. Preservatives shall be applied to safeguafd the woodwork against fungus tefmite and bores.

The preservatives shall be of the best available quallty asapproved by the Engineer. The method of application shall bestrictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Thetreatment and application of all the preservatives shall complywith the requifements of BS-CP 98:1964.

2.1.5 Adhesive:

The adhesives shall confofm to the requirements of BSI No.745 "Animal Glues for Wood" manutactured by M/s Hoest shallbe considered approved for thjs Project or as directed and

ply wood shall only be obtained from KDC Board (Pvt.) Limited, Jhelum oraa approved by the Engineef. All plywood shall be manufactured -q$6

'{t- r)) . 9

.4')

06100-2

phenol formaldihide or any other approved water proof adhesive but notwith urea formaldihide.

Ply wood used for doors, and other similar works shall be to the thicknessand size as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Thegrade shall be first quality and the face and back shall be free from endjoints, dead knots, overlaps, patches and other similar defects. Thesurfaces shall be free, smooth for painting or polishing.

The veneer shall be of the required thickness and quality including baseveneer and shall be impregnated with an approved adhesive and machinecomDressed. Such machine pressed veneered wood shall be fixed on allsides of the inner core wood (soft wood or approved quality) after it hasbeen treated with water resistant not setting glue.

Medjum Density Fibre (lilDF) Board

Medium density fibre board to be used on the project shall be LASANImanufactured by Al-Noor MDF Board Industries of thicknesses asspecified in the drawings. Boafd shall be manufactured with water proofresinous glues and shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer. All boardsreouired for the exterior surfaces of cabinets shall be laminated withformica in approved colour and texture in factory as specified elsewhere.

Veneer Laminated Particle board (Laminated Vin board)2.4

4.

SAMPLES

All samples of the material used for the work under this Section of Specificationshall be approved by the Engineer and same type of matedal shall be usedthroughout the work. lf the Engineer desires to get the material tested, this willbe got done by the Contractor at his own cost from a laboratory approved by theEngineer.

FABRICATION

'Unwrought' timber shall be used. Sawing shall be done with sufficient oversizemargin to finally meet the requirements of specified sizes and dimensions of thefinished work.

All framing shall be joined and glued pfoperly as shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer. All joints shall be secured with sufficient number ofnails. The Contractor shall perform all necessary mortising, tanning, grooving,matching, tangoing, housing, rebating and all operations required for the correctjointing. The Contractor shall also provide all metal plates, screws, nails andother fixing material that may be ordered by the Engineer for the properexecution of the joinery work. Fabrication that develop defects due to badworkmanship or unsound materials not conforming to these specifications andthe directions of the Engineer, shall be cut out and replaced at Coexpense before the expiry ofthe maintenance period.

5. PROTECTION OF MATERIALS

All materials andsucn a way as to

assembled units shall be orotected ffom weather anprevent decay, warping and attack by fungus and term

a

K): i /

06100-l

o GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP ETC.

cuttina. patchinq & Fittinq;

Perform all cutting and fitting of work of other trades as required to securewofk herein specified, including that for any plumbing, air conditioningand electrical work, and do all required patching after other trades.

Grounds and Blockinq:

All wood grounds, blocking centers, nailing strips, cants, all wood gdds forframing etc., provided as required to secure carpentry and of sizesrequtred.

Grounds sized and dressed to proper dimensions. Where not otherwiseindicated, shall be 314" x2" jn size, set to l ine, square at angles, blockedout as necessary and securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 16".Grounds against concrete shall be secured in place with expansion bolts.Gfounds that are not satisfactory shall be taken down and approvedgrounds reset at contractor's expense. Grounds provided behind all woodtrim in every instance-

Nailers and cants pfovided at walls for nailing base flashing. Nailers 2"thick and secured with steel strap anchors as shown. Nailers for baseflashing given a heavy coat of creosote wood preservative and / or ofother approved types of bitumastic paint on all surfaces and ends beforesetting in place. Any surfaces of wood cut after treatment shall besimilarly thoroughly coated.

Rouoh Hardware:

a

b.

6.1

All nails, bolts, screws and any other rough builders' hardware, orsacrament devices required to securely fasten all wofk in place shall befurnished and installed for any work herein.

MILL AND CABINET WORK

Soecie of Wood:

Shall be Deodar for all items of finished wood and cabinet workto have paint f inish.

req

Qualitv and Workmanshio:

All wood for interior f inished mill andcured and if possible kiln dried stock,

cabinet work shall be thoroughlsatisfactory to Engineef.

All material specified herein shall be product of one mill insofar aspracticable. Contractor shall submit for approval the name of Sub-contractor for mill and cabinet work called for on scale drawings. Only firstclass cabinet type workmanship will be admissible in execution of thiswork, performed by artisans skilled in this trade, so as to provide cabinetwork of the highest grade, quality, finish and installation as specified andrequired.

Care shall be exercised by careful screening to avoidcolour and graining of f inished wood for all wood

06100-4

skong conlrasts

ht*i*"\d'r:

C surfaces of tr

a

Paneling, wall facing etc., so that any one room or wall surface willpresent a reasonably uniform appearance. All cutting, framing and fittingshall be done as required for accommodation ofwork of othertrades.

Use of wood chips, shims or other shrinkable material for leveling orplumbing wil l not be permitted in any form.

lvlortise and tenon joints set in any approved type of water and moistureproof glue with wedges and/or pinned. Shop melters 4" or more to beglued and doweled and / or locked with a metal ring. lvlelters less than 4"shall have concealed spleens.

lnsofar as practicable, all millwork, paneling etc., assembled in shop,back painted and finished throughout before delivery to building.

Edge banding shall in no instance be less than 3/16" thick. All veneeredwork put together with phenolic resin glue by hot plate process andfinished veneered wood facing provided with some form of protectivefinish to be incorporated in the final finish prior to delivery to job, if notfinished in shoD.

ln addition to machine sanding, all interior trim, paneling and wood workshall be smoothed by hand, using "00" sand paper to give all wood workthe required smooth surface for exposed finished treatment and free frommachine and tool marks, abrasion, raised grains and other undesirabledefects. All wood work shall be fitted to plaster or other finished work in acareful manner so as not to iniufe these surfaces in any way. Whereplaster or other work is damaged or disturbed it shall be reiorted to atsoriginal state and/ or made good without cost to the Employer at theContractor's expanses.

6.3. Centerinq, Blockina etc.:

Centering, blocking, grounds and furing, furnished and installed for allabove items ofwood work as specified hereinafter.

6.4. Solid Wood Stock & Veneer etc..

a. Wood Stock:

Select quality, kiln air dried to within 5% ofstraight and tue, {ree trom defects that would iof finished wood, selected fof colour and grainiselected veneers.

b. Veneers:

Flat sliced with minimum heart pattern to match approved samplesand cut to eliminate all defects and any imperfection that wouldprovide an objectionable appearance in Engineer's opinion and tomaintain a uniform grain and /or figure throughout, and cut fromsame flinch ot any indlvidual cabinet item surface or door facing..Door surface facings in single lengths, in no intense applied orjointed horizontally.

'1:r!+]

o perfectly matched, and edges of doors and similar members facedto match finish in spaces whefe edges will show when open

WOODEN DOORS

6.1 Materials

6.1.'1 First class Deodar wood as approved by the Engineer shall beused for door frames and door shutterc except the core oishutters which shall be partal wood or as specified and shown ondrawngs.

6.1.2 Architraves, beads, lippings shall be of Deodar wood oispecified sizes and fixed as per details shown on Drawings.

6.2 Ground, Blocking & Nail ing Strips

cround, blocking and nailing strips shall be provided as necessary toreceive the work included herein and as required for the work of othertrades.

Except as otherwise shown or specified, ground blocking and nailingstrips shall be secured in place as follows:

6.2.1 To steel-- by means of 3/8" diameter bolts spaced not over 3 feet.

6.2.2 To brick wall --- by the use of cut nails spaced not more than 1.5feet apart and ddven difectly into the block.

6.2.3 To poured concrete ---- by means of 1l4" diameter galvanizedexpansion bolts spaced not more than 1.5 feet part or by anyaooroved method.

Exterior and InteriorWooden Door Frames

All exterior and interior wooden door frames shall be fabricated ofwooden sections of firct class deodar wood ffame as shown ondrawngs.

All exposed surfaces of frames and architraves/beads shall be paintedwith synthetic matt finished enamel paint of approved shade as per theinstruciions of the Engineer.

The door frames shall be secured in place by means of 4 inches screwsand rnatching Rawal plugs and built into the plastered masonry after thesame has dried. 4 numbef screws in each jamb and 2 number for upto3.5 feet width and 3 number for upto 5 feet width of doorc in theshall be used.

Door Shutters/Panels

The shutters/Panels will be fixed to the frames with approvedfittings as per hardware schedule.

ffi,){ le-\ ,/*,

fu>'r*#6.4

06100-6

to

o

6.4.1 All doors, shuttefypanels shall be fabricated in a workman likemanner strictly to the correct sizes and shapes as shown 0n theDrawings or as directed by the Engineer.

6.4.2 fhe door shutters/panels shall be built in sections, pfopedyjointed and glued together. The surfaces shall be prepared forpainting or polishing.

6.4.3 Paneled DoorsAII door shutters/panels shall be paneled, fabricated from firstclass wood as shown on drawings.

Flush Solid Cote ShuttersThe door shutterc shall be 1-112" thick flush type withcommercial ply, factory finished and approved by the Engineer'The thickness of ply shall be at least 1/8". The shutter framesshall be made with best quality Deodaf wood. The lock rail shallbe 6" and hinge style along with top and bottom rails shall be 4"wide. Inside this frame 1-' l12 wide Deodar wood stripsfofming 4'squares shall be used.

The shutter frames before pressing the ply wood may becheoked by the Engineer at the factory or Contractor'sworkshop. The Contractor is obliged to inform the Engineer forchecking the same before pressing.

All flush doors so manufactured shall be allowed to season toremove excess moisture from glue before cross banding andany face veneerc are applied.

cross banding on flush doors shall be 1/16" thick and be plateddried before applying to cores to remove excess moisture. Aftercross bandings have been applied to cores and before applyingface veneers, they shall be sanded to ensure a smooth surfacebefore applying face veneers.

Veneers for flush doors shall be sliced and in no case not lessthan ' l l28" thick after sanding.

Finishing of shutters shall be done after pressing the ply wood,and fixing Deodar wood strips of 1-112" x 112" cross section attop and bottom of the shutters. Finishing procedure shall be asspeaified in the relevant section of these Specifications underheading "Painting'.

Doors shall be provided with Brass fittings of specified pattern.Each door shall have 3 butt hinges 5" long. Tower bolts anddoors stoppers shall be provided as shown in the drawingor as required by the Engineer.

6.4.4 Each door shall be constructed so as to petmit theof hinges, knobs and locks in the position shownDrawings)

a

I

6.4 5 Completed doors shall be sound. rigid and free from defects and-warp. All edges snatt oe aligneo ";;J ttooirt, lointt sharrr,{g>'{ \crose fittins, ,Tffi"-; dowered or mortjsed rramed "".fl{lt/r}

1'l\

O strength to maintain frame and of strength to maintain thestructural properties of the member connected. All adjoiningfaces and edges shall be flush and smooth. Edges shall berectangular End solid.

6.4.6 All exposed surfaces ol wooden frames and wooden shuttersshall be painted with synthetic matt finished enamel paint ofapproved shade as per the instructions ofthe Engineer.

6.4.7 Chamferc shall be made as shown on the drawings or as.lira.ra,.l hw th6 trh^ih66r

Fitting, Hanging and trimming

All the doors shall be fitted, hung and trimmed as hereinafter specifiedand as indicated on the Drawings.

Doors shall have a clearance of 1/8" at sides and top unless otherwisedirected by the Engineer and shall have 3/16" clearance at bottom. Dootsshall be hung and trimmed with hardware as specified. All the locks shallbe installed at the same height and shall be located at height as directedby the Engineer. Where directed by the Engineer margin for carpet shallbe incorporated in the door shutter.

Hardware

Hardware shall be of best quality local or imported make extra heavy dutyas specified on drawings and first class finished material except doorlocks and door closures which shall be imported as per the approval ofthe Engineer or as shown on drawings in hardware schedule. TheContractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineer for quality,shape, pattern, and brand of all the hardware materials by providingsamples and catalogues, etc., and shall provlde and fix only the approvedhardware materials.

Hardware shall be carefully and securely fitted. Upon handing over thework, hardware shall be demonstrated to operate freely. Keys shall beplaced into respective locks and upon acceptance of the work keys shallbe tagged and delivered to the Engineer.

Fly Proofing

All external doors and windows will have fly-proof shuttels 1-112" thick inDeodar wood. They will be provided with brass fittings.

The extemal fly-proof doors will also be provided with a strong goodquality spring for automatic closing. The gauze used for fly-proofing shallbe of aluminum of 256 mesh per square inch of approved make.

6.8 Ouality Assurance

6.8.1 Tolerances: Doors shall be fabricated to following lolerances

Size: Plus or minus 1/16 in overall -dimensions Maximum Warp: 1/8"Squareness: Maximum diagonal difference 1/8"(between length of diagonal measured on face of doo

6.6

i:--:-';06100-8

from upper right cornerdiagonal measured from

corner and length ofcorner to lower right

to r leftupper left

O

corner).

6.7.2 Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer of doors hereinspecified shall have been in business of manuJacturing doors oftype specified for mjnimum period of five years.

6.8 Submittal

6.8. 1 Provide manufacturer's literature completely describing products.

6.8.2 Provide shop dfawings showing door types, details and locations,referred to the door type and hardwafe group shown on door andhardware schedules.

6.8.3 Provide certificate stating that doors were constructed with timberof the species specified (having moisture content and meetingequilibrium and relative humidity requifements.

6.8,4 Submit samples of plywood for selection of colour and grain

6.8.5 Procurement of materials shall be made only after the shopdrawings and samples have been approved by the Engineer.

6.9 Product Delivery, storage and Handling

6.9.1 Deliver and store products in waterproof, protective contajners withseals unbroken and labels intact until time to use-

6.9.2 Keep products dry, stack products otf ground on level plaiforms,fully protected from weather, including direct sunlight.

6.9.3 ldentify type, size and location of each door before delivery in orderto permit installation at correct location.

6.'10 lnstallation

6.10.1 Install doors at correct openings and assure smooth swing andprooef closer with frames.

6.'10.2 Install finish hardwafe in accordance with manufacturer directions.

7, WOODEN RAILING

Material for wooden hand railing in stairs shall be superior quality teak woodldeodar wood &11l2 inch dia. mild steel piDes. lt shall be fabricated and installedin accordance with the design shown on the drawings/details and as per thejnstructions of the Engineer. Sample of railing shall be fabricated & mock upsamples installed at locations designated by the Engineer for approval, prior tostarting work at site. Shop/detail drawing indicating the basic details at vadouslocations including details at turnings shall be submitted by the Contractor forEngineeis approval. Hand rail ing shall be lnstalled to l ine level and plumb. Thesurface of railing in stairs shall be prepared for polishing. The railing shall bepolished/painted with clear lacquer and the steel surfaces shall be painted withmatt f inished enamel paint.

06100-9

a 8. WARDROBES/CUPBOARDS

Wardrobes shall be made in places specified for them on the plan. Other thanblock masonry all the work shall be included in the item of wardrobe. lt willcontain one RCC slab of thick- ness 3" both sides plastered or fair faced fixedabove for making a cabinet for heavier articles like boxes etc. Below that a 'l:

brass pipe shall be fixed for hanging the clothes. In the bottom of wardrobe twoplanks of chipboard 3/4" thick clad with commercial ply both sides shall be fixedat an interval of 1 ft from the bottom. The shutters shall also be of 3/4" thickchipboard cladded with commercial ply having a 1" wide f(ame of best qualitydeodar wood all around the shuttef. These shutters shall be fixed in Deodarwood frame ol 2" x 1-112" cross section fixed on the face of wardrobe. Theinternal surface of the wardrobe shall be plastered and painted with enamel paintof approved make and shade on all wooden and concrete surface. All brasshardware of approved quality viz. handle, locks and hinges etc., shall be used.For payment of wardrobes, the front shutter area shall be measure and paid rnsquare meter.

HOLLOW METAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES

Door frames shall be 14 guage mild steel sheet io exact profiles with prime coat.Except as otherwise indicated, corners of frames shall be welded together androunqeo.

Door frames shall be provided with steel sheet reinforcement for all hardwareincluding door checks and closures. Reinforcement plates shall be at least asthick as diameter of screws used for securing hardware.

Frames shall rest on concfete slabs floor have temporary bottom spreader barsand be secured with concealed clip, angles and wall anchors.

Frame Anchors:

Door frames shall have not less than three (3) Tee wall anchors and one (1) clip-angle type floor anchor perjamb as per manufacture's recommendations.

Wall anchors shall be adjustable welded tee or strap anchors of I inches lengthfor masonry constructions.

Wall anchors at construction other than masonry as indicated shall be of specialdesign for anchoring to column and RCC walls as per the instructjons ofArchitector Engineer.

DEFECTIVE WORK

In the event of non-conformance to specification and dfawings, the wood worksshall be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove and replthe rejected work by new work of same specifications.

MOCK-UP SAMPLE

o

10.

i-'.1lt;!'i:(

11 .

After approval of shop drawings and tests etc., the contract shall submit at

The samples shall be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the worksafter installation of at least 80o/o of the works.

12. SURFACEPREPARATION

The surfaces of all wood works shall be prepared in the manner as directed bythe Engineer for polishing or painting.

1. Prior lo application of any finish treatment all wood surfaces shall bethoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, dirt, oil , grease, cement plasterslains, finger marks and the like. Should badly disfigured or damagedsurfaces be encountered, that are unsuitable to receive finish treatments,attention shall be called to Engineer before proceeding and await hisconclusron.

2. All exposed surfaces of any wood work, shall be entirely smooth andunblemished when erected.

3 .

4.

Sand paper thoroughly using a fine gfade of sand paper and then sand asecond time, moistening sand paper with best quality refined linseed oil.

Where crevices, deep open wood pores and any other defective surfaces arepresent, that are " re-feasible", they shall be filled with approved " Stopping

PRIME PAINTING AND OR FINISHINGContractor shall have option of finishing any portions of this work either on siteand/ or in a shop. All priming and back painting shall be completed by theContractors. All mill work primed and painted done coat of lead and oil paint,sanding and shellacking all knots, as specified fof wood finish (Painting) and leftin an approved condiuon to receive required llnish treatments as specilied, byPainting Contractor.

REFITTING AND CHECKINGlmmediately before building is occupied, the Contractor shall examine all doorsand other movable parts of all case and cabinet works, to see that all are inperlect operating condition. All edges ol doors, including the bottom edges ofdoors before and after refitting, shall be sealed with approved water resistantmaterials.

PROTECTION OF FINISHED PRODUCTS. INTERIOR WOOD WORK ETC.It shall be the responsibility of the contractor and he shall be held accountable forthe explicit protection of all finished cabinet work, interior trim and decorativetreatment until. Final Inspection and acceptance. Englneer and/or Employerreserve the right to order replacement at no additional cost to contract sum, fofany and all work so injured, and/or damaged a to be unsightly after repairing and/ or refinishing. Authorizaiion to repair and / or refinish shall not constitute waiverof Employer's right to require replacement of any item of work if unsatisfactory tohim after such repairing and / or refinishing.MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT

General

Except otheMise specified herein or elsewhere in the CoDocuments, no measurement and payment wil l be made for

13 .

14.

15 .

./";f -:!,i1

;( lri..|"",-.-,

14.

06100-11

under mentioned specified works related to the relevant items of theBill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have beenincluded in the quoted unit rate of the respective/items of the Bills ofQuantities.

The rates quoted by the Contraclor in the Bill of Quantities shallinclude work to be executed under these specification in any floorand at any height except where otheMise specifically stated in therelevant item of Bill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not beentitled to any claim or claim any compensation on this account.

13.1.1 Glazing (all types) where required and all f inished hafdwarefittings in carpentry and joinery works, including lockingarrangement (L-drop/sliding bolt), kick and push plate.architrave, beading, making groves, handles, lockingarrangemenis etc.

'13.1.2 Prime coat, painting with synthetic enamel paint/lacquerpolish in carpentfy and joinery works/hand railing.

13.'1.3 Antitermite treatment to wood works and adhesives.

'13.1.4 Steel balusters, steel base and steel strips for wooden railingand steel reinforcing member in paneled doors.

13.'1.5 Mild steel door frames, anti-rust paint and all additionalstrengthening measures including Concrete Class 'D' filling.

13.2 Wooden Door'13.2.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of all types ofwooden doors will be made on the basis of net actual area insquare feet fabricated and installed in position as shown onthe Drawings or as directed by the Engineer Net area \.ivill bemeasufed in accordance with plastered masonry openingbetween jambs and plastered head and bottom of shutter.

13.2.2 Paymenl

13 .3

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of alltypes of wooden doors on the basis of unit rate per squarefeet quoted in the Bill of Quantiiies against respective itemand shall constitute full compensation for all the worksincluding all hardware & fittings as per details mentioned inVolume lll of Tender (Contract Document related to the item.

Door Locks

'13.3.1 Measurement

Measufement of acceptably completed work of door locks willbe made on the basis of actual number of door locks providedand installed in Dosition as shown on the Drawings or asdifected by the Engineer r{':-i}r

i ; ' r l \ ' t 'E{ t;. s \ t i:i\-;J

' ..:ilt rJ'

06100-12

,iy'-oi\w

o '13.3.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofdoor locks on the basis of unit rate per number (each) quotedin the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall constitute fullcompensatjon for allthe works related to the item.

o06100-1_l

a sEcTtoN _ 07.t00

WATER PROOFING/EXPANSION JOINT FILLING

t . scoPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations inany floor and at any height in connection with installation of insulation, water-proofing & built-up roofing, including water proof treatment to foundations andbasement structures complete in strict accordance with this section of thespecifications and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms andconditions of the contract

SUBMITTAL

2.1 Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted showing layout and allthe details for construction.

2.2 Samples of all materials proposed for use under this section, shall besubmitted to the Engineer for approval.

3. MATERIALS

3.'1 Bitumen shall be 80/100 grade and Special Industrial Bitumen (SlB)HYCARB A-10 of National Petrocarbon Ltd.

3.2 Polyethylene building film visqueen standard or approved equal. The filmshall be 0.006" thick (6 mil)

3.3 Cement and aggregates shall be in accordance with specifications for "Plainand reinforced concrete".

3.4 Not Used

3.5 B.jck tiles shall conform to specifications ior "Brick lvlasonry" and concretechequered tiles shall conform to relevant specifications provided in Section-6600.

3.6 Sealant to be used in expansion joints and flashings shall be 2 partpolysulphide or approved equjvalent.

3.7 PVC Geo-membrane as pef ASTI\,,1 standafds or approved equal. Thethickness of membrane shall be 0.25 mm minimum or as shown ondrawtngs.

3.8 Mud Plaster shall be composed of stitf clay.

3.S Puddled earth shall be composed oI stiff clay to which an equal amouchooped rice husk/bhoosa shall be added.

DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

Materials shall be protected from damage during loading shipment delivery a

5.1

EXECUTION

PREPARATORY WORK

5.'1.1 All scuppers and roof drains shall be placed and metal f lashingflanges etc. shall be provided in time to be installed along withthe roofing assembly.

5.1.2 All surfaces, to be treated shall be dust free and dry. Applicationof roof finishes shall not start unless the preparatory work hasbeen inspected and approved by the Engineer.

APPLlCATION

5.2.'1 Roofing shall not be applied during rain or while surfaces aredamp, it shall be applied only to surfaces that are clean and dry.

5.2.2 fi/|opping of surface with bitumen shall be performed so that thesurface shall be completely covered, Coats of bitumen shall be asspecified in drawings. All bitumen shall be applied with mopsexcept that the hot surfacing application shall be poured from adrooer.

5.2.3 Polyethylene sheet shall be laid in position wherever shown indrawings or specified herein. Where joint is necessary at the sideor end of the sheet, this shall be a double weld folded joint madeby placing the edges together and folding over hrr'ice continuouslytaking the top edge prior to the application of mud plaster. TheContractor shall protect the sheets from damages during layingand subsequent operation and shall replace at his own cost alldamaged sheets to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

5.2.4 Not Used

5.2.5 PVC Geo-membrane sheet shall be laid in position wherevershown in drawings. Where joint is necessary at the side or end ofthe sheet, this shall be in strict compliance to recommendationsfurnished by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall protect thesheets from damages during laying and subsequent opefation andshall replace at his own cost all damaged sheets to thesatisfaction of the Engineer.

5.2.6 The clay containing sand not less than 5olo shall be feduced to finepowder and mixed with water in a pit adding fibrous material suchas chopped rice husk/bhusa in the proportion of 60 to 70 lb/ 20Cft. of clay. The mixtufe will be allowed to mature for 7 daysduring which period it \/Vill be worked up from time to time so as tomake it into a homogeneous mass. lt wil l then be thoroughlymixed to the required consistency of mortaf and applied to thereouired slooes.

5.2.7 Brick tile of approved size shall be laid, grouted and pointed flushin cement mortar. The top surface shall be smooth and accuratelyleveled in accordance with the specified slope. No broken orcracked tiles all be used.

5.2

': ,*

07100-24L\'il:l'.C'7

5.3 WATER PROOFING & BUILT UP ROOFING

5.3.1 Over Roofs.

The water proofing treatment to reinforced cement concrete roofslabs shall be done in the following manner as indicated on thedrawings or as directed by the Engineer.

a) One layer of torch applied 4mm bituminous waterproofingmembrane thick properly lapped and sealed as per therecommendations of the approved manufacturer over primingcoat.

One layer of 1" poly urethane sheet lapped and joints sealed

One layer of Polyethylene sheet

d) 4" thick avefage (3" thick min) puddle earth (mud plaster) laid inslope.

e) Brick ti les set in 1:3 cement sand mortar and pointed incement sand grout.

o)

c)

5.4 WATER PROOFING TREATIV]ENT INSTRUCTURES, UNDER FLOORS.

FOUNDATION SUB-

Bitumen Painting

All concrete surfaces directly in contact with earth shall bebitumen painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of any accretjon,dust, dirt etc. by scraping, wire brushing or as directed by theEngineer. The surface shall be primed with a coat or asphalt oilused at ihe rate of not less than 2 gallon /100 square feet. Twocoats of hot bitumen paint shall be applied at the rate of 20lbs/'100 Sft. each coat. The first coat shall be allowed to dry forabout 6 hours befofe applying the second coat. During operationof painting great care shall be taken to avoid air bubbles. Themanufacturers shall be taken to avoid air bubbles. Themanufacturer's instructions and Engineer's directions shall befollowed.

PVC Geo-membrane (Water Proofing Membrane)

PVC Geo-membrane shall be laid in position wherever shown onthe Drawings.

The material shall be laid over the prepared surface at the levelsand posilion in the areas shown on the Drawings. Where joint isnecessary at the side or end of a sheet, this shall be as per therecommendation of the manufacturer. The Contractor shall Drotectthe film sheets from damages during laying and subsequentoperation and shall replace at his own cost all damaged filmsheets to the satisfaction of the Engin

b)

07100-3

5.5

Manufacturer's fecommendations and instructions along with thesample of material shall be submitted to the Engineer for hisapproval.

PVC Geo-membrane on vertical surfaces shall be protected by theconstruction of 4112 thick masonry wall and on horizontal surfacesit shall be protected/covered by placement/laying of 2" thickcement concrete 1:4r8.

Not Used

CURING

Tiles after laying, grouting and flush pointing shall be kept wet throughoutfor at least 7 days.

5 .6

a

6. MEASUREIVIENT AND PAYMENT

6.'1 General

Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undefmentioned sDecified works related to the relevant items of the Bills ofQuantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in thequoted unit rate of the respective items ofthe Bllls of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contfactor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim arty compensation on this account.

6.1.'1 All preparatory work, scrapping, scratching, cleaning, cant strips,gravel strips. etc.

6.1.2 Formwo*

6.1.3 Geo-membrane, mud plaster, etc. in roof treatment.

6.'1.4 Coats of bitumen.

6.1.5 Polyethylene sheet including laps/overlaps.

6.'1.6 Class'C' cement concrete cant strip, brick of concrete

tiles. 6.2 Water Proofing & Built-up Roofing

6.2.1 Measurement

l\,,leasurement of acceptably completed works respective type ofwater proofing & built-up roofing over will be made on the basis ofnet actual area in square feet provided and installed in position asshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

07100-4

O 6.2.2 Paymenl

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofrespective type of water proofing & builfup roofing on the basis ofunit rate per squafe feet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shallconstitute full compensation for all the works related to the item.

6.3 BitumenPainting/Coating

6.3.'1 lvleasurementlvleasurement of acceptably completed works of bitumenpainting/coating wjll be made on the basis of net actual area in.square feet provided and applied in position as shown on theDrawings or as directed by the Engineer. Area receivingpainting/coating shall only be measured once, irrespective of thenumber of coats applied.

6.3.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofbitumen painting/coating on the basis of unit rate per square feetquoted in the Bills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all costof surface preparation and shall constitute full compensation for allthe works related to the item

c

07100-5

1 ,

sEcTtoN 07165

VAPOR BARRIER

DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Install vapor barrier under all floor slabs and concrete pads, and at otherlocations shown on the Drawing.

MATERIALS

A. Vapor barrier shall be 6-mil (0.006") polyethylene fi lm or equal as approved bythe Engineef.

3. EXECUTION

3.01 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with vapor barrier work only after substrate construction and penetratingwork have been completed.

3,02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE

A. Examine the substrate and the conditions under which vapor barier work is to beperformed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Vapor barder shall be applied parallel with direction of concrete pour, lappingadjacent sides and ends 6 inches minimum.

B. Seal all joints with continuous approved 2 inch wide plastic tape.

;-5,,r'od\

4Z-\-i l I

$\*i

07r65-r

1.

sEcTtoN 07920

CAULKING AND SEALANTS

SCOPE

Provide sealants and caulking as required, in the locations indicated on the Drawingsand as specified herein.

DEFINITIONS

Sealant: A weatherproof elastomer used in filling and sealing joints, havingproperties of adhesion, cohesion, extensibil i ty under tension, compressibil i tyand recovery, designed to make joints air and, watertight, designed generallyfor application to joints at exterior of structures and to other joints subject tomovement.

Caulking Compound: A material used in fi l l ing joints and seams, havingproperties of adhesion and cohesion, not required to have extensibility andrecovery properties, and usually applied at joints at interior of structures, notsubject to movement or weathering.

Caulking: The term is used here to denote the process of filling the joints, withoutregard to type of material.

RELATED WORK

Section 075'10, Built-Up Roofing System B. Section 07600, Flashing and SheetMetal

SUBMITTALS

Submit product data, samples, ceriifications, manu{acturer's completeinstructions fof preparing surfaces, mixing, applying and curing the products,etc., in accordance with Section 01340.

Submit a two year guarantee on sealant type caulking work against jointfailure, which is defined as leaks of air or water, evidence of loss of adhesionbetween sealant and joint edge, evidence of loss of cohesion, fading of sealantmaterial, or migEtion of $ealant.

DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING

Siore and handle materials so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign matter or

A. Joint Types: For horizontal joints, use selfleveling compounds and, for alljoints, use non-sag compounds, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

B. Color: For concealed joints, use sealant with manufacturer's standard colorwhich has the best overall performance qualit ies for the application indicated.For exposed joints, use specified sealant with color selected from manufacture/sstandard colorc. unless sDecial or custom colors are required or specified.

C. Compatibility: Before purchase, confirm that the specified

07920_l

O

2.3

4.1

4.2

compatible with the materials of the joint surfaces, joint lillers and other materials inthejoint system where they are to be applied.

MATERIALS

Primer: Where primer is required by sealant manufacturer, provide acompound designed io insure the adhesion of sealant, as manufactured by thesealant manufacturer and selected for compatibilitv with both the sealant andsubstrate.

Exterior Sealants:

L Vertical or Inclined Joints: One component low modulus, non-sag,polysulfide or polyurethane sealant with Shore A hardness of '15 to35, minimum elongat'on of 100%, meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25,Grade NS Bostik Chemcalk 100 or equal or One-Part Joint Sealant Based onMofton Thiokols LP Liquid PotysuFrde Polymer or equal. Fot extrememovementjoints, use sealant with minimum elongation of 1200%.

2. Hodzontal Joints: One component, self-leveling, polysulfide or polyurethanesealant with Shore A hardness of 15 to 45, meeting AST[/ C920, Type S,Class 25, Grade P, Bostik Chem Calk 950 or equalorone-Part Joint SealantBased On Morton Thiokol's LP Liquid Polysulfide Polymer or equal. Forhorizontal joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage, use one component, coaltar extended, fuel resistant polyurethane sealant with Shore A hardness of'15-35, meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, GEde P/NS, Use T,and equal to Bostic Chem-Calk 950 or equal.

!nterior Sealants and Caulking:

1. General User One component, acrylic latex caulking, meeting ASTMC834 with minimum 750lo recoverv Der ASTM C736 Bostik Chem-Calk 600or equal.

2. Exposed Joints with Litt le Movement: One component, non-sag, mildewresistant, sil icone sealant with Shore A hardness of 25 to 30, meetingASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 General Eleclric Silicone Sanitary1702 Sealant or equal, or Bostik Sil icone Rubber Bathroom Caulk orequal, or one component butyl rubber sealant, gum grade, for maximumjoint movement of t5%, meeting Federal Specification TT5-1657, BostikChem-Caulk 300 or eoual.

3. Non-Exposeci Acoustical Joints: Sealant as specified in 2. above or onecomponent acoustical caulking, non-drying, non-hardening, syntheticrubber, nofmally not paintable.

Sealant Backer Rods: Compressible rod stock of either polyethylene foam,polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam or neoprenefoam as recommended for compatibility with the sealant by the sealantmanufacturer.

Joint Fillers: Either resilient, non-extruding, pre-molded cork units,with FS HHF-341, Type ll, Class B or extruded or molded closed-cell

complyingneoprene

c.

D.

E.

07920-2

EXECUTION

PREPARATION

Joints:

7.1

1 . Thoroughly clean alljoints of loose particles by blowing out or vacuuming thejoints, and ensure that the surfaces to be contacted by sealant are dry, fully freeof laitance, loose aggregate, form release agents, curing compounds, waterrepellants and other surface treatments.

2. lnstall joint packing sized to require 20 to 50 percent compression uponinsertion, and placed so that sealant depth is approximately 1/2 jointwidth. ln joints not of sufficient depth to allow packing, install polyethylenebond breaking tape at back of joint. Lengthwise stretching of packingmaterials shall be avoided.

3. Where required to protect adjacent sufaces, apply masking tape in continuousstrips in alignment with joint edge and immediately remove after joints havebeen sealed and tooled.

4. Mere required by sealant manufacturer, prime joints to receive sealant inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions. Brush primer uniformly uponall surfaces ofjoint and allow sufficient drying time before caulking.

APPLICATION

Sealant:

'1. l\4ix and apply sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2. Do not use material which has exceeded the manufacture/s recommendedpotential open time (POT Life).

7.2

c.

D.

3. Apply sealant and caulking material underwithout air pockets or voids and toolrecommended by manufacturer-

Locations:

pressure to fill joints completelyjoints concave with solvent

'1. Apply sealant around penetrations of f loor slabs and exterior walls forpiping, conduits, ductwork and similar items, at top of slabs and exteriorface of walls, around exterior perimetei of door frames and windows,louvers and vents, and at other elterior locations shown on the Drawings.

2. Apply caulking compound ai interior locations shown on the Drawings.

Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of caulking sealant with excessfemoved.

Protect,on:

1 . Cure sealants in accordancemaximum bond to surfaces,

with manufacturer's instructionscohesive strength, and durability

2. Repair and replace sealants damaged or showingdeterioraiion before time of final acceptance.

07920-3

evl

earliest

E. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant and soil ing resultjng fromthis work as work progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent asrecommended by the manufacturef. Leave allfinished work in a neat and cleancondition.

07920-4

1.0

sEcfloN - 08520

ALUMINUM DOOR, WINDOWS AND MISC. WORKS

SCOPE

The work covered under this section comprises of the followin9:

Fixing in position aluminum doors, windows, screen, partition walls andcur ta in wa l ls e tc . comple te w i th hand les , locks , ny lon whee ls ,vinyl weather strips etc. as shown on the drawings and specifiednereunoef.

Fixing glass of specified quality and thickness to windows and doorin accordance with section 9!ggg

2.0 GENERAL COMPLIANCE

Windows shall conform to the requirements of the UniformCode for wind pressure and infiltration.

Des ign Requ i rements : A l l doors , w indows, ra i l ings , Handra i l s ,e tc . to comply w i th BS 4873 "A lumin ium a l loy w indows" o requ iva len t in respec t o f mater ia ls , work s izes and manufac ture .All sectional dimensions shown on drawings are only indicative. Thecontractor, shall be responsible to determine the adequacy ofthese with respect to actual structural and performancerequirements. All extrusions shall be of adequate strength, not onlyto meet the structural performance, but also to minimize the risk ofdistortion in the finished surfaces.

Work Sizes

"A l l d imens ions g iven on drawings are be tween s t ruc tu ra lopenings and/or between finished surface and allowances shallbe made for variation due to constructional tolerances. Thecontractor. shall be resoonsible to measure actual f inal dimensionsfrom the Site before fabrication of doors, windows and otherassemblies/units.

Weather T igh tness : Weather t igh tness and opera t ions sha l l su i tthe weather conditions prevail ing in the area of installation. All doorsand w indows w i l l be fabr ica ted as comple te ly a i r and water t igh tunits including gaskets for glazing, weather stripping, latches, locks,bolts for fixing etc.

Air Tightness: The fixed glazed windows shall be as far as possible'100% air t ight under all weather conditions.

2 .1

1 .

2.

2 .2

2.4

2.6

3-O MATERIALREQUIREI\iIENTS

Aluminum Sect ions

Al l a luminum sec t ions sha l l beconforming to In te rna t iona l

08s20-1

Acoustic Performance:

Windows when installed shall provide an average28 dB over a frequency range of 100-3150 Hz.

sound

extruded Aluminum Al'oy 6063Standard fo r a l loy qua l i t y

extrusion, Temper T-5. Same of the properties of this alloy are asfollows:

Aluminium

l \ /agnes ium

Silicon

lron

Ultimate Tensile Strength

Yield Tensile Strength

Hardness , Br ine l l

Elongation(in scm sample 1 .6mr-ri thick)Fatigue Strength(500 mill ion cycles)

Electrical Resistivity at 68 'F

Wirc_gglze.shall be 24 AWG, 12x12 meshesDanels of doors and windows,

97.50k

0.45-O.90/o

0.2-0.94/o

max.0.35olo

27,000 psi (186 MPa)

21,000 psi (145 MPa)

60 (500k9 load, '10mm ba l l )

120/a

'10,000 psi (68.9 ftilPa)

3.16x10-6 Ohm-cm

Wall thickness of frames shall be minimum 2.5 mm for curtain wall and1.6mm for Doors & Windows, unless shown otherwise in drawings or calledfor in BOQ.

Provide Aluminum systems capable of withstanding loads and thermaland structural movement requirements indicated without failure, basedon testing manufacture/s standard units. Failure includes the following:

a) Air infiliration and water penetfation exceeding specified limits.

b) Framing members transferring stresses, including those causedby thermal and stfuctural movement to glazing units.

Aluminum sections of THERMEC, LUCKY, CHAWLA, or PAKISTAN CABLESapproved equ iva len t sha l l be used.

Bo l ts and Nuts sha l l con form to BS 4 '190 "B lack hexagon bo l ts , sc rews. andnuts . Spec i f i ca t ions" . Bo l ts sha l l be o i l p ro tec ted on the th readed par ts .

Washers shall conform to B5 4320 "Specification for metal washers forgenera l eng ineer ing purposes" .

G lass o f requ i red th ickness sha l l con form to BS 952- '1 "G lass fo rglazing. Ciassification" and shall perfectly f lat or parallel surfaces, free fromdis to r t ion specks bubb les and f laws o f every k ind . G lass sha l l be o f Safe tyGlass (SG) quality.

C lear g lass sha l l a lso be f ree f rom t in ts and shah t ransmi t 85% o f the d i f fusedlight fall ing on it.

Tinted and lvlercury glass shall be of approved colour and shade.

The qua l i t y , k ind , th ickness and s ize o f the g lass sha l l be as shown on thedrawings or called for in the Bil l of Quantit ies or as appfoved by the Engineer.

Glazing shall conform to specification Section 08800.

08520-2

open

Hardware l ron-monoerv and F ix tu res l ron mongery , f i t t ings , hand les andlocks sha l l be o f b ronze, s ta in less s tee l and a luminum as shown on thedrawings or as s ta ted in the B i l l o f Quant i t ies . Where spec i f i c makes ortype are no t g iven , these shot : be o f bes t qua l i t y ava i lab le in the marke tand as approved by the Engineer.

S t ruc tura l S i l i con-Sea lan t Jo in ts : Prov ide sys tems w i th s t ruc tu ra l s i l i con-sea lan t jo in ts comp ly ing w i th ASTM C1181 "S tandard Spec i f i ca t ionfor S t ruc tura l S i l i con Sea lan ts" and the fo l low ing requ i rements .

a ) S t ruc tura l sea lan t w i ths tands tens i le & shear s t resses imposedby the sys tem wi thout fa i l ing adhes ive ly o r cohes ive ly . When tes tedfor adhes ive compat ib i l i t y w i th each subs t ra te and cond i t ionrequ i red , p rov ide sea lan t tha t fa i l s cohes ive ly be fore i t fa i l sadhesively. Adhesive and cohesive failure are defined as follows:

i. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pull:-J away from asubs t ra te c lean ly , leav ing no sea lan t mater ia l beh ind-

ii. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant bfeaks or tears within a joint butdoes not separaie form each substrate because sealant to substrate bondstrength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

b) Colour: As selected by the Engineer form the full range of colours.

c) Provide sealant with modules of elasticity that will not allow movement of morethan 25 percent of joint width, lass movement is required by structural-sealant glazed system design.

Weather Stfiopino:

All opening section must be weather stripped with Neoprene glazing gaskets orsimilar approved and polypfopylene pile weather stripping around doors to ensureadequate weatherproofing. Aluminium glazing beads are to snap on type withoutvisible fixing and must be adjustable to allow for varying thickness of glass. No PVCweather stripping is acceptable.

Thermallv Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate Metal exposed toexlerior from Metal exDosed to interior with a material of low thermal conduction.

Wind Loads i Prov ide sys tems inc lud ing anchorage, capab le o f w i ths tand ingwind load design pressure calculated according to requirements of authorit ieshaving jurisdiction or the "American Society of Civil Engineers" ASCE 7. MinimumDesign Loads for Buildings and other Structures, whichever are mofe stringentbut noi less than 110 km/hr.

a) Deflection of framing members in direction normalto wall plane is l imited to 1/175of clean sDan or 3/4 inch. whichever is smallef unless otherwise indicated.

b) Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide system that does not evidencematerial failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to functionnormally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2percent of near span when tested according to ASTI\,I| E330 "Standard TestMethod for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights andCurtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference'.

j) Test oressure: 150 percent of inward and outuvafd

ii) Duration: As required by deign wind load velocity,eY^^er rre ^rtad^rv

SUTC.

for rel

/;,

a08520-3

oHurricane Resistance Test Performance: Provide systems that pass largeand small missile-impact tests, as required by systems location abovegrade, and cyclic pressure Tests according to following testing requirements:

ASTM E1233 Tes t Method fo r S t ruc tura l Per fo rmance o f Ex ter io rWjndows, Curtain Walls, and Doofs by Cyclic Air Pressure Differential.

ASTM E1386 Test Melhod lor Performance ol Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, Doors, and Storm Shutters lmpacted by Missile(s) andExposed to cyclic Pressure Differentials

ASTM E1996 Spec i f i ca t ion fo r Per fo rmance o f Ex ter io r Windows,curtain Walls, Doors, and Storm Shutters lmpacted by windborne Debrisin Hurricanes

Seismic Loads: Provide systems, including anchorage capable ofwithstanding the etfects of earthquake motions calculated according torequirements or ASCE 7 "Min Design Loads for Buildings and OtherStructures".

pCgllLg4btProvide systemwhich wi l l reduce g laz ing l inewhen carrying full dead load.

members that do not deflect an amountbe low 75 percent o f des ign d imens ions

Provide a min 1 18 inch clearance between members below and topof glazing or other fixed part immediatel,_

Provide a min 1/16 inch clearance between members and open ablewindows and doors.

D)

Live Loads: Provide systems including anchorage, that accommodate thesupporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed and concentratedlive loads indicated, without failure of material or permanent deiormation.

Ajlhfilllgtigl_Provide system with permanent resistant to air leakagethrough fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 Cfm/sft(1.09 rn3/11 m'?) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTN4 E283"Standard Test lvlethod for Determining Rate of Air Leakage ThroughExteior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified PressureDifferences Across the Specimen" at a static air pressure difference of1.57 psf (75 Pa).

Water Penetration: Provide system that do not evidence watef leakagethrough fixed glazing and frame areas when tested accorcling to ASTM E331"Standard Tes t l v le thod fo r Water Penet ra t ion o f Ex ter io r Windows,Skylighis, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air PressureDifference" at min differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-actingdesign pressure as determined by ASCE 7, Minimum Design loads forBuildings and other structures", but not less than Water leakage is defined asfollows:

Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing in systems normallyexposed, and interior surfaces, from sources other than condensation-Water controlled by flashings and gutters that are drained back to the'exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or f inishes is not waterIeakage.

Thermal Movements: Provide system that accommmovements including, but not limited to sway and deflections

08520-4

o Condensat ion Res is tance: . Prov ide sys tems w i th condensat ionresistance factor (CRE) of not less than 45 when tested according toAAMA 1503.1.

Averaqe Thermal Conductance: Prov ide sys tem wi th average U-values of not more ihan 0.63 Btu/sq.ft x h x degree F when testedaccording to AAMA 1503.1.

Field lvleasurements: Verify dimension by field measurements beforefabrication. Co-ordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress toavoid delaying the works.

Glazinq Gasketsl Manufacturer's standard press-gtazing system ofblack, resil ient glazing gaskets, setting to block and shims or spacersfrom an elastrometer of type and in hardness recommended by systemand gasket manufac turer to comply w i th sys tem per fo rmancerequirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corner sealed withsealant recommended by the gasket manufacturer.

Spacers , Set t ino b losks , Gaskets . and Bond Breakers :Manufacturing standard permanent, non-migrating types in hardnessrecommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants and suitable forsystem Performance requirement.

Secondarv Seam:For use as weather sea l , compat ib le w i thstructural sil icone sealant and other svstem components with which itcomes in contact, and that accommodates a 50 percent increase ordecrease in joint width at the tine of application, when measuredaccording to ASTI,'I C7'19 "Standard Test l\ i lethod for Adhesion andCohes ion o f E las tomer ic Jo in t Sea lan ts Under Cyc l i c Movement(Hockman Cycle)".l\r iscellaneous ltemsFraming system gaskets, sealants, and joint f i l lers as recommended bymanufacturer for joint type.

PVC weather strip shall be used to render joints between the wall and outerframe, and between the moving panel frame and the receiving l imb of thefixed frame etc.

Frame sections shall be joined by appropriate manufacturers stagydetails.Special nylon rollers for {riction free operatlon ol sliding windows shallbe provided.

Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed towi ths tand normal thermal movement , w ind load ing and impact load(where app l icab le ) , w i thout fa i lu re inc lud ing loss or g lass breakageattributed to the following:

Manufac turer , fabr ica t ion and ins ta l la t ion , fa i lu re o f sea lan ts o rgaskets to remain water t igh t & a i r t igh t ; de ter io ra t ion o f g laz ingmaterials: & other defects in construction.

Door lea f sha l l be removab le f rom the inner s ide o f the f rame fo rease o f ma in tenance and c lean ing .

A luminum Louvers sha l l con form to the cons t ruc t ion de ta i l s shown infi lm shall conform to that for aluminum windows.drawings b

08520-5

4 .o SUBMITTALS

4.1 The Contractor shall submit, for approval, samples of each type ofdoor and w indow showing the qua l i t y o f mater ia ls , workmansh ipand f in ish . The samples o f l ron mongery , f i t t ings and f i x tu resshall also be got approved before purchases are made by theContractor.

4 .2 The samples o f g lass fo r each type o f g laz ing a longwi thspec i f i ca t ions o f the manufac lu rer o f spec ia l qua l i t y sha l l besubmitted for approval before firm orders are placed for supplies.

CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

FABRICATION

The aluminum doors and windows shall be manufactured by an approvedmanufac turer in th is t rade. They sha l l be fab f ica ted as comple te un i t ,fu l l y a i r t igh t and water t igh t inc lud ing rubber gasket fo r g laz ing andnecessary holes for fixing.

l f requ i red , the Cont rac to r sha l l p rov ide shop d raw ings based onArchitectural drawings for the approval before orders are placed with themanufacturers.

5 .1

The manufac turer sha l l use the la tes t and approved method o ijo in t ing employed in the manufac ture o f h igh c lass work v iz . mechan ica ljointing, reinforced wiih concealed welding shall be used in themanufacture of doors and windows.

5.2 PREPARATION

Coordination and lvleasurements: Measurements shall be taken at the buildingto assure proper erection ofthe work. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking inthe field all dimensions, whether or not shown on the Orawings, upon which the accuratefitting together and build-in of this work may depend, or which would affect theprooer installation of the work.

INSTALLATION

VMndo\6 shall be securely anchored into place in prcpedy prepared openings. Theopenings must be square, plumb and levelto prevent distortion ofwindows. The windowframes shall not be distorted by erection screws or fittings and shall not interferewith the operating mechanism.

5.3

o

The fixing of doors and windows to concrete openings shall be carried outin an approved method as ind ica ted in the drawings o f as d i rec ted .Provision of necessary groove or rebate and holdfasts in the concrete shall bemade in the formwork and no holing or dri l l ing shall he allowed in theexposed concrete finishes. These shall be erected in position after thbuilding siructure is completed and by using proper holdfasts as showndrawings or counter sunk bolts and screws as directed in accordancesite 'requirements.

B. Caulking shall be as specified in Section 07920 Caulking and Sealants.

C. Windows shall be suitable for field glazing as specified in Section 08800 Glass and Glazing,with snap-in rolled aluminum glazing beads furnished by the manufacturer ofaluminum windows. lnstallation of bead in field shall be in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.o

08520-6

5.4 HANDLING

Care sha l l be taken in hand l ing , a luminum, doors , w indows, e tc . , dur ingt ransoor ta t ion and s i te . These sha l l be s to red under cover and sha l l beins ta l led on ly by sk i l led mechan ics , se t p lumb, leve l , in a l ignment andproperty braced to prevent distortion.

CLEANING

Metal surfaces of windows shall be cleaned on both the inside and outside of allmortar, plaster, paint and other foreign matter to present a neat appearance andprevent fouling of weathering surfaces or weatherstripping. In addition, windowsshall be washed off with a stiff fiber brush, soap and water, and thoroughly rinsed withclearwater. Where aluminum windows have become stained, ordiscolored, they shall becleaned or have finish restored in accordance with recommendations of theArchitectural Aluminum Manufaclurefs Association. Slalned, discolored orabraded windows that cannot be satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced with newwindows at no additional cost to the Owner.

5.6 Prolectioni

a ) The jo in t be tween w indow and door f rames and the bu i ld ing shou ld becaulked wiih approved building mastic for total weatherproofing.

b) After installation, doors, and windows shall be protected fromconstruction hazards that wil l interfere with their operation or damagetheir appearance or f inish. They shall be cleaned on inside and outsideof all mortar, plaster, paint of other foreign matter to present a neatappearance. Hardware and moving parts shall be lubficated.

6. GLAZING

The work of f ixing glazing to doors, windows shall be carried out with the. type and quality of glass speci{ied for each door and window and as

indicated in the drawings or as directed in accordance with section 08800.

The glazing of glass should be in accordance with the recommendations ofOS 6262 "Code of practice for glazing fof buildings."

receive the glass. All glass shall be factory labeled on each pane andlabe l sha l l no t he removed un t i l f ina l l y approved. G lass w i l l be f i xedbest qua l i t y mast jc compound o f approved make su i tab le fo r the typg lass or w i th spec ia l bead or mou ld ing as shown on the drawing odirected. Special rubbef l ining and weather proof brush joints for slisurfaces shall be provided where indicated.

Glass shall be fixed using flexible compounds, sealents, preformed stripsor gaskets as per recommendalion ot the doorlwindow manu{acturer. Thedesign shall allow for an edge clearance of at least 3mm (1/8") all aroundunless any dimension exceeds 1500rnm (60") when the clearance shall beatleast smm (3/'16") edge cover shall be adequate to retain the glass in positionunder the design wind loading. The rebate depth edge clearance plus edgecover shall not be less then 11mm (7/16") tor 6mn glass. The width of therebate platform must accommodate the glass, the front and baccompound, a r id g laz ing bead. The bead depth shou ld no t be less tha

08520-7

o

o

7.

the rebate depth. Setting blocks, distance pieces, and location blocks shallbe used as appropriate. Glass shall be protected against damage. Afterinspection, any labels, and paint spots shall be removed and glass shall bewashed clean. Damages or broken glass shall be removed and replacedbefore acceptance at no extra expense. After the installation of glass it shallbe cleaned using a soft cloth with water and mild soap or liquid detergent,followed by rinsing with clean water and drying.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

All aluminum windows as shown on the drawings shall be fabricated withheavy duty high strength aluminum extruded sections of aluminum alloy 6063-T5 conforming to BS EN 573 "Aluminum and aluminum alloys, Chemicalcomposition and form of wrought products" or ASTIVI 13-221 "StandardSpecification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,Profi les, and Tubes". Aluminum extrusions shall be hard colour anodized indark bronze with an average anodic fi lm thickness of 15 microns_ Theanodic treatment should conform to B.S. 3987 "Speclfication for anodicoxidation coatings on wrought aluminum for external architecturalapplications".

ALUMINUM DOORS

Aluminium doors shall be open able Luster Gold / Brown / Silver or any otherapproved shade anodized/powder quoted, of heavy duty deluxe size section of100 x 40 x 1.6mm wall thickness extruded by 6063-T"5 Alloy, having 15micron anodic fi lm thickness manufactured by the approved manufacturerg lazed w i th 5 mm th ick d is to r t ion f ree impor ted g lass o f bes t approvedquality complete using all required approved accessories viz door locks, doorhandles, f loor hinges for doors, gasket for glass fixing, sealant, syntheticrubber for doors, screws and rowel plugs for f ixing etc. of the bestapproved quality complete in all respects as shown in drawings andspecifications and approval, of the Engineer. (Shop drawing to be gotapproved by the Eng ineer be fore s ta r t ing fabr ica t ion work) . Door comerssha l l be ab le to w i ths tand a min imum of 14 MPa (2000 ps i ) tens ion w i thoutnoticeable deformation. Welded corners without st.uctural assembly shall not bepermitted.

ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

Aluminium Curtain Wall shall be of Luster gold I brown I silver or any otherapproved shade anodized/powder quoted (as approved by the Engineer)Heavy Duty Deluxe Size Section of 120 mm x 64 inm x 2.5 mm (WallThickness), extruded by 6063-T-5-Alloy having 25 micron anodic fi lmthickness manufactured by the approved manufacturer, glazed with 12 mmthick distoftion free tempered plain imported glass of best approved quality tobe installed / f ixed with Galvanized Steel Brackets, steel clamps, steelheadings (as per approved shop drawings requirement) of at least 6 mmthickness fixed at slab, sill, and head to tie up Curtain Wall Section'specialized Hilty bolts of 50 mm length 12 mm dia. (or as specified bymanufacturer) with galvanized steel washers of 5 mm thickness compwith all required accessories viz. Gasket for Glass fixing,

Sealant for covering gaps and for rain protection and screws etc. compin all respects as shown in the approved shop drawings and specifications.(Shop drawings and calculations catering fof dead load, live load, hurricane-resistance performance, seismic load, air infi l tration, water penetration

8.

08520-8

a movements and strLlctural supoort movements etc. to be submitted forapproval ofthe Engineer before start of the fabrication work).

MEASUREMENT

The. measurement for doors, windows, venti lators and curtain walls shall bemade in Sq. Ft / M. from sil l to bottom of l intel after plastering and Jam toJam

I1. RATE AND PAYMENT

Rates fo r a l l the i tems under th is Sec t ion sha l l cover the cos t o ffu rn ish ing a l l the mater ia ls labour , sca f fo ld ings ar id app l iances a t S i teand per fo rming w i th the i r ins ta l la t ion in accordanoe w i th ins t ruc t ions .I t i s par t i cu la r ly ment ioned tha t the ra tes Cur f i x ing doors and w indowsetc . sha l l inc lude f i x ing o f a l l f in ished hardware i ron monger / f i t t ingssuch as locks , peg s tays , hand les , push p la tes , k ick ing p la tes , doorc losers , P ivo t Mach ine , g laz ing , f lex ib le compounds, rubber l in ing andappliances at site and performing all operations in accordance with thedrawings and BOQ.

10.

AA08520-9

a sEcroN;ssooGLAZING

SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labour,equipment, tools, appliances, scaffolding and providing in any floor and at anyheight glass, gaskets, sealants, compound and other materials required forperforming all operations in connectjon with the installation and setting of all typesof glass and glazing complete in every respect in accordance with the Drawingsor as directed by the Engineer. The scope of this section of Specifications iscovered with detailed Specifications as laid down herein.

GENERAL

Each type of glass shall have the manufacturer's iabel on each pane,and the labels shall remain on the glass unti lf inal cleaning.

2.2 Giazing sealant shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for theparticular application.

2.3 Spacer shims (distance pieces) shall be plasticised polyvinyl chloride(PVC). Thickness shall be equalto space shown on drawings betweenglass and rebates bead or cleat. Depth shall give not less than 1/4"cover of glazing sealant.

2.4 Contractor shall submit samples for each type of glass, minimum 4' x4' in size with protective edges. Samples of glazing sealant minimum0.1 ljter of specified types shall be submitted.

2.5 Contractor shall submit '1 feet long sample of each type of glazinggasket.

2.6 Contractor shall also submit printed materials manufacturersinstallation instructions for specified glazing gaskets, compoundssealants and accessories including description of required equipmentand procedures and precautions to be observed.

DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

Contractor shall deliver materials in manufacturefs original,unopened containers clearly labeled with manufacturer's narne andaddress, material, brand, type, class and rating as applicable.

Contractor shall store the materials in original unopened containerswith labels intacuprotected from ground contact and from elementswhich may damage glass.

1 .

't

o

3.3

3 .1

MATERIALS

4.1 Generai

Contractor shall handle the materials in a manner tobreakage of glass and damage to surfaces.

Glass shall be ffee from allf laws of any kind and shall

blemishes, bubbles,be properly cut to fit

distortions andthe rebates so

4.

08800-1

o have a uniform clearance of 1/16" round the panes between theedges of glass and the rebates. All glass shall be best quality fromreputable manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.

Glass

Glass for doors, windows, and ventilators and louvers shall be clearplain or mercury glass 5mm thick (frosted in toilets ventilators orwhere ever required) of best quality available in the countfy approvedby the Engineer. This shall comply with BS 952.

Glazing Sealants and Compounds

Contractor shall provide material coloured to match frame in whichglass is installed. Provide only compounds known to be fullycompatible with surfaces, which they will contact as follows.

4.3.1 Two component polysulfide glazjng sealant.

4.3.2 One component acrylic glazing sealant.

Acrylic-latex glazing sealant consisting of modifiedlatex rubber and acrylic emulsion, non-hardening, non-staining and non-bleeding.

Cleaners, Primers and sealer as recommended by thesealant manufacturer.

4.4 Accessories

4 .4 .1 Glazing Sealant

It shall be tape or ribbon of polymerlzed butyl or mixture ofbutyl and polyi-solbutylene compounded with inert fillers andpigments, solvent based 95 percent solids thread or fabricreinforced, paintable, non-staining.

Setting Blocks

It shall be chloroprene (Neoprene) 70 to 90 urometerhardness, compatible with sealant used, channel shapedand ofthe necessary height for proper perimeter clearance.

4.2

4.3

4 .3 .4

4.4.2

4.4.3 Channels, Gaskets, and spacer's

It shall be choloroprene (Neoprene), 40 to 50 urometerhardness compatible with sealant used.

INSTALLATION OF GLAZING

5.1 Glazing shall comply with the recommendations contained in the"MANUAL of GLAZING" of the Glass Marketing Association or asspecifically recommended otherwise by the glass and glazing materialsmanufacturerg.

Examine each piece of glass and discarddamage or face imperfection. All glazingwater tight on completion.

08800-2

and replace glass with edge

a 5.3 Clean glazing channels and other framing members indicated toreceive glass. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to thesubstrate. Remove lacouer from metal surfaces wherever elastomericsealants are to be used. Apply primer and sealer to joint surfaceswherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer and as shown onthe drawings.

Trim and clean excess glazjng materials from surrounding surfacesimmediately aftef installation and eliminate stains and discolorations.

Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance withmanufacturer's instructions to olrtain high early bond strength internalcohesive strength and surface durability.

While glazing operation is in progress greai care shall be taken toavoid breakage or damage to the glass ancj adjoining glazing. TheContractor shall make good at ihis own cost, all glass broken by hisworkmen while cleaning or carrying out other operations. On thecompletion of the glaang work, all glass that has been set by theContractor shall, if it becomes loose, within the maintenance period, berefixed at Contractor's expense.

No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paint andother stains have been removed from the surface of the glass adchecked by the Engineer for water tightness.

5.4

O

5.7

PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF GLAZING

Remove all smears, labels and excess glazing sealant, leave cleaninside and outside free from scratchei. The Contractor shall beresponsible for the protection of installed glass. Before finalaccepiance, damaged or broken glass shall be removed and replacedwith new glass at no additional expense to the Employer.

All glass surfaces shall be washed clean both inside and outside withintwo weeks prior to final acceptance by the Employer.

7 . MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No measurement and payment will be made for the work involved withinthe scoDe of this section of soecifications related to ihe relevant items ofBills of Quantities. The cost, thereof, shall be deemed to have beenincluded in the quoted unit rates of the felative items in the BOQ andthe percentage quoted by the tenderer.

6.'1

6.2

o08800-3

a sEcTtoN 09200

PLASTER AND STUCCO

The work under this section of the Specifications consists offurnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances, and materialsand in performing all operations in any floor and at any heightconnection with providing and installation of cement plaster, andspecified exte.nal rendering complete in strict accordance with thissection of the Specifications and the applicable drawings and subjectto the terms and conditions of the Contract.

Except as may be o therw ise shown on sur faces spec i f ied , a l lplaster work, both internal and external shall be ordinaryPortland Cement plaster of the required thickness as shown onthe drawings.

Plastering shall not commence unti l all electfic conduits,drainage and sanitary pipes, inlets to tanks, brackets, clamps,doors and window frames and all sorts of inserts and embeddeditems are fixed in position. lt shall be the responsibil i ty of theContractor to make sure that all such wo|k is carried out by othercontractors before starting of plaster work. Chiseling and repairingof cement plaster shall not be permitted without the approval of theEngineer-

1 . SCOPE

2. GENERAL

a

2.1

2.2

2.3 Sample of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approvalprior to use in the works.

MATERIAL

3.1 Cement fo r p las te r'12 or P .S 232) or

sha l l be Ord inary Por t land Cementsulphate resisting cement (B.S 4027 or

(B , SP.S,

in the612) as specified and shall conform to requirements specifiedsection "Plain and Reinforced Concrete'.

3.2 Sand for plaster shall comply with the requirements of BS 1199, BS'1200 or the draft Pakistan Standard "Sand for Plastef as directed bythe Engineer.

Water for plaster shall conform to requirements specifiedfor "plain and reinforced concrete".

the section

3.4 All materials and workmanship forSpecifications, shall comply with the211 and CP 221 as directed by the

4. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING

plaster, not explained in theserequirements of relevant BS CPEngineer.

4 .1 Measurement o f mater ia ls by vo lume sha l l be by conta iners o fknown capacity to maintain consistent proportions. No lumpy orcaked material shall be used. Mixing equipmen s and too lsshall be clean. lvlaterials shall be proportioDrawings. in the Bil l of Quantit ies or as d

a09200-l

eqon l

o Mixing shall be continuous unti l all ingredients are evenly distributedand thoroughly mixed.

4.2 Only l imlted water shall be added lor proper workabil ity and suchquantity of mortar shall be prepared which can be consumed inthirty minutes after preparation. Preparation of mortar in bulkquantity for use during the entire day or for any other time more thanthat stipulated above is expressly prohibited. Re-tempefing shall notbe permitted and all mortar which has begun to stiffen shall bediscarded.

4.3 Plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed either by hand on aclean cement concrete platform or by a mechanical mixer, as directedby the Engineer.

PREPARATION OF SURFACE TO BE PLASTERED

Concrete surface to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all grease, fromoil and other surface impurities, which will otherwise adversely affect theadhesion of plaster to the surface concerned. The surface of all-concreteceil ing, beams and columns shall be l ightly hacked by approved means togive the required key for plastering.

All masonry surfaces to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all matter,which will otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surfaceconcerned. The surface shall be washed with clean water and kept damp for24hours before further treatment. The Surface thus prepared shall be treateduniformly with cement and sand slurry. The slurry to be used shall be one partcement to one part sand by volume with water added to make a stiff creanl,mix. The slurry shall be applied with a stiff brush on surface, which hasprevjously been well wetted. The surface so treated shall be left to cure for 3days.

APPLICATION OF PLASTER

6.1The plaster of thickness less than the specified thickness shall berejected. lf the plaster is to be more then %" thick, it shall be done in twocoats. The surface of first coat shall be made rouoh before the secondcoat is aoDlied.

The plaster shall not have wavy surface and shall be perfectly in plumbThe edges and corners shall represent a straight l ine. The plaster sha..be kept wet continuously for at least ten (10) days. No extra paymentshall be allowed forjambs, junctions, corners, edges, round surfaces orfor more than one layer of plaster required due to any unevenness inthe work done by the Contractor. The plasterwork is to cover aconduits, pipes elc fixed in the walls and ceil ing. Wherever specifiecmetal lath shall be nailed firmly before plastering is commenced. Theplaster surface shall be tested frequently with a l0 feet straight edge andplumb bob.

6.2 Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, discoloration or any defectsshall not be acceptable. Any such plastef or loose plaster shall beremoved & replaced with plaster in conformity wjth these specificationsand as additionally directed by the Engineer.

09200-2

o Contractor shall cut out and Datch all defective work at his own cost. Alldamaged plaster shall be patched as directed by the Engineer. Patchingplaster shall match appearance of and shall be finished level with adjoiningprasrer.

METAL LATH (Wire Mesh)

Metal lathing (metal wire mesh) shall be fabricated from sheet steel and shall beof uniform quality and free from flaws broken strands, cracks and corrosivepitt ing, shall be rectangular and true to shape and shall comply with BS-1369.

All lathing shall be galvanized. Where plastering material depends entirely onthe lathing for its key, these shall be not less than two complete meshopenings per 1-1l8"in one direction and the width of the aperture shall not beless than 3/16".Sheets sha l l no t be less than 1 .6 kg /sq .m when fabr ica ted , us ing 0 .7mm thick steel sheet. Where used on smooth surfaces to form a key itsha l l be no t less than 1 .2 kg /sq .mm when fabr ica ted , us ing 0 .5 mm th icksteel sheet. Tying wife shall be 1.2 mm diameter galvanized annealed ironwire.

Sheets shall be welded to angle iron frame as shown on drawings.

ANGLE AND BEADS

Angle beads, stop beads, depth gauge beads, edging profi les, plaster dividingpfofi les, interior angle profi les, plaster borders and the l ike shall all bemanufactured from sheet steel and galvanized after fabrication, all beads snailbe perforated at edges to ensure good adhesion of the plaster work. Thicknessand dimensions shall suit particular locations and plaster thickness.

All angle beads, stop beads, depth gauge beads and the l ike are to be fixed inaccordance !1/ith the manufacturer's instruction, at all corners, stops, ioints, etc.as per directions of Engineer In-charge.

INTERNAL/EXTERNAL PLASTER

Where specified in the Drawings external surface shall have anauerage 112" thick plaster f inish UNO, consisting of a base coat of1:4 cement sand mortar in Grey cement UNO and the finish coat ofsmooth plastef as shown on the Drawings or called for in BOQ andas directed by the Engineer.

9 .

9 . '1

Where specified in the Drawings all internal plaster shall have anauercge 112" ihick UNO consisting of base coat of 1:3/1:4 cement

9.2

Stucco Plaster

sand mortar in grey cement UNO and finish coat of smooth piastershown on the Drawings or called for in BOQ and as directed byEngineer.

Wherever specified in the drawings external stucco plaster sconsist of 1:2, one paft white cement & 2 parts approved shademarble chips zero size mixed with approved pigment to achievedesired shade. Wherever shown on drawings, groves shall beprovided with aluminum UN channels. The contractor shall preparemockup samples of stucco plasier for the approval of Engineer. Tplastef shall be applied with machines and the final

t;\

9.3

09200-3

surface/texture/shade shall be as per the approved sample, directionand approval of the Engineer-lncharge.

,10, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

10.1 Rubbish and debris shall be removed as necessary to make wayfor work of other trades and as directed by the Engineer. As eachroom or space is completed all rubbish, debris, scaffolding and toolsshould be removed to leave the room clean.

Prior to plastering all aluminum windows, finished metalg should becovered by sheet of plastic or tarpaulin to protect it from damage.

Protect finished plaster from injury by any source. Contractor shall alsoprc tec t wa l l s , f l oo rs and work o f o ther t rades f romp las te r mate r ia l s .

10.2

10.3

11 . TOLERANCES

Surfaces of plaster work shall be finished with a true plane to correctl ine and level with all angle and corners to a right angle unlessotherwise specified and with walls and reveals plumb and square.

Maximum oermitted tolerances shall not exceed 1/8" in 6 feet variationfrom plumb or level in any exposed line or surface and 1/l6" variationbetween planes of abutting edges or ends.

09200-4

sEcTloN 09510

SUSPENDED CEILING

PART '1 - GENERAL

I.OI WORK INCLUDED

A. Scope: the work included in this Section consists of furnishing andinstalling acousticaltiles system wherever required indicated on drawingswith the following components and all necessary fasteners andaacessories.

'L Runner and cross tees, hangers and fastening devices.

2. Perimeter moldings.

3 Penets.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Suspended tile ceiling system shall consist of a 2ft x 2ft flat panel system.

B. The ceil ing system shall be ceil ing ti le suspended by means of a semi-exposed grld.

1.03 ENVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTS

A. The material shall be installed only in areas free of excessive humidity,Toyo rclatlve humidity 6o0F to 850F (150c to 290c), chemical fumes orvibration.

B. The materials should be pemitted to reach room temperature and havestabilized moisture content. They should not, however, be installed lnspaces where the temperature of humidity conditions vary greatly fromthe temperatures and conditions that will be normal in the occupiedspace.

C. All plastering concfete or any other wet work should be complete and dry.All windows and doorc should be in place. The heating, venti lating,and air-conditioning systems should be installed and operator wherenecessary to maintain proper temperatures before, during, and afterinstallation of suspended ceil ing material.

SUBMITTALS

A Samples of acoustical material and suspension members andmanufacture's literature for the proposed installation shall be submitted, inaccordance with Section 01340, to the Engineer for approval prior tocommenclng wofK.

09510-1

o

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Panels shall be patterned Gypsum Board with Aluminum lamination/foilon back or lvletal 2'x2', '1l2-inch thick, or as approved by the Engineer,

B. Tees Suspension system shall be G.l Steel minimum 18 Gauge thickfinished with white powder coated finish or Aluminum, direct hung toframing, or as approved by Engineer. Ffaming shall be '1 inch high and %inch wide.

C. Mouldings: Perimeter moulding shall be G.l Steel minimum 18 Guagethick angle moulding and tinished in exposed surface with white powercoated or Aluminum as approved by the Engineer

D. colour: Finish on grid shall be White or as approved by EngineerE. Wires: Hanger wires shall be No. 8 guage (4 mm), galvanized spaced @

18" c/c and at reduced spacing of '12" above the light fixtures.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Tees; Tee grid shall be installed true and level and to the patterns shownon the Drawings. Grid shall be tied to the required plane and to atolerance of 118" in '12 ft. Runner tees to be spaced not over 4 ft withcross tees not over 2 ft o.c.

Hangers and Mouldings: Hangers shall be 4 ft o.c maximum along themain runners with hangers set at each corner of all panels containing lightfixtures, Perimeter mouldings shall be installed at all locations whereacoustical ceilings are interrupted or about vertical surfaces.

PART 4 - METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A Measuremenls:-

All work shall be measured net as fixed with no allowance for cutting and waste,laps, seams, turning etc.

B. CLARIFICATION OF RATES

The Rates, Inter-alia, include particularly:

a. Fixing complete as specified in any position.b. All cutting and waste.c. Cutting holes for pipes, etc.d. Wooden frames, where provided shall be paid separately.

B.

09510-2

a sEcTtoN - 09700

FLOOR ANO WALL FINISHES

SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specification consists of furnishing all plant,labour, equipment, appljances and materials and performing all operations in anyfloor and at any height in connection with the installation of cement concretefloors and floor finishes including bases, skirting and external surface treatments,complete in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and theapplicable drawings and subject to the tems and conditions of the Contract.

SUBMITTALS

Contractor shall submit at least 3 range samples of all the items/each type ofstone/tile to be provided under this section showing colour, grade, finishing andtexture to the Engineer for approval. Contractor shall provide samples from eachspecified manufactufer and in sufficjent vafiation for each type of item. TheEngineer shall make his selection only when all related samples have beensubmitted and he is satisfied that the samDles submitted are the maximumrange available against any item. AII submittals shall be made as per thereouifements of section 0'1340.

MATERIAL

3.1 CEI\,'IENT

Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to B.S. '12 or PS232 as specifled in Section 03300.

3.2 SANDAll fine sand shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineef.The grading shall conform to B.S 882 Grading Zone I and 2 of which thegradation limits are as follows:Percentage (by weight) passing crading Zone I

B.S. Sieve3/8" (9.53 mm)

3/16" (4.765 mm)No.7No. '14N0.25No.52No. '100

3.3 COARSE AGGREGATE

Coarse aggregate shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel or crushedstone, angular or rounded in shape and shall have granulaf, cfystall ineor smooth surface free from friable, flaky and laminated pieces, micaand shale. lt shall not contain matters iniurious to concrete. All coarseaggregate shall conform to BOSS NO.882 and shall

100

90-10060-9530-7015-34

0-10

Grading Zone 2100

90-'10075-10055-9035-598-300-10

09700-1

a

3.4

3.5

3.6

B.S. Sieve1" (25.40 mm)3/4" ( 19.05 mm)3/8" ( 9.53 mm)3/16"(4.765 'r'r.|')

o/o Passing by weight100

90-10020-550-'10

The aggregate shall be stored on properly construcled paving or asdirected by the Engineer.

There shall be a physical partition between the stockpiles of coarse andfine aggregate. lf required aggregates shall, be washed and screened tothe satisfaction of the Engineer. Sieve analysjs of all the aggregates to beused in the works shall be carried out as and when required by theEngineer. All aggregate shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Any aggregates not found to be of the specified/approved standard shallbe rejected by the Engineer and all such rejected material shall beremoved from site without delay.

l-loors. sub-base or base constructed with rejected aggregates shall bedismantled and rebuilt at the expense of the Contractor.

BRICK BALLAST

Brick ballast to be used as soling shall conform to specifications of "StoneSoling".

WATER

Water used for mixing concrete, curing or any other opefation of theworks specified herein shall be fresh, clean and free from organic orinorganic fiatters in solutions or in suspension. Only water of theapproved quality shall be used for all constructional purposes:

CLEANING COMPOUND

The compound used for all cleaning of terrazzo shall be an approvedneutral chemical cleaner free from acid and alkali or any other materialthat will affect the colour or otherwise damaqe the terrazzo and shall notaffect the conductivity of terrazzo floors-

DIVISION STRIPS

Division strips shall be of marble or plate glass as approved by theEngineer. Standard division strips for floor finishes shall be not less than5mm (3/16") in thickness and shall not be less than '1-3/4" in depth.

3 .7

3,8 MARBLE CHIPS

Marble chips shall have an abrasive hardness of not less than 16,determined by the test of wear resistance in National BureauStandards Reports IVIBS 98. Size shall vary irom No. 0 to 8.

asof

09'700-2

r-00160

-:suoIBctJ|ceds 6utMollol olLU.TOJUOC lleqs pue s6un eJp uo paurceds se azs Jo eq lleqssalrl urelecJod sa.rnlceJnueur pe^ojdde oql ruo.rJ pezBlbunpue peuurnloc ̂l[Uenb unrure]d eq lleqs Saltl Utele3]od

'selduresrad sB LgZL Sg ol uroJuoc UEqs puB sbut^\eJp aqluo peurcsos se sezrs Jo eq llells sel[ aql .]arnpeJnueurpo^orooe eql Jo euo uro], poluuo ro paJnoloc/ elrqM ureld 'I)rlenb unruJojd 'lecol aq lleLls sel0 3rtleroC

zett

t eL e

s]]J- NIVISCUOd / Sf1tl3tU{VUtC €t e

regulouS aql ̂q peperp se ro s6uh eJp uou^4oqs se sezrs paurcads lo euols aphord lleqs ropeJluos eLtrI ssauplqlruJolun Jo aq lteqs secold llv )jlo/,^ oql noqono.l]l aJnuol pue e6uelrnolo3 luelsrsuos ornsue pue ̂$Bnb elouts e uo4 ed^l ouols qree ulelqo

'pepeleJ eq lleqs ouols peJalllea 4llv sacepns.reL.lleei\ ]o urol papunor uro{ aeJl eq llBr.ls ll .reqleeM aql ol ocuelsrse.lslr ̂o4ssp ol 6urpuol suorpaledUlt lo slcelep leJnlcntls Joqlo pue s)iceJc 'SuJeaS 'Uolle6a]6es 's^\eu 'sure^ uro{ ee{ puB 'alqeJnp pue punos'pJeLtr 'lcrJlsrc le qeqc punore pue u! seurenb uoJl elqelre^e ,(llecol'I]rlenb pa^oJdde lsoq eql Jo eq llBrls outppepAloM ourceJ roj ouots

9NtccvtcruoM 9Ntcvl uol lNol-s zLe'aleJcuoc

lueluec t;z:L ur eq lleqs elrl eql Jo oseq oqf .rnolo? pue azs ps olddelo sdtqc elq]eur luouree Z:L Jo pasodutoo sseqcrql ,,2/! jo oulddolozzerol uJnulullu e qlrM (unLrlrutul) sseulcrql ur ,,t/e aq llBqs pue ,,zLx,,zL aq llells salrl 1,09-sd ot burur]oluoc edlt passerduoc fllecrueqcaur'apeJb

]sJtl eq lleqs se|l ozz?.]]el eJaq^lesla esrrusqlo polou ssalun

slll1 ozzvuElt'ieeurOu! eql Iq pe^oldde pue JolceJluoC stll ̂q

pe]lrurqns eq ol eldues rod se oq llBqs apeqs pue.rnoloc 'ezrs ?filunocaql ur elqelre^e iltlenb lsaq peuodrlr oq llEqs leeqs/saltl llut^ cnd

sll|r 't NIn cnd'6urgnq

JouE ecelns eql uo u.rlrl paqsrutl ̂)p[s ro Alc?l e e^eal Jou ozzere]aql.rnolocslp lou lleqs leueleur o^tl?^rasaJd aql parl|ceds $e '6uunq Iqpeqsluu sr roolJ oql r?]}e srnoq 8l ilelE[rllxo.tdde 's]noq

z/I-z ]o pouod BJoJ eJnleJeduel tr.rooJ le reler Ur uorsraluur Iq peJledult eq lou lltl t{ctqMLlsJUlJ JOOJd--rele^l e a9nporo llEqs JOou ozze)rel Jol lueurleerl a^rle^lesald

tt e

0t 0

lVtUlIVt i lntIVAEtSfHd 6 e

t

I

Test DescriDtion Standard Test Method International StandardISO'13006:1998 (E)

Length & Width BS EN ISO 10545-2 +l- O.60/o

Thickness BS EN tSO 10545-2 +l- 5.0o/o

Rectangular Squareness BS EN tSO '10545-2 +t- 0.6%

Straightness of Sides BS EN tSO '10545-2 +L 0.5o/o

Suface Flatness BS EN tSO 10545-2 +l- 0.5%

WaterAbsorbtion BS EN tSO 10545-3 <=O.s%o

Modulus of Rupture : N/mm'? BS EN tSO 10545-4 >=35

Breaking Strenght BS EN tSO 10545-4 >= '1300 N

Resistance to deep Abrasion BS EN ISO 10545-6 <='17slMM3

Linear Thermal Expansion BS EN tSO '10545-8 < = 9 X 1 0 - 6 0 k 1

Thermal Shock Resistance BS EN tSO 10545-9 No visible defect

Frost Resistance BS EN tSO 10545-12 No visible damage

Resistance to Chemicals BS EN tSO '10545-13 No visible effect

Resistance to Stains BSEN tSO'10545-14 Manufacturer to State class

Color Resistance to UV light DtN 5'1094 No change in color 4// :y \'1

3.13.2.1\\!

Ceramic / Glazed tiles shall be of prime quality and ma)of olazed. olossv or mat finish of color. size and Dattern

\ /

!-..9:-'or gtazeo, gtossy or mat lntsn oI cotor, Ispecified and approved by the Engineer.

Acid Resistant Porcelain Lining Bricks shall be of priquality and make as approved by the Engineer and of i)

kl

3.13.4

09100-4

o of the following sizes and types as may be indicated in thedrawings/Bill of Quantities:

For flooring: I' x 4" x 314" or 112" thick, glozed of non-skid(NIat Finish).

For cove moulding: 3" wide x 4" long x 6'thick plain or glazed.For dado: 6" x 4 x 112" thick, plain orTiles

high, 112" ot 314"

glazed lndustrial

High Quality, vitrif ied ti les (15 or 20 mm thick) having highload bearing capacity, as manufactured by National TilesCeramics Limited or approved equivalent.

Joint Fil l ing

Joint Fil ler shall be while Fondant) Cement grout, whichshall bond to dry ti le, shall be non-shrinking, stain resistant,permanent in colour, and shall not inhabit fungus andbacterial growth. lt shall be odourless and nontoxic, ofsmooth consistency for easy preparation and neat, rapidInstallation, and shall contain non-metall ic material. Groutshall be water resistant and shall not wash out underwater.

Epoxy Adhesives and Joint Sealers

Epoxy ,a.dhesive and Joint Sealers shall be obtained fromSIKA,/FOSROC or any other approved manufacturer. DryBond from National Tiles B, Ceramics Limited or approvedequivalent may also be used. The ratio and application ofadhesives and sealers shall be as per the manufagturer'sdirections

Portland Cement

Portland cement shall be that manufactured in Pakistanconforming to the specifications set forth in Section-s.

Aggregate

Coarse & fine aggregate shall conform to ihe specificationsset fodh in Section-s.

Samples and Tests

Samples of all matedals consisting of actual tiles showingfull range of colours, texture & patterns available for eachtype & composition of tiles indicated shall be submitted tothe Engineer for approval and materials conforming toapproved samples be used throughout the work.

Rejected materials shall be removed from the immediately.Tests of materials, if required by the Engineer, shalldone at the cost of the Contract

a

3.'13.5

3 .1 3 .6

3.13.7

3 .13 .8

3 .13 .9

3 .13 . '10

T09700-5

o At least one approved sample each of all the materialsshall be kept at site the office Of the Engineer for reference& record.

3.I4 CEMENT CONCRETE TILE/PAVERS

Cement concrete tiles shall be of approved shade, shape and size,checkefed, mechanically vibrated and compressed type conforming toPS-531, as shown on the drawings and approved by the Engineer.Manufacturer of concrete tiles and pavers shall be subject to the approvalof the Engineer. Paving stones/ blocks shall be machine casted and shallhave average strength of 7000PS1 as per BS 6717 Part 1, 1993. Thetoping shall be rough monolithic made in natural grain texture ofpermanent finish. The product shall be abrasion resistant, anti-skid withgood inter locking arrangements. The paving stones / blocks and cobbledstones shall be product of reputed manufacturers, i.e. M/S Grand Works,M/S lzhar Ltd., M/S Tough Tiles or equivalent as approved by theEngineer.

3.'15 MARBLE AND GRANITE TILES

3.15.1 l\,4arble shall be compact, dense, metamorphic rock of lime stoneorigin from quarries in Pakistan. lt shall have specific gravity of about2.7 and density of 170 lbs. per Cft. lt must be evenly grained withsugarjar like appearance when broken.

Granite shall be of approved quality, colour and grain it may beimported or local as approved by the Engineer.

3 .15 .2 S ize & Th ickness

Generally marble or granite tile shall be of size and thickness asshown in the drawings or BOQ. The type of marble or granite shall beindicated in the drawings or BOQ.

315.3 l\/ lortar

a) The ratio or cement sand mortar far laying and embedding tile workshall be (1:3) and shall be of specified thickness as shown ondrawinos or as directed.

b) Epoxy Adhesive

Epoxy Adhesive shall be obtained from SIKA FOSROCapproved manufacturer. The ratio and application of dryshall be as per the manufacturer's directions.

3.15.4 Portland Cement

or any otnpono m

Portland cement shall be that manufactured in Pakistan conformthe specifications set forth in Section 03300.

Aggregatei

Course and fine aggregate shall conform to the specitications sein Section-5.

3 .15 .5

09700-6

3.15.6 Samples and Tests

The Contractor shall produce samples of marble tiles to be used forthis item of work for selection, testing and approval. The samples shallbe in finished sizes and shapes and adequate in number for testing inthe laboratory as and when ordered. The tests for marble shall be asDer ASTM Standards for the determination of:

Weight %age Al portionModulus of RuptureCompressive StrengthResistance to AbrasionFlexural Strength

ASTM C-97-47ASTM C-99ASTM C-l70ASTtVt C-24't-5'1ASTt\,t C-880-78

a

The Contractor may also be required to produce samples of finisheditem of tile work fixed in position before he is allowed to proceed withthe work on a particular item

3.'15.6 Quality of Marble / Granite Work

All Marble / Granite ti les shall be machine cut in proper dimensionswith following maximum tolerances for minimum size of 12"x12" ti le.

Thickness + 2mmWidth + I mmLength + 1 mmSurface + I mm

All the four angles of tile shall be exactly right angled (90 Degree) withsurface tolerance as stated above- For a specific area, tiles of similarshade and texture shall be used. All marble tiles shall be chemicallypolished while Granite shall be factory polished.

3.16 Artif icialStone

Artificial stone shall be of best quality, shade, color and textured size withhoned finish as per drawings and subject to the approval of Engineer.

EXECUTION

4.1 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORJNG

The materials for C.C flooring shallclause 3, "lvlaterials".

4.1.1 Composition of Concrete

be same as already specified un

Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, sand, coarse,aggregate and water, all well mixed and brought to the properconsistency. The Contractor shall, mix the ingredients as indicatedon the Drawings. The proportions of the various ingredients shallbe determined from time to time dudng the progress of the workand tests shall be made of samples of the aggregates and theresulting concrete. The mix proportions and appropriate water:cement ratio will be detemined on the basis of the production

4.

09700-7

o concrete having required workability, density, impermeability,durability and required strength.

4.'1.2 Mixing Concrete

The concrete ingredients shall be mixed in a batch mixer for notless than 1-112 minutes after all ingredients, except the full amountof water, are in the mixer. The Engineer reserves the right toincrease the mixing time when the charging and mixing operationsfail to produce a concrete batch in which the ingredients areunifomly distributed and the consistency is not uniform. Theconcrete shall be uniform in composition and consistency frombatch to batch except when changes in oomposition orconsistency are required. Water shall be added prior to, duringand following the mixer charge. Excessive over-mixing requiringaddition of water to preserve the required concrete consistencywill not be permitted. The concrete ingredients shall be mixed byvolumetric measurement in purpose made boxes approved by theEngineer.

4.1.3 Construction

The base coufse of the floor shall comprise of stone ballast of 2inches (approx: 50 mm) mesh size UNO or as showing ondrawings. The base course shall be thorqughly compacted bysuitable power rammers to the total consolidated thickness asshown on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Theinterstices shall be filled with smaller size stones. The base courseshall be blinded with send and the whole surface watered. Overthe well-compacted base course, a layer of concrete of therequired grade and thickness shall be laid, in panels of the sizesas indicated on the Dfawing and as approved by the Engineer.

After the C.C bed has been cured, as directed by the Engineer, itshall be roughened and well watered before floor finishing is laid.The floor finish shall comprise of cement concrete of requiredgrade and shall be laid in panels to the required thickness asshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Theconcrete after laying will be thoroughly rammed and mortarworked up to the top and smoothed with a steel trowel. The edgeof each section into which the floor is divided should be defined bywooden screeds of the approved width and of a depth equal to thecjepih of ihe floor concrete.

Freshly placed concrete floor and completed floor portions asfinished shall be protected to prevent loss of water by coveringwith damp hessian, water proof paper, damp sand or otherapproved material, and shall be kept constantly damp for a periodof four days or longer after concreting as directed by the Engineer.The concrete shall be allowed to dry out slowly over a pedod ofthree days after wet curing is completed.

The expansion joints shall be filled in with hot bitumen, of theapproved grade, as directed by the Engineer.

o

o09700-8

4.2 CEMENT NERU FINISHED FLOORING

The base concrete shall be laid in the manner and thickness oiven underspecifjcations for Tarries.

The bottom layer shall be brought to a level so that top layer shalt have aminimum thickness of 12mm. The bottom layer shall be thoroughlycompacted by tamping but shall not be finished smooth. While the bottomlayer is still plastic, the top layer shall be laid with light tapping for fivemtnutes.

After laying the topping the surface shall be covefed either with dampHessian cloth or wet soft wood saw dust and every precaution shall betaken to prevent it being subjected to defects of weather for ten to twelvedays.

TERRAZZO FLOORING

4.3 .1 Mix

The terrazzo mixes shall be composed by weight as follows:

Plain terrazzo for all floors and bases indicated as terrazzo and nototherwise specified, shall be composed of one part cement, whiteor grey, and 2 parts of marble chips of the sizes and colourshereinafter specif ied.

4.3.2 Preparation for'fefiazzo

The grade and thickness of concrete as shown on the Drawingsshall be laid as under bed to receive teffazzo. The surface of thebed shall be roughened for bounding with the terrazzo finish. If thesurface is too smooth it shall be roughened with a toothed chiseland, prior to laying the terrazzo the bed shall be cleaned of all dirt,oilgrease and extra loose material.

4.3.3 Division Strips

Terrazzo floors and bases shall be divided up by marble strips ofspecified thickness and depth. The division strips between fieldwork and borders shall have exposed tops in full width of the,strips The division stflps shall be set immediately after thespreading oi the under bed, the strips being partially embeddedtherein, securely anchored to the sub-floor and grouted solid-

All division strips shall be set, straight to lines and io the properlevel to ensure that the tops of the strips will show uniformly aftergrinding and smoothening operatjons are completed and jointsand intersections shall be fitted tight. Strips shall be braced toprevent bulging during the placing of terrazzo.

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, thework of large areas shall not exceed 4 feet x 4

divisions in fieldfeet and in small

reas shall not exceed 2 feet x 2 feet.

jging stdps shall be placed at doorways between terrazzo andher types of floofing and along the edges ol all lerazzo baseg.6

borders and adjoining other types of floor finishes or

4 .3

o

r)'eV*09700-9

o

covering. The edging strips at doorways shall be placed in linewith the step face of doors. All edging strips shall be anchored andgrouted solid in the under bed or to the concrete sub-floor andbraced to prevent bulging as specified for division strip.

4.3.4 LayingTetrazzo

The sub-surface shall be swept clean, thoroughly moistened, butnot saturated, and slushed with a coatlng of neat cement groutapproximately 1/8" in thickness. The under bed consisting of class'C' cement concrete screed shall be spread and brought to a levelnot less than 3/4" below the finished floof level. The dividing stripsshall be installed in the gfeen under bed. The terrazzo mix shallbe spread, tamped and rolled into a compact mass not less than3i4" thick. After rolling additional aggregate mix shall be sprinkledover the surface to fill up all depressions, to take irp excessmoisture and to permit the terazzo lo be trowelled to a level,dense and even surface, slightly above the finish line of floor. Thislevel, shall allow for the surface grinding necessary to expose thespecified area of aggregate, and to produce smooth, level floorsfree ofwaves and depressions.

4.3.5 Seasoning

The completed terrazzo shall be allowed to season for 6 daysduring which time it shall be kept moist by (1) covering withapproximately 'l" thickness of sand; or (2) covering with buildingpaper or mats; or (3) sprinkling with water at every 10 hour

.interval.4.3.6 Surface

Following the curing pe od, the terrazzo shall be machine groundto a true, even surface using a No. 24 grit followed by a No. 80 gritor finer abrasive stone. After the first grinding, the floors shall bethofoughly grouted with the same cement and colour compositionas specified for the matrix of the terrazzo mix. The grout shall beof the consistency of thick cream, and shall be brushed over thefloor to eliminate all pits and thoroughly flll the surface for finalgrinding.

4.3.7 Finishing

Not less than 72 hours after application, the grouting coat shall beremoved by grinding. In the later stages of grinding, the grit stonesor other abrasive used in the grinding machine shall be of a grainor fineness that will give the surface smooth finish. Small areas,inaccessible portions and corners which cannot be reached by thegrinding machine shall be ground and rubbed by hand.

4.3.8 Protection

The walls and all surfaces of the finished work of other trades shallbe properly protected from damage and spoiling during theprocess of grinding and washing of the teffazzo. After the finishrinding has been completed and the surface treatmeni appljgd;-.

terrazzo work shall be covered and orotected with m

09700-10Aq

o

approved by the Engineer until completion of the work of all otherIraoes.

4.3.9 Cleaning and Coating

Prior to placing the protective covering, the terrazzo floor shall beapproved by the Engineer. After the work of all other trades hasbeen completed and the protective covering rernoved, all letrazzowork shall be washed with cleaning compound, mixed with warmwater and using a fine abrasive where necessary to remove anystains or cement smears. The teffazzo ghall be allowed to drythoroughly and shall be given a sealing application of preservativematerial. The sealing material shall be applied in accordance withthe manufacturer's directions, leaving all telazzo woR in cleancondition as approved by the Engineer.

4.3.10 Dado/Skirting

The ingredients of dado/skirting shall be one part of cement andtwo parts of marble chips varying from Nos, zero to 2. Strikingshall be laid over a base of plaster of specified thickness. Thethickness of dado/skirting layef shall be as specified. The surfaceshall be grinded and polished to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

4.4 TILE FLOORING

When setiing out the tiles, care shall be taken to establish the corectelevation for the floor. A gauge fod shall be used, indicating the overallmeasurement of a given number of tiles with specified joint width toreduce cutting.

After the floor has been machine finished, it should be covered with white,non-staining sand or rags to protect it while other work is being done-After removal, the floor shall be thoroughly scrubbed.

4.4.'1 General

The base shall be prepared by laying cement concrete of specifiedgrade and of thickness as shown on the drawings, or specified inthe Bil l of Quantit ies.

The curing pedod of the setting bed shall be as directed by theEngineef. As large an area of setting bed shall be spread at onetime as can be covered with tiles before the mortar has set-Surplus mortar shall be removed. The thickness of setting bed inanv soace shall not be less than 1/2".

Floor and wall surfaces to receive the tiles shall be thoroughlycleaned of all dirt, dust, oil and other objectionable matters. Tilesshall be laid out from the center line of each space in an outwarddirection and the pattern should be made symmetdcal with aminimum number of cut t i les as directed by the Engineer.

09700-11

O

Joints between the tiles shall be of uniform width. Tiles shall becut with a suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbedsmooth. Tiles shall be laid to the straight edges.

4.4.2 Cement Concrete Tiles

Ihe cement concrete tiles shall be laid to the required lines, levelsand grades over a setting bed of cement sand mortar comprisingof I part of cement and 4 parts of sand by volume.

The sides shall be buttered with cement mortar and adjacent tileslaid in the same manner in the required pattem, with a lhin joint inproper level and line. The joints shall then be thoroughly cleanedwith wire brush and pointed with neat cement of the same colouras the ti le.

Care shall be taken to see that full tiles are used as far aspossible. Where this is not possible, the edge tiles shall be neatlycut with an electric saw and the edges rubbed smooth. In case ofpatterned tiles, the tiles shall be laid in such a way that the paiternends symmetrically on two sides.

Cement concrete tiles shall be cured for 7 days with water andthen thoroughly cleaned and dried. Notwithstanding anythingwritten above, the manufacturer's printed instructions regardinglaying shall be strictly followed.

4.4.3 CefamicTiles/PorcelainTiles

The ceramic tiles/porcelain tiles shall be laid to the required lines,levels and grades over a setting bed of cement sand mortarcomprising of one part of cement and 4 pads of sand by volumeand the joints filled with neat white/pigmented cement includingvertical and horlzontal covers. The tile tloor shall be kept wet for atleast 72 houfs and no traffic should be allowed on the tiles duringcuring Period.

Surfaces to receive the ceramic tiling shall be clean and free ofdirt, dust, oil, grease or other objectionable matter. Setting bedsand tile shall be installed with their resDective surfaces to trueplanes, level of pitched to off-sets as required by the drawings, sothat the surface of the completed tiling work will be at theelevations and grades shown. Retempering of mortar will not bepermitted. Tiles shall be laid out from the center lines of eachspace outward adjustments made along walls, partitions andborders, if any, so as to symmetrize the pattern with a minimumcut tiles.

Joint between tiles shall be of uniform width and the same as thetile installed Fractional changes in dimensions without varying theuniformity of joini widths be permitted. Tile shall be cut with asuitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbed smooth.

a

,".t*. '- -

r. CuFtile misfits shall be laid to the straight edges. Straight edgesf*"'. - \ shall be accuratelv set to the lines established and mat at suitable'g"( intervals to keep the joints parallel over the entire area.

.f,ry\E-l r ' i 1.6\ ..,-.t ,ti At\Kg\1i--,' osToo-12 ,,\r--....ri

o

Over the existing bed a topping of 1-112'thick PCC 1:2:4 shall belaid. Scratch mats for aDplication as foundaUon coats shall not beless than 5/8" thick and shall be composed by Volume of 1 partGrey Portland Cement to 3 parts dry sand, mixed with theminimum amount ofwater necessary to produce a workable mass.Mortar for scratch coats shall be used within one hour after mixingand re-tempering will not be permitted. Scratch coats shall beapplied in sutficient quantity and with sufficient pressure to coverthe entirc area and 'ln good keys, it shall be deeply scoured orscratched and cross- scratched, it shall be protected and keptmoist during the curing period. Scratch coats shall be thoroughlydamp'cured, and an interval of not less than 24 hours and notmore than 48 hours shall be permitted between application ofscratch coats and application offloat coats.

Float coats shall be composed by volume of I part Grey Portlandcement to 2 parts dry sand, mixed with a minimum amour of waternecessary to produce a workable mass. Float coats shall beapplied in sufficient quantity to entire area and to form a good keyshall brought out flush with the temporary screeds or guide stripsso placed as to give a true even surface at the proper distancefrom the finish suitable for reception of tiles.

Joints shall be straight, level perpendicular and of even widththroughout. Vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the entireheight of the tile work. Each tile shall be brought to true level andplane by uniformly applied pfessure under a straight edge orrubber-faced block. Tiles that are out of true plane or misplacedshall be removed and reset. Damaged or defecti,.,e tile shall bereplaced. The ti le shall be installed as follows: -

Wall tile shall be set by troweljng a skim coat of neat PortlandCement on the float coat or by applying a skim coat to the back ofeach tile unit and immediately floating the tile into place. After tilehas set remove moftar using. a minimum of waler. Replacedamaged ti les.

After the tiles have been thoroughly set, joints shall be grouted fullwiih a plastic mix of neat, white cement immediately after asuitable area of tile has been set. The joints shat) be struck flushand excess mortar shall he cut off and wiped from the mortarjoints after grout has been cleaned from the surface shall beroughened at once and filled flush with the tile edge, before themortar begins to hafden. Tile skjrting and coves shall be solidlybacked mortar.

Ties shall be fit closely to electrical ouflets, piping, fixtures & otherpenetfation so plates collars or covers overlap tiles.

At dado, tiles shall be laid in grids, pattern, unless otheMiseindicated. Joints shall be aligned when adjoining tiles on floors,base, walls and trim are the same size. Tile work shall be laid outand center tile fixed in both direotions in each space or on eachwall/floor area. Adjustments shall be made to minimize cutting.Uniform joint width shall be provided unless otherwise indicated.

i;.r{)

09700-13

a To prevent adhesive or staining of exposed tile surfaces by Grout,a temporary pre-coating of e continuous film of protective coatingindicated below can be applied:

Petfoleum paraffin wax, applied hot.Grout release.Kraft paper.

The colour variation shall be in ranges selected during samplesubmittals and acceptable to the Engineer and special care shallbe taken while jnstalling in any single enclosed area, as perinstructions of the Engineer. At all vertical & horizontal corners,the edges of the toes shall be grind & cut at 45' to achieve proper& perfect joint marring visible: side, surface of tiles. Before finalinspection, protective coatings shall be removed & neutral cleanershall be rinsed from tile surface. The finished work shall be clean& free of cracked chipped, broken, un-bonded & otherwisedefective tile works. Tiles with any of the above defects in anyarea shall be removed and changed immediately.

ln Thin Set Mortar

Tiles laid in Thin Set Dry Bond lvlortar shall be applied as perdetails shown on drawings and shall consist of a P.C.C. base olspecified thickness. Tiles shall be set. by troweling a skin coat ofDry Bond Mortar on the base coat and combed with a notchededge of trowel. Back butter each tile unit to ensure 100% mortarcoverage and float the tile into place, tapping the tile to ensuremaximum bond strength. All other installation requirements' shallbe as pef specifications mentioned in part [a] above.

Using Epoxy Adhesive

A layef of Sika Tjle Fix 15 or approved equal be applied over theprepared surface as pef instructions of the manufacturer. The joint

lvlarble / Granite tiles of appfoved size, colour, texture and qualityshall be spread on floor and water be sprinkled for visibility ofactual shade/colour of the marble Wes. Tiles with variations inshade/colours, cracks, broken edges, defective spots/holes,venation in texture or any other defect unacceptable to theEngineer shall be taken out as rejected and removed from site.Only approved tiles shall be used in works.

The Contfactor shall employ Ekilled and trained tile workers fordoing this job. He may be allowed to employ an approvedspecialist alb-Contractor for this item of work. The surface overwhich the tiles are required to be fixed will be clean of all dirt anddust and should be properly hacked so that the mortar sticksto the surface. The edge of the tiles shall be dressed true

o)

a(a)

(b)

width in floors shall be as per instructions of the Engineer and tlffii-...gap shall be fi l led with Sika Tile Grout (White) or any oW):- ' ! \approved equivalent with matching colour.

(!(

\\? \4.4.4 l\ilarblelcranite Flooring \w6.it

09700-14

a

square by rubbing them with caborundum stone or any otherapproved means and the same will be fixed in position.

The marble ti les on wall shall be laid in Sika Tile Fix 15 adhesiveor any other approved shall be applied as per manufacturer'srecommendations. Tile shall be allowed to season for at leastthree days during which it shall be kept moist.

Due allowance shall be made for movement of the structure andbacking by including construction and expansion joints in the ti lework. These should be properly filled with app owed masticcompound. Expansion joints shall be formed to coincide with theexpansion joints in the building.

Over the prepared surface each tile shall then be set individuallyover the adhesive and worked by tapping tiles gently with awooden mallet. The tiles shall be laid in pattern as per drawingand instructions of the Engineer and joints, width shall bra fixedaccordingly and in no case shallvary.

Tight joints for marble / Granite work should not exceed 1/8" Thejoints shall be grouted Sika Tile Gfout or any other grout approvedequal as per manufacturer's recommendations in matchingcolours. The joints must be all in the lines running straight fromroom to foom, room to passage, etc, and Ior this purpose piecesof tiles may have to be used at edges. Tiles shall be set -evenlyand the 4 corners of each tile shall meet flush with the adjoining 4corners of the tiles. The whole of the floodno shall be true to leveland grades where required.

Laying of tiles in any pattern shall begin from centre of the area sothat the opposite side will require the same number of tile and theborder design may work symmetrically.

The colour variation shall be in ranges selected during samplesubmittals and acceptable to the Engineer and speci. ' l care shallbe taken while installing in any single enclosed area as perinstructions of the Engineer.lf tiles have become dilly, they s is ii be washed with washingsoda. The surface shall be cuvgrind, repaired, grind again andchemically polished . to full gloss to the satisfaction of theEngineer.

Marble slabs be used in lieu of marble tiles where indicated.

Granite slabs shall be used in lieu of Granite tiles where indi

Final Finish

The Contractor shall make suitable arrangement for giving fif inish to the ti le works such as cleaning, washing and polishingspecified.

The marble shallbe polish finished (Chemical polish) to a surfacethat will reflect light to emphasize the colour and marking. Allfinished surfaces shall be of uniform texture. colourappearance and shall be within the sample approved. Al

09700-15

t shall be made forother methods toacceptable limits.

4.4.5 Concrete Pavers

exerting of all necessary controls, botching orensure uniformity in quality of stone within

o

Concrete pavers shall be laid in-accordance with the instructlonsof the manufacturer over a cushion of sand. The pavers will belaid as per the instructions of the Engineef. The layout shall be asper approved design. The exposed face of all paving stones shallhave the smooth finish, shall be kept clean and free from anyexternal matter. Where ever streaks are formed these shall bewashed off immediately and shall not be allowed to harden.Horizontal and vertical joints shall be parallel and smooth. Thethickness of the joints shall be approximately '13 mm.

4.4.6 Terrazzo Tiles Flooring

Apply cement slurry coat over surfaces of concrete substrateimmediately prior to placing setting bed which shall comprisecement sand mortar '1:2 and shall be 1" thick and shall be spreaduniformly. Limit area of application to avoid premature drying out.Set tiles before initial set occurs. Apply a thln layer of cementpaste to bottom of each unit. Set tamp and level units immediatelyso that cement mortar slurry rises up in the joint. Set units inrequired pattern as specified and as per the instructions of theEngineef with uniform joint widths. The levels and lines shall bechecked with very fine twine and the defects removedimmediately. After the ti les have init ially set, the joints shall beraked out and coloured cement of required shade shall be spreadin the form of slurry to fill all joints. Force grout into joints, strike{lush and tool slightly concave. Remove mortaf and grout fromsurfaces while still moist and as the work progresses. The surfaceafter drying (minimum of seven days) shall be machine grinded toa true even surface using various grades of abfasive stones asrequired and directed by the Engineer. Aftef the first grinding thefloor shall be grouted with the same colour composition as usedfor its manufacture, to a consistency of thick cream and shall bebrushed ovef the floor to fill in the joints and after 72 hours thegrouting coat shall be removed by grinding till a smooth and evensurface is obtained. and chemically polished.

The tiles shall be cut wherever required with a suitable cutting tooland rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. The finished surfaceshall not show any depressions in individual t i les or anyundulations in the floor.

Do not permit traffic on finished surface fof a minimumhours.

4.4.7 PVC Vinyl Ties

The base shall be prepared as per thickness shown on dkeeping the margin of tile thickness. After the base is cured,irreoularities found on the base shall be filled in and leveled bo

09700-16

5.

the application of tiles. Surface to recejve tiles shall be thoroughlycleaned of all dirt, dust, oil and other objectionable matter.Approved manufactureas recommended adhesive shall be appliedas per specifications and in quantities recommended by him. Tilesshall be laid starting from one side of the room or as per theinstructions of the Engineer and shall be so pressed that completeadhesion takes Dlace.

Tiles shall be cut where required with suitable cutting tool andrough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Tiles shall be laid to straightedges as per approved pattern.

MEASUREIMENT AND PAYIMENT

5.'1 GeneralExcept otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the ContractDocuments, no measurement and payment will be made for the undermentioned specified works related to the relevant items of the Bill ofQuantities.

The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the auoted unitrate of the respective items ofthe Bill of Quantities.

5.1.1 Loss and wastage of material due to oonsolidation, erosion andsettlement.

5 .1 .2 of joints (expansion, contraction and construction joint

5.'1.3 Class 'C' cement concrete screed base and 1:4 cement sandmortar under terrazzolbrick on edge floor and skiding/dado etc.

5.1.4 Finishing/grinding, washing & polishing works of ceramic, concrete,lefiazzo tile,lercazzo floors and marble tiles.

5.'1.5 Marble strips in terrazzo floors

5.1 .6 1:2 and 'l:4 cement sand rough cast plaster.5.'1.7 Sand cushion under concrete pavers

5.1.8 Adhesives used in the laying of PVC flooring.

5.2 Cement Concrete Floor

5.2.'1 lvleasurement

l\,4easurement of acceptably completed works of cement concretefloor steel trowelled finish will be made on the basis of net actualarea in square feet or net area in cubic feet laid in position asshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

b.z.z tsaymenlPayment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofcement concrete floor steel trowelled finish on the basis of unitrate per square feet or cubic feet quoted in the Bills of Qu

All typeerc_).

09700-17

5.3

and shallthe item.

Ceramic Tile and

Cement Concrete Tile Floor/Pavers

5.6.'1 Measurement

lvleasuielnentti le in floor wil l

constitute full compensation for all the works related to

marble / Granite Floor

5.3.1 Measurement

lvleasurement of acceptably completed works of ceramic tile infloor will be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet offloor laid in position as shown on the drawing or as directed by theEngineer.

5.3.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofceramic tile floor on the basis of unit rate per squaie feet quoted inthe Bil ls of Quantit ies and shall constitute full compensation for allthe works related to the item.

5.4 Ceramic Tile Dado

5.4.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of ceramic tite indado will be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet ofdado laid in position as shown on the Drawing or as directed bythe Engineer.

5.4.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measufed quantity of ceramictile in dado on the basis of unit rate per square feet quoted in theBills of Quantities. The unit rate shall include all cost of cement,sand, mortar and shall constitute full compensation for all theworks related to the items.

Cast in place Terrazzo, Skirting and Dado

5.5.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of cast-in-placelerrczzo floot, skirting and dado, respectively will be made on thebasis of net actual area in square feet of floor, riser and tread laidin posiiion as shown on the drawing or as directed by theEngineer.

5.5.2 PaymentPayment will be made for acceptable measured quantity oftnplace lenazzo floor, skirting and dado, on the basis of unitper square feet quoted in the Bills of Quantities andconstitute full compensation for all the wo*s related to the it

5.5

o

cast-rate

shall

of acceptably completed works of cemento be made on the basis of net actual area in

09700-18

5.6

nY j(

o feet of floor laid in position as shown on the Drawing or asdirected by the Engineer.

5.6.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofcement concrete tile in floor on the basis oi unit rate per squarefeet quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for allthe works related to the item.

5.7 PVc Tile

5.7.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of PVC tile in floorwill be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet of floorlaid in position as shown on the Drawjng of as directed by theEngineer.

5.7.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of PVCtile in floor on the basis of unit rate per square feet quoted in theBills of Quantit ies and shall consti iute full compensation for all theworks related to the item.

5.8 STONE FOR FACING WORK/CTADDING

5.8.1 Measurement

Measurement of acceptably completed works of stone for facingwill be made on the basjs of net actual afea in square feet of walllaid in position as shown on the Drawing or as difected by theEngineer.

5.8.2 Payment

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of stonefor facing on wall on the basis of unit rate per square feet quotedin the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation forall ihe works related to the item.

09700-19

sEcTtoN - 09900

PAINT AND COATING

1 . SCOPE

The work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing allmaterials, plant, labour, equipment, appliances and performing all operations inany floor and at any height in connection with surface preparation, mixing,painting concrete works, gates, frames, walls, ceilings and all such surfaces,architectural textured coatings, as shown on the Drawings and/or as difected bythe Engineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailedspecifications as laid down herein.

SUBMITTALS

Samples of all colors/textures and finishes shall be prepared inadvance of requirement so as not to delay work and shall be submittedto the Engineer fof approval before any work is commenced. Any workdone withor]t such approval shall be redone to the Engineefssatisfaction, without additional expense to the Employer. Samples ofeach type of paint/textured coating shall be on separate 12" x '12" x 1/8"tempered hard board panels. lvlanufacturer's chart showing all thevariety of paint/textures shall be submitted for colour/texture selection.

The Engineer will furnish a schedule of colours/textures for each areaand surface. All colours shall be mixed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions-

MATERIALS

Except as otherwise specified, all painting shall be applied inconfomity with BS CP 231 "Painting of Building" as applicable to thework. All materials shall be acceptable, pfoven, first grade productsand shall meet or exceed the minimum standards of reDutablemanufacturers as approved by the Engineer

Colours shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew-proof sun-proof,finely ground in approved medium. Colours used on'plaster andconcrete surfaces shall be lime proof. All materials shall be subject tothe Engineer's approval.

All synthetic ename! paints and primers for structural steel works,metal work and wood works will be the best available of its tvDe andshall be approved by the Engineer prior to its procurement.

Approved quality Weather Shieldnr'Veather Coat paint shall bepainting the exteriors of the structures or other sudacesspecified on the drawings as directed by the Engineer.

The plastic emulsjon painttuinyl emulsion paint or similar as appby the Engineer shall be used for interior surfaces.

Texture coating wherever specified shall be acrylic resin basedcoatjng composed of acrylic copolymers, natural quartz, naturalmarble chips, metallic oxides, antibactefial and antifungal additivesand expanders, foaming and setting agents and shall be applieaccordance with apDroved manufacturer's recommendations.

2.1

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4.iLl! *

o:j

3.6

09900-1

o

3.7 All materialfor Bitumen painting shall consist of Bitumen grade 10/20It shall be used for foundations or wherever recommended by theEngineer. The rate of application in foundations shall not be less than20 lb/100 Sft. each coat.

3.8 Only paints manufactured by lcl or Berger shall be used in thisProject.

All material shall be delivered to site in their original unbrokencontainers or packages & shall bear the manufacturer's name, label,brand & formula & will be mixed and applied in accordance with hisdirections.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Paints/coatings shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers, which plainlyshow tree type of paint, oolour (formula or specifications number) batch number,texture, quantity, date of manufacture, name of manufacturer and instructions foruse. Pigmented paints shall be supplied jn containers not larger than 20 liters. Allmaterials shall be stored under cover in a clean storage space, which should beaccessible at all times to the Engineer. lf storage is allowed inside the buildang,floors shall be kept clean and free ffom paint spillage.

EXECUTION

Except as otherwise specified all concrete and plastered surfaces are to bepainted/coated.

5.1 SURFACEPREPARATION

5.1.1 All oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale and any other foreignsubstance shall be removed {rom the surface to bepainted/coated, polished and white washed by the use of asolvent and clean wiping material. Following the solventcleaning, the surfaces shall be cleaned by scrapping, chipping,blasting, wire brushing or other effective means as approvedbY the Engineer.

ln the event the surfaces become otherwise contaminated inthe interval between cleaning and painting/coating, re-cleaningwill be done by the Contractor at no additional cost.

Surfaces of stainless steel, aluminum, bronze, and machinedsurfaces adjacent to metal work being cleaned or painted shall

5 .1 .2

5 .1 .3

be protected by effective masking or other suitableduring the cleaning and painting operations.

5 .1 .4 All the surfaces to be painted/coated with approved qpaint/coat shall be free from dust, dirt, fungus, lichen, algaOil paint, varnish and lime wash should always be remscraping and washing.

5.'1.5 All surfaces to be bitumen painted shall be thoroughly cleanedof any accretion, dust, dirt etc. by scraping, wire-brushing or asdirected by the Engineer. The surface shall be pdmedcoat of asphalt oil used at the rate of not less than 1 gal'100 square foot of area.

09900-2

o

5.2 .

No work in this section shall be allowed until all surfaces orconditions have been inspected and approved by the Engineer'

APPLICATION

5.2.1 All paint and coating materials shall be in a thoroughly mixedcondition at the time of applicatlon. All work shall be done in aworkman like manner, leaving the finished surface free fromdrips, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. All paints shall beapplied under dry and dust free conditions, Unless approved bythe Engineef paint shall not be applied when the temperature ofthe metal or of ihe surrounding ait is below 7 degreescentigrade. Surfaces shall be free from moisture at the time ofPainting.

All primary paint shall be applied by brushing. The first coat ofpaint shall be applied immediately after cleaning, When paint js

applied by spraying, suitable measures shall be taken to preventsegregation of the paint jn the container during paintingoPeration-

Effective means shall be adopted for removing all free oil andmoisture from the air supply lines of the spraying equipmentEach coat of paint shall be allowed to dry or harden thoroughlybefore the succeeding coat is applied.

Surfaces to be painted that will be inaccessible after installationshall be completely painted priof to installation.

Coats of Weather ShieldMeather Coat paint and texturedcoatings shall be applied in accordan@ with the manufacturefsinstructions or as directed by the Engineer.

Fof painting only as much material should be mixed as can beused up in one hour. Over-thinning will not be permitted Afterthe first coat the surfaces will be soaked evenly fouf or five timesand the second coat shall be applied after leaving for at leastovernight.

5.2.2 Where shown on Dfawings all exterior f inishes shall bepainted/coated with Weather Shield/weather coat paint ortexture coated in approved colours/textures as permanufacturer's specifications. The number of coats shall be asshown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

All wooden doors shall be painted with approved syntheticenamel paint or lacquer polished as per manufacturer'srecommendation and instructions or after approval of theEngineer.

5.2.4 Plastic emulsion paint, vinyl emulsion paint or matt enamel paintof the approved make and shade shall be applied to surfaces asshown on Drawings as per manufacturer's instructions Thenumber of coat shall be as indicated on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.

09900-3

5.2 .5

5.3 JOB CONDITIONS

Two coats of hot bitumen paint shall be applied to exposedconcrete surfaces in contact with earth. The first coat shall beallowed to dry for about six hours before applying the secondcoat. During the operation of painting great care should be takento avoid air bubbles. The manufacturers instructions andEnginee/s directions shall be complied with.

The Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damaged ordefective areas of shoo-oainted metal work and structural steelwork. Metal surfaces against which concrete is to be placed willbe shop-painted and shall be cleaned prior to being embeddedrn concrele.

observe manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximumtemperature but do not apply paint or finish to any surfaceunless ambient temperature is 10 degfee C or above and lessthan 43 degree C. No painting shall be done above 90% relativehumidity.

Place drop cloths to adequately protect all finished work.

Remove and replace all items of finish hardware, device plates,accessories, lighting fixtures or other removable items.

ln no case shall any finish hardware or other finished item that isalready fitted into place be painted, unless otherwise specified.

5.3.2

5.3.3

5.3.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

All painvcoat for any one surface shall be top quality, of one manufacturer andapproved by the Engineef. Deep tone accent colours shall be used and theunavailability of final coat colours may be the basis for rejecting materials for anyone surface.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7.'lo General

Exceot otherwise specified herein or elsewhefe in Contract Documents,no measurement and payment will be made for the under mentionedspecified works related to the relevant items oi the Bill of Quantities. Thecost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted unitrate of the respective items of Bill of Quantities.

The rates quoted by the Contfactor in the Bill of Quantities shall includework to be executed under these specification in any floor and at anyheight except where otherwise specifically stated in the relevant item ofBill of Quantities and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim orclaim any compensation on this account.

Painting

7.1.1 Preparatofy works, including preparatoscratching,protectionoffinished works etc.

sand blasting, deaninvfinished works etc tf$"2

7 .2

09900-4

materials,

o

7.1.2 Polishing works, including preparatory materials,cleaning, sanding etc.

7.1.3 Painting work on steel & wooden surfaces.

7.2.1 l\/easurement

lvleasufement of acceptably completed respective type of paintingworks will be made on the basis of net actual areas in square feetof the surface painted as shown on the Drawings or as directed bythe Engineer.

7 .2.2 Paymenl

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity ofrespective type of painting on the basis of unit rate per square feetquoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute fullcompensation for all the works related to the item.

a09900-5

1 ,

sEcTtoN - 10100

FIBRE GLASS WORKS

SCOPE OF WORK:

The work covered under this section of specification consists of supplying andfixing of Fibre Glass, cleaning providing all labour, tools, appliances, material,transport and the performance of all operations required for the properinstallation of the Fibfe Glass as specified and shown in the drawings, or asinstructed by the Engineef.

FIBRE GLASS:

The Fibre Glass used in various locations shall be as indicated in the drawings,and shall conform to BS-952: '1964.

Fibre Glass Sheet shall be of thickness and size shown on the Drawing EachFibre Glass Sheet shall be bedded with a thin layer of good quality material asapproved by the Engineer and should be fixed securely screwed.

INSTALLATION:

Samples of Fibre Glass must be approved by the Engineer before its installation,and shall be cut to required sizes, and the edges smoothed before installation.

All Fibre Glass Sheets shall be watertight on completion. Edge clearance shall beequal all around each pane, and not less than 3mm.

All sun-facing Fibre Glass Sheets shall be washed properly with drinking water torender them free form any greasy water. Solar control film shall be applied oncleaned sheets by authorized seryicemen for this work as approved by theEngineer. The film shall be applied on the Fibre Glass before it is fixed at itsappropriate place. The film shall be applied with approved adhesive in such away that no air bubble is left between the Fibre Glass and film and clarity is notaffected.

The Contractor shall make good at his own cost, all Fibre Glass Sheets brokenby his wo*men while cleaning or carfying out other operations. On completion ofthe Fibre Glass work, all Sheets shall be cleaned at Contractor's expense.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

The cost of all the Fib{e Glass works involved within the scope of this section ofspecifications as per all the drawings and condition so contract are covered onlywithin the quoted rate of items of the Bill of Quantities.

4,

o10100-1

sEcTtoN - 15100

WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

1. GENERAL

Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of water supply system, including pipes,accessories, valves, etc., as specified in other sections and herein: as shown on draw-ings and instruction of Consultanu Engineer.

2, MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION

2.'l Galvanized lron Pipe Work

The galvanized pipes shall conform to British Standard 1387 Specifjcations for "SteelTubes and Tubular suitable for screwing to B.S. 21 pipe threads". Pipe of' l /2" to 2-1/2" diameter may be of medium quality, l lL or KPM make.

All screwed pipes and sockets shall have B.S. pipe thread in accordance with B.S.21. In order to prevent damage to the leading thread, the ends of the sockets shallbe chamfered internally. A complete and uniform adherent coating of zinc will beprovided for galvanized pipes.

Every pipe length shall be tested at the manufacturer's place to a hydraulic testpressure of 483 N/cm square (700 lb./sq.in) and shall be maintained at the testpressure sufficiently long for pfoof and inspection.

Pipes which are bundled shall be secured together by rope or soft iron or othersuitable material. The threads of all pipes shall be effectively covefed with a goodquality grease or other suitable compound, and each pipe above 50 mm (approx.: 2")nominal bore shall have a protecting ring affixed to the unsocketed screwed end.

All pipe fitt ings up to 3" dia. shall conform to B.S. 21 and shall be of malleable castiron.

Unions and flanges should be furnished and installed at each threaded or f langedconnection to all equipmeni or valves. The faces of flanges being connected shouldbe alike in all cases. Unions and flanges should be located so that pipe can be easilydisconnected fof removal of equipment, valve or tank. The run and arrangement ofall pipes shall be as shown on the drawings and as directed during installation. Allvertical pipes shall be erected plumb and shall be parallel to wall and other pipes. Allhorizontal runs of piping shall be kept close to walls. lf required to change thelocation etc. during the currency of the work, the Contfactor will do so at noadditional cost.

Screwed joints in G.l. pipes shall be made perfectly tight, without the use of any fillerexcept approved jointing compound or tape, wherever required to make flangedjoints, they shall conform to B.S. 10 Table D.

Suitable and substantial number of hangers, supports and clamps of approved typeand make shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical_piping:l'lq{zontal pipingslrall be supported in the following manner:

15100-1

Pipe Size Maximum Spacing of Hanger Rod Size.

(dia in mm) (meters) (mm)

'15-50 9.5

65-100 3.0 13.0't50 4.0 13.0

Hangers shall be supported from approved concrete inserts in concrete slab Nopiping shall be hung from the piping of other systems. Long radius bends shall beused wherever possible.

Furnish and install all pipe passing through walls with sleeves of G.l. sheet 18 gauge,the inside dia, of which shall be at least 112" grcalet lhan the outside of the pipepassing through it. Sleeves in exterior walls and pits shall have anchor flanges andspace between pipe and sleeve shall be caulked water-tight. All pipes passingthrough floors shall be provided with 18 gauge G.l. sheet sleeves properly anchoredto the floor. At water proof locations, and approved waterproot type pipe sleeve shallbe provided.

Underground piping shall be painted with two coats of black asphalt paint or t/vocoats of bitumen wrapped with Hessian cloth or shall be applied one layer of PVCwrapping tape with 20% overlaP.

AII l\/.S. hangers, brackets, etc., shall be given one coat of red oxide primer and twocoats of synthetic enamel paint. All exposed G.l. piping shall be given two coats ofsynthetic enamel paint. l\4aterials for painting shall be high quality products of a welfknown manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer before using. The pipingshall be painted according to a color code approved by the Engineer.

All water distribution system shall be tested whole or in part to 1-'1i2 times theworking pressure. The Contractor shall pay for all devices, materials, supplies, laborand ' for the test. The test will be run for two hours at revealed by the test shall berepaired and the whole test return untilthe system proves to be saiisfactory

PPRC PIPE WORK

Centrifugal Water Supply Pumps

Refer to section 1 5300 for delails

Valves

Refer to section '15440 for details.

i)2.4

15100-2

t 4 Strainers

Strainers should be'Y' pattern and cast iron body, working pressure shoutd beequal to or greater than the maximum water pressure. The drain cock should beprovided for cleaning PUrPoses.

Caps

Should be machined, gasketed and with straight threads of bolted type.

Unions and Flanges

Unions and flanges should be furnished and installed at each threaded orflangedconnection to all equipment or valves. The faces of Flanges being connectedshould be alike in all cases. Unions and flanges should be located so that thepipe can be easily disconnected for removal of equipment, valve or tank.

STERLIZATION/CHLORINATION

2.6

2.7

oAfter installation and testing completetanks, mains, hot or cold water pipingsterilized by the following method.

domestic waier system, reservoars, storageetc. have been installed and tested shall be

A solution of chlorine gas and water containing not less than 50 ppm of free chlorineshall be injected into the system, in such a manner as to ensure that the entiresystem is completely filled with the solution. During this procedure all valves shall beoperated and outlets shall be tested for residual chlorine, injection shall continue untilall outlets indicate at least 50 ppm of free chlorine.

After injection, the system shall be isolated and the solution be held in retention, for aperiod of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be made for residual chlorine afterretention. lf such tests indicate less than 50 ppm of residual chlorine, the entireprocedure shall be repeated. After satisfactory sterilization has been effected, the

O system shall be flushed from any approved source, until all traces of chlorine contentis no greater than that in the existing supply.

Until sterilization ofthe water system has been made, the contractor shall have signsposted at proper locations stating that the water system has not been sterilized andshall not be used for human consumption.

A certificate of sterilization/chlorination, together with bacteriological reports shall beprepared and submitted to the Engineer Incharge stating the work has been done anaccordance with the specifications set for the above and prior to final acceptance ofthe installation.

15100-3

o sEcTtoN 15200

VALVES

SCOPE

The work under this section of the specification consists of fumishing all plant,labour, equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations requiredas specified herein, as shown on the drawings, or as difected by the Engineer, inconnection with installation of valves

APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Bronze gate valves BS- 1952

Bronze check valves BS- 5152Float valves BS- 1212

SUBMITTALS

The contractor shall submit technical brochures and samples of all the itemsmentioned in the Specifications from approved manufactures or as directed bythe Engineer

MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT

4.1 DESCRIPTION

All valves shall be of renowned manufacturer as specified. Valve material shallbe suitable for installation on potable water lines, sewage line or sludge pipingService rating of the valves shall be at least 7 bars. The interior of all valves shallbe cleaned of all foreign material before installation.

Valves shall be installed at the position indicated in the Contract Documents oras directed by the Engineer. Valves shall be adequately supported lnstalledvalves shall be subjected to pressure and leakage tests and no leakage shall beobseryed under these tests. End joints, flanges, etc., shall be of the appropriateclass and material.

Valves shall be installed either in chambers or above grade on line as shown inthe Contract documents and/or as specified herein. Valves shall be securelyancnoreo.

Open and closed position indicator shall be provided for all valves. lf installed invalve chambers, the indicator shall not extend above ground and shall notinterfere with opening or closing of the valve. The indicator design shall beapproved by the Engineer before installation.

Unless otherwise specified, valves should be of the same nominal size as thesize of the pipe line to which they are connected. All valves that incorporatedpacked glands should be capable of having glands packed when connected anline and subject to the working line pressure. All isolating valves shall providetight shutoff in the closed position. All hand wheel valves shall rotate clockwise toclose the valve check valve should be install Lo'€-sQle only which isrecommended by the manufacturer and approved

1 .

O

15200- l

Enginee

o Valve bonnets and covers should be easily removable and the gasket and glandsshould be readily renewable.

All gate and sluice valves shall incorporate guides in the body to ensure thecorrect position of valve discs at all times. The working parts of valves and cocksshould be bronze and the body casting should be bronze for valves and cocks upto 2", connection and cast iron for valves and cock oI 2-112" diameter connectionano apove.

Gland rings and spindles should be of a good running fit and stuffing boxesshould be fitted wilh neoprene 'O' ring seals, The exterjor finish of all bronzevalves bodies should be polished except otherwise specified.

Check valves up to and including 2-112" diameter should be of 'Y' pattern swingtype having regrindable bronze discs with the disc seat integfal with the valvebody. The disc and seat should be accessible via a screwed cap for regrindingwithout removal of the disc.

lsolating valves for all water piping should be full way type gate valves unlessotherwise indicated and should be fitted in the following positions, whether shownon drawings or not:

- Inlet and outlet connections to pumps.

- lnlet and outlet connections to water strainers and fifters

lnlet and outlet connections to tanks.

lnlet and outlet connections to three Pod Valves.

- By pass connection around valves and equipment.

- Btanch connection from service maina.

- At top or base of the riser served from below or above.

Ball float valve should be the internally hydraulically balanced double seatedpattern. The operating mechanism should be properly fixed to an arm of brasswhich in turn shall be fixed to tinned copper float. The valve shall be of bronzebody. The valve faces shall be synthetic rubber. The hinge pin and bushes shallbe copper alloy.

Regulating valves for all water services tor size 2" and smaller should be lockshield pattern disc type with parabolic shaped slotted disc and shall regulate theflow in oroportion to the lift of disc.

Regulating valves largef than 2" size shall be globe pattern valves

Bib cock shall be male inlet, face of wall type and chromium plated. Pressurerelief valves shall be spring loaded angle type, water pressure relief valve locatedin water line and constructed with semi-steel body, bronze tri

a/

t5200-2

o

4.2

4 .3

4 .4

4.5

BRONZE GATE VALVE

All gate valves of 75 mm and below shall be of bronze conforming to BS-1952 and shall be of appropriate class for the wo|king pressure of thesystem on which they are installed. Open and shut indicatorc shall bema*ed on the handle. The ends may be screwed or flanged. The valvesare to be installed inclusive of all fittings and accessodes required forcomplete installation.

BRONZE CHECK VALVES

Check valves shall conform to B.S, 5'152 "Specifications for bronze checkvalves for general purposes". The seruice rating shall be 10 Kg/cm2. Thedirection of flow shall be permanently marked on the body of the valveBody of valve shall be tested to 1-112 times the service rating and seatshall be tested to service rating. No leakage shall be permitted under theabove tests check valves shall be of swing type.End of the valves shall be flanged to joint with the standard fittings.Flanges shall be of appropriate class and material, Valves shall beinstailed at positions shown on the drawings the interior shall be cleanedof allforeign matter before installation. They shall be inspected to ensufethat all components are sound and in working condition.

AIR, VALVES

Air valves shall be of cast iron, of specified size for automatic discharge ofair and for automatic breaking of vacuum in a pressure main They shallbe suitable for installing on water mains of 7 bars working pressure. Thematerial used shall be corrosion resisting, groMh Each valve shall beinstalled with an isolating gate valve, stand pipe, clamp and connectionwith the l ine.

FI OAT VAI VF

Float valve shall be of copper alloy, piston type and shall conform to B S.1212. Float shall be of copper and shall conform to B S. 1968

DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

Valves should be handled and stored properly to avoid any damage and slippageof threads especially during installation.

TETESTING & COMMISSIONING

a

Valves shall be tested to ascertain theif proper workingpressures.

7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7.1 I\iIEASUREMENT

Measufement of acceptably compleled works of valves, will be made onthe basis of actual number of valves installed in position as shown on theDrawing or as directed by the Engineer including jointiirg arrangemrpipe on both end of valves gaskets, nuts, bolts, etc., anchoring of vao

15200-l

a concrete, steel embedded parts and indicators, wire mesh screen onwashout and Painting.

PAYI/IENT

Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of valves, on thebasis of unit rate per number quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shallconstitute full compensation for all the works related to the item

7.2

o

O

a15200-4

O sEcTtoN - 15400

PLUMBING FIXTURES & EQUIPMENT

SCOPE

The work under this section consists of providing all material and equipment andperforming all the work necessary for the complete execution 0ointing, clamping,cleaning, painting etc. Both above and underground and embedded in walls) andcompletion, including testing and commissioning of all systems of plumbingworks as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein and/or as directed bythe Engineer. The system include plumbing works as follows:

1 .

Hot Water and Cold Water Supply

Building Drainage

Rain Water Drainage

All the above named systems shall be completedextension of these internal systems up to the specifiedas indicated on the drawings.

2. APPLICABLESTANOARDS

ii)

iiD

o respects includingoutside the buildlng

c.L PjpesL Pipes

BS- 1387 ('1985) Medium dutyBS- 416 & 2494

SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS

All the materials and equipment shall be of the specifications mentioned hereinand the Contractor shall submit the sample, necessary catalogues, sketches, thename of manufacturer and guarantee if necessary, before installation. Thesystem shall be installed after the Engineer approves it. All material andeouiDment shall be new and unused.

It is specifically intended and must be agreed to by each Contractor submitting abid, that any material or labor which is usually furnished as a part of suchequipment and which is necessary for its proper completion and best operationshall be furnished as a part of this Contract without any additional cost whetherof not shown in detail on the drawings or described in detail, in the specifications

Approval of material and equipment by the Engineer shall not absolve theContractor of the responsibility of furnishing the same of proper size, quantity,quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently fulfill the requirementsand intent of the Contract Documents.

Prior to commencement of works on site and at least 3 weeks in advance of allthe drawing being required for actual execution the Contractor shall submit onlarger scale as approved by Engineer, shop drawings in triplicate for approvaltothe Engineer. The Engineer shall review the drawing and (i) approve the drawingor, (ii) approve the drawing with comments or, (iii) disapproved the drawings withcomments for rectification/revision of the drawing and resubmit 3 copies tolh6.ri)r

/lFiLs4uo_r l l l i , I j- ' . . ' \

\:.1. ;,)z

o

o Engineer for approval. On a drawing being approved, the Contractor shall submit6 copies for formal approval and distribution to relevant offices.

All drawings shall have plan and section and with sufficient details to clearlyreflect the installation of the system. All material specifications shall be providedon the drawings. All information required for preparing suitable foundation, forproviding suitable access to the system, for making openings in buildingstructure. for coordination with electdcal, aif-conditioning (where shown ondrawings) and other designs etc., shall be clearly provided

lnstallation shall not be allowed to commence unless approved shop drawingsare in possession of the Contractor, for which purpose shop drawings shall besubmitted by the Contractof to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of actualrequifements to allow for ample time in checking and appfoval and no claim forextension of the contfact time will be considered by reason of the Contractor'sfailure to submit the drawings on time.

Each shop drawing submitted by the Contractor shall include a certificate by theContract that all related conditions on site relevant to that particular instatlationhave been checked and that no conflict exists.

Any expenses resulting from an error mistake or omission in or delay in deliveryof the drawings and information mentioned above shall be borne by theContractor.

Drawings approved shall not be departed ffom except on the instructions ot theEngineer.

The approval by the Engineer for any submitted data, working drawings'performance curves, test certificates for any items, arrangements and/or layoutshall not relieve the contractor from any responsibility regarding the performanceof the Contract. Such approval shall not also relieve the Contractor fromresponsibility of any error in the submitted data and workings, brought to light atany time subsequent to any approvals.

Relevant specified imported item, model cuts will be available with the authorityconcefn for execution of work for contractor to check the models fof fabricatimport,

4. MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT

4.'I G.I, COLD, HOT WATER PIPES AND FITTINGS

The galvanized pipes shall be ofStandard Specifications 1387 forscrewing to BS 2'1 pipe threads".

medium grade and conform to"Steel Tubes and Tubular suitable for

All screwed tubes and sockets shall have BS pipes thread in accordancewith BS 2'1. In order to prevent damage to the leading thread, the ends ofthe sockets shall be chamfefed intemall,.

A complete and uniform adherent coating of zinc will be provided for^ .h , . n i ?a . l ^ i n -e

works to a hydraulic testEvery tube shall be tested at the manufacturer'spressure of 4.90 [/Pa (710psi) and shall bepressure sufficiently long for proof and inspection.

15400-2

maintained at the t

a Tubes which are bundled shall be secured together by rope or soft iron orother suitable material.

The threads of all tubes shall be effectively covered wjth a good qualitygrease or other suitable compound, and each tube above 2 inch nominalbore shall have a protecting ring affixed to the un-socketed screwed end.

All pipe fittings up to 75 mm dia. shall conform to BS 2'l and shall be ofmalleable cast iron. Pipe fitt ings above 75 mm dia. shall be of approvedmaterial and specifications as decided by the Engineer.

4.2 SOIL, WASTE, VENT & RAIN WATER DRAINAGE PIPES & PIPEFITTINGS

The cast iron pipe shall conform to British Standard Specifications No.416fof "Cast lron spigot and socket soil, waste and vent pipes and fittings withspigot and socket or hubless ends. The joint shall be lead caulked orelastomeric (Rubber rings) to BS-2494.

Cast iron pipes shall be centifugally (SPUN) cast.

The quality of material shall be according to B.S.S. No.1452 for Grade 10.

The contractor shall supply coated pipes and fittings. The coatingcomposition shall be of the basis or a mixture of natural bitumen with asuitable hardener and natural asphalt. The coatings shall be smooth,tenacious, sufficiently hard, not to flow when exposed to a temperature of63 Degrees Celsius and not so bdttle at zero degrees Celsius that it chipssoft when scribed lightly with the point of a pen knife.

Every pipe shall be tested at the manufacturer's work to a hydraulicpressure of 0.07 l\/Pa. Every pipe and fitting shall ring clearly when Ifor soundness by being struck all over with a light hammer.

4 .3 PLUMBING FIXTURES

4.3 .1 General Requirements

Materials shall conform to the latest referenced stanspecifications and othef provisions stipulated herein and shall benew and unused.

All fixtures shall be of the best quality and finish.

Prior to procurement of the materials, the Contractor shall berequired to prepare and submit to the Engineer for his approval, acomplete schedule of materials to be used in the works togetherwith a list of the names and addresses of the manufacturers andthe trade names of the materials- The schedule shall includediagrams, drawings and suoh other technical data as may berequired by the Engineer to satisfy himself as to the suitability,durability, quality and usefulness of the material to be purchased.Approval of the schedule shall not be construed as authorizjngany deviations from the specifications unless the attention of theEngineer has been invited to the specific changes. lf the material

15400-3

o Engineer, equal to or better than specified, it will be givenconsideration.

Plumbing fixtures shall have smooth impervious surfaces, be freefrom detecls and concealed fouling surface. They shall be lrue toline, angles, curves and colour etc. Normally they shall be of localmake and ofthe best quality available, provided.

All taps and cocks to be installed with plumbing fixtures shall bechrome plated (CP) and shall be of appropriate class to workwithout damage or leakage on the specified pressure of potablewater system, which is 0.88 MPa (128 psi). The taps and cocksshall be of the best quality locally manufactured.

When any fixture is provided with an overflow, the waste shall beso arranged that the standing water in the fixture cannot rise in theover flow when the stopper is closed of remain in the overflowwhen the fixture' is empty.

Plumbing fixtures shall be installed in a manner to afford easyaccess for cleaning. The space between the fixture and the wallshall be closely fitted and pointed so that there is no chance fordirt or vermin to collect.

When practical, all pipes from fixtures shall be run to the nearestwall. where fixture comes in contact with wall and floors, the jointshall be watertight.

Wall hung fixtufes shall be rigidly supported by metal supportangmembers so that no strain is transmitted to the connections. Flushtanks and similar appurtenances shall be secured by approvednon-corrosive screws or bolts.

Fixtures shall be set level and in proper alignment with referenceto adjacent walls. No water closet shall be set closer than 400 mmfrom its centre to any side wall. No urinal shall be set closer than3OO mm from its centre to any side wall or partition nor closer than600 mm centre to centre. The supply lines or fittings lor everyplumbing fixture shall be so in6talled as to prevent backflow. Allcut cuttings, making holes etc. and making it good shall beinclude" in the work.

of the fixtu bel

oother cal/chemical Drooerties ofthe tixtures are as below:S- No. Physical/Chemic Pakistan European

.\.,\

D-t-l )'

Pfoperties Standards Standafds1 /Vater absorption ess than 0.50% Maximum 0.50o/o

2 icratch ResistanceVlaximum 5.5 Maximum 5\/OH's scale vlOH's scale

3 lesistance to Resistant to acids, lesistant toalkalies, bases & )hemicals.)ther householdlleaningrhemicals

4 Srazing Resistancelrazing "Nl!:r--.--rirazing "NlL"5 /y'arpaoe Vlaximum-55: - VIa\mum 6mm

)mm l/ ".' / r i \\ zL':

15400-4 \-z :

{ i ' r , , ' . )

S. No. Physical/Chemic Pakistan European6 Strenqth aqainst \4ore than 700 450k9/cm - 700

lendln0 (o/cm cm7 l'hermal shock Vlore than 10 vlore than 2

:ycles of thermal )vcles of thermalshock from hot to ihock from hot torold water'15 C- rold water 20 C200 c 110 C

I Durabil ity rermanently Durable for everiurable

4.3.2 Wash Basins

Wash basin shall be vitreous China, best quality, local make ofcolour, size and type as approved by the Engineer. lt shall beinstalled as a complete unit including 15 mm mixer for hot and hotwater and cold water supply or CP brass faucet for cold wateronly, '15 mm stop-cocks, C.P brass chain with 32 mm rubber plug,C.P brass bottle trap for individual wash basin and C.P bfass Ptrap for battery of wash basins as applicable, C.P brass strainer,heavy duty cast iron brackets with bolts, screws etc. approvedwater inlet connection pipe, waste pipe, jointing and sealingmaterial, etc., with all other minor accessories required tocomplete the job in all respect.

4.3.3 Vanity Wash Basins

Wash basin Vanity type where shown on drawings shall bevitreous China, best quality, local make of colour, size and type asapproved by the Engineer. Other necessary fittings shall be sameas described for above Wash basin.

4.3.4 Water Closets (Eufopean type)

European type water closet shall be best quality local make otcolour, size and type as approved by the Engineer. lt shall beinstalled as a complete unit including all accessories. Flush tank('13.5 liters) shall be of low level type - jt shall be fitted with eithersingle push button or double push button type. Trap shall be castintegral with pan. The seat shall be of smooth non-combustiblenon-absorbent materials like Bakulite and of the open front typefixed to the pan with hinges, The fittings shall also includeapproved watef inlet connection pipe, nuts bolts, '1smm dia stopcock etc. required for complete installation.

4.3.5 Water Closets (Ofissa)

Squatting (Asian/Orissa) type water closet shall be vitreous China,best quality local make of colour, size and type approved by theEngineef. lt shall be installed as a complete unit including, 15 mmstop cock, approved water inlet connection pipe, low level or highlevel Flush tank (13.5 l iters), as required. All f i tt ings shall beinstalled at low level, or high level as required includinginterconnecting flush piping. Foot rests, cast iron P trap, jointingand sealing materials, 15mm dia stop cock etc. with all otherminor accessories for complete installaj

15400-5

o 4.3.6 Kitchen Sinks

Kitchen sinks shall be stainless steel of best quality local make ofcolour and type as approved by the Engineer, single bowl ordouble bowl with integfal dfain board of at least1000 x 500 mmsize. ls shall be installed as a complete unit with arrangement oforboth cold and hot water supply, 15 mm C.P mixer for cold and hotwater, approved water inlet connection C.P brass strainer, wasteoutlet pipe, heavy duty cast iron brackets with bolts screws etc,joints jointing and sealing material etc., with all other minoraccessories required for complete installation.

4.3.7 Urinals

Urinals shall be vitreous China of appfoved make and size and ofwatl hung type either with integral waier seal trap or with separatebrass P-Trap. The complete unit shall be installed including 15mmTee-stop cock, plastic water inlet / outlet connections, CPbrackets, bolts. screws and all internal accessories or CP steelflush pipe. CP steel waste pipe, joints, jointing and sealingmaterials etc with all other minor accessories. White color vitreouschina URINALS Prime quality KAMMCERA or equivalent make.It shall at a minimum consists of 2 Nos. CP T-stop cock withconnector. 'ASIAJMASTER" make with nuts and bolts flushingcistern with PVC connection.

4.3.8 Gas or Eleciric Water Heaters

Water heater shall be of automatic storage type Electric or Gasoperated including all necessary fittings for complete installation &operation. The heater shall be of best quality, local make asapproved by the Engineer.

o

The working and test pressure of the heater to be of 6 bar andbaf respectively and shall deliver water at 150'F.lt shall

' t0be

r)

i0

capable to reach the peak demand, storage capacity

Heater shall be provided with following accessories.

Thermostatic control

Temperature & pressurerelief value High l imit Control.

Other specifications of water heater afe as given belowi

Inner tank shall be extra heavy gauge anti-rust G.l. sheet metal tohold maximum inside water pressure. As an insulation, importedgenuine glass wool shall be used to maintain the desiredtemperature that controls the liting up of the burner. The outefbody shall be made of requisite gauge M.S. sheet shaped intoreinfofced cifcumference. Flow and delivery pipes shall be of highquality G.l. pipes fabricated with heavy gauge anti-rust baffleplate. The thermostat shall be of Robershaw (U.S.A) make.burner shall be made of cast iron with drilled ports. lt shall

,);15400-6

a to be detached. Special anti-rust-baked primer-heavy coatedstoved enamel paint with high gloss automotive shine shall beused on sheet metal.

Standard type gas water heaters shall have following specs:

Capacity

15 gallons

30 gallons

50 gallons

lnner Tank

G.l. sheet 14-16 swg

G.l. sheet 14-16 swg

G.l. sheet 14 swg

Outer body

M.S sheet painted 22swg

M.S sheet painted 22swg

M.S sheet painted 22swg

M.S sheet painted 22swg

a

100 gallons G.l. sheet 8-'10 swg

4.4,,12 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER 'W-COOLER'

Electric water cooler will consist of following:

20 gal. Cooling capacity MECOIUNIAIR make electric watercooler Model ME-609, Ceramic filter and C.P. tee stop cock withflexible connector ASIA/MASTER make.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

4.4.'1 Taps and Cocks

All taps and cocks shall be of brass, gun metal or other equallysuitable corrosion resisting alloy conforming to BS '1010 and shallbe best quality local make. The nominal size specified shall bethe nominal bore of the seating. Washers fot hot water and coldwater cocks shall be of specially selected leather, rubberasbestos composition or other equally suitable material. Washersfor hot water cocks shall be of good quality fiber, rubber -asbestos composition or other equally suitable material. Everytap/cock shall be tested, complele with its component parts, to ahydraulic pressure of at least '1.96 MPa (2A4.4 psi) during test itshall neither leak nor sweat.

4.4.2 Floortraps/drains

Floor tfaps/drains shall be of cast iron or of other anti-corosivematerial, compatible with the material of pipe. They shall haveminimum water seal of 40 mm and shall be provided withremovable metal strainers. The traps shall be of self-clearing type.The open area of the strainer shall be greater than the crosssection area of the drain line to which it connects. Floor traps shallbe well set in position so that there is no leakage at the jointbetuveen trap and the floor.

4.4.3 Roof Drains

Roof drains shall be of bitumen coated cast iron compatible withthe material of pipe. They shall have strainers extending at lelq!15 mm above the rooJ sufiace immediately adjacent towhen installed on flat part. Bottom of strainer shall be fl

4 .4

o

1s400-7

o

the roof surface, when installed on vertical part. Strainer shallhave an available inlet area, above roof level, of not less than 1-1/2 times the area of the down-pine to which the drain isconneqeq.

The connection between roof and roof drain s- ail be mazewatertight by the use of proper flashing material.

4.4.4 Cleanouts

Cleanout shall be of the same nominal size as that of the pipe onwhich it is installed. Cast lron Cleanout shall consist of tappedheavy duty cast iron ferrule caulked into cast iron fifting and heavyduty brass tapered even plug. Cleanout shall consist of either two45" bends or one long radius bend both with an removable endcap and othei necessary fittings/material for complete installationin floor Cleanouts shall be turned up through floors by long sweepfittings, wherever the space so permits. Top finish of cleanoutshall be flush with the floor by means of finished metal platesecured in position and screwed firmly to the plug. Cleanout shallbe so installed that thefe is a clearance of at least 300 mm forpipes less than 75 mm diameter and at least 457 mm for pipes of75 mm and larger diameter, for the purpose of roding.

Pipe used with cleanout shall be measured and paid under pipeitem. All other work of ferrule, plug, concrete work, frame andcover etc. shall be measured and paid under cleanout item.

4.4.5 Grease Trap / intefceptor

The grease trap shall be of stainless of specified capacity withcover, baffles and strainers to separate grease from watereffectively. The grease trap shall be of approved make orequivalent and installed in the position as shown as drawingsas specified by the Engineer.

4.4.6 Glass lvlirror

The glass mirrof shall be of specified size, 5 mm thick, sefixed on hard board packing and of best quality BelgiumThe mirror shall be fixed on wall as shown on the drawings ordirected by the Engineer. All accessories fequired for completefixing of mirror on wall shali be included in Contfactor's scope ofwork.

4.4.7 To\\el Rail, Toilet Paper Holder, Soap Trays, Mirfor Trays

The towel rail, toilet paper holder, soap trays & mirror trays shallbe of best quality. All accessories for complete installation of towelrail, toilet papers holders, soap tray and mirror tray shall beincluded in the contractor's scope ofwork.

4.4.8 Gully Trap

Gully trap shall be of cast iron with specified size outlet. The inletshall be provided with cast iron, medium duty grating. Thearea of the grating shall be at least '1-'112 times the areoutlet. The trap shall be of P-Type with a minimum

a

a il;15400-8

50 mm. lt shall be installed as a complete unit including allworks as shown on relevant details and drawings

4.4.9 Cast lron Gfating

Cast iron grating shall be of the specified size The specified sizeshall mean the clear span. cast iron grating shall be complete withframe. They shall be of Light/medium duty type to resist normaltraffic loads, the casting shall be sound and free from all defects.The frame shall be set in place at the time of pouring of concreteOpenings in grating shall be in approved pattern

4,4,10 BIB COCK/TOILET SHOWER

Chrome plated long neck bib cock plus toilet shower shall be maleconnection complete with flexible chain hook ASIA'/MASTERmaKe.

4.4.1'1 SHOWER

It wil l at a minimum shall consist of following:2 nos. neck bib cock (master make), 2 nos. concealed stop cocks(master make) and 1 no. showef head

4.4,12 VANITY

White color vitreous china VANITY Prime quality KAMMCERA orequivalent make and 2 Nos. C.P. T-stop cock with connectof"ASIA/MASTER" make including nuts and bolts.

4.4.13 MIRROR

It shall be clear without any waves, 5 mm thick Belgium orequivalent make. Fixed to wall with adjustable clips and screwsThe mirror shall be detached from the wall for ventilation from

a 4,4,,14 GRATING

It shall be chromium fixed casted ASIA'/ IVIASTER or equmaKe.

4.4.15 SOAP DISC

It shall be fine quality plastic make ASIA"/MASTER or equivalemake as approved bY the Engineef.

4.4,16 ELECTRIC HAND DRIER

This shall be approved before installation and shall be of reputedmake. The operation shall be auto for shut off Provision shall bemade for the installation during the construction stage

EXECUTION

5,1 GENEML

15400-9

The Contractor shall be responsible for hjs work until its completion andfinal acceptance, and shall replace any of those that may be damagedlost or stolen without any additional cost.Atl openings left in floor for passage of lines of water supply, soil, waEte,vent. etc. shall be covered and protected.

All open ends of pipes shall be properly plugged to prevent any fofeignmaterial from entering the pipe. Misuse of plumbing fixtures to be installedunder this Contract is prohibited during the currency of the contract.

All metal fixture trimmings shall be thoroughly covered with non-corrosivegrease which shall be maintained unti l all work is completed.

Upon the completion of work, all fixtures and trimmingsthoroughly cleaned, polished and left in first class condition.

Before efection, all pipes, valves, fittings, etc. shall be thoroughly cleanedof oil, grease or other material.

All soecial tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipmentprovided undef this Contract Shall be delivered at no additional cost.

The Contractor shall allow in his bid for cost of all cutting, making holesand subsequent making it good to the desired finish as per approval ofthe Engineer. No separate payment shall be made for lhis item.

The Contractor shall allow in his bid for the cost of providing protectivepainting or coating as specified in the relevant sections and no claimshall be entertained for this item.

All pipes shall be properly installed as shown on the drawings and/or asdirected by the Engineer, and shall be as straight as possible formingright angles and parallel l ines with the walls and other pipelines. Theposition, gradients, alignment and inverts shall be as shown on thedrawings and/or as directed in writing and set out by the Engineer.

The arrangement, positions and conrlections of pipe fittings andappurtenances shall be as shown on the dfawings. The Engineerreserves the right to change the location etc. Special precautions shallbe taken for the installation of concealed pipes as shown on thedrawings and/or as required. Should it be necessary to correct piping soinstalled, the Contractor shall be held liable for any injury caused to otherworks in the correction of piping. The Contractor shall closely coordinatewith other works during the entire stage of execution.

A minimum distance beh,r,/een different services shall be maintained asshown on the Dfawings and/or as approved by the Engineer.

Pipes should be installed in such a manner that minimum distanceshould always be maintained between pipe and wall, beams, columns,etc- Pipes shall be supported on hangers and brackets as shown on thedrawings or as directed by the Engineef.

Waste-water outlet from each fixture shall be individually trapped.Eachas tovent terminal shall extend to the outer air and -be-89 installed

minimize the possibilities of clogging andbuilding. \-\

15400- l0

When the roughing-in is completed, the plumbing system shall besubjected to test prjor to concealing the roughing-in, in order to ascertainthat all threads and connections are watertight.

Cast iron soil and drainage fittings for change in direction shall be used asfollows:

*Vertical to horizontal; short sweep or long-turn for diameter 75 mm andlarger; long sweep or extra-long-turn for less than 75 mm. dia.

"Horizontal to vertical: quarter bend or short turn.

All fittings with hubs shall be aligned so that the hub facee upstream. Nodrainage or vent piping shall be dril led.

All exterior openings provided for the passage of piping shall be pfopedysealed with snugly fitting collars of metal or other spproved rodent-prootmaterial securely fastened into place.

Joints at the roof, around vent pipes, shall be made water-tight by the useof lead, copper, galvanized iron, or other approved flashing or flashingmaterial. Exterior wall openings shall be made watertight.

Each length of pipe & each pipe fitting, trap, fixture, & device used in aplumbing system shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it themaker's mark or name, the weight, type & classes of the product, whensuch marking is required by the approved standard that applies.

Where different sizes of pipes, or pipes and fittings are to be connected.the proper size increasers or reducers or reduced fittings shall be usedbetween the two sizes.

Any fitt ing or connection which has an enlargemeni. chamber. or recesswith. A ledge, shoulder, or reduction of plpe area that offers anobstruction to flow through the dfain pipe is prohibited. The verticaldistance form the fixture outlet to the trap weir shall not exceed 600 mm.Each fixtufe trap shall have a water seal of not less than 50 mm and notmore than 100 mm.

Full S, bell, crown vented traps and traps/depending for their seal uponthe action of movable parts afe prohibited. No fixture shall be doubletrapped. Where fixture comes in contact with wall and floors, the jointshall be water-tight. Piping in grcund shall be laid on a firm bed for itsentire lenoth.

Piping in the plumbing system shall be installed without undue strains andstresses. Vertical piping shall be securely held to keep the pipe inalignment and carry the weight of the pipe and contents. Horizontal pipingshall be supported to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging. Hangersand anchors shall be of metal of sufficient strength to maintain theirproportional share of pipe alignments and prevent rattling Hangers andanchors shall be securely attached to the building under construction. ltmust be clearly understood that the Coniractor shall be fully responsiblefor hangers and supports and shall obtain prior approval of design as tothe shape, material, dimensions, spacing etc.

15400-11

Piping in concfete or masonry walls or footings shall be placed orinstalled in sleeves which will pemit access to the piping for repair orreptacemenl.

5.2 G.I. HOT WATER AND COLD WATER PIPES AND FIfiINGS

The run and arrangement of all pipes shall be as shown on the Drawingsand as directed during installation. All vertical pipes shall be erectedplumb and shall be parallel to wall and other pipes. All horizontal runs ofpiping shall be kept close to walls. lf required to change the location etcduring the currency of the work, the Contractor will do so at no additionalcost. Screwed joints in G.l. pipes shall be made perfectly tight, without theuse of any filler except approved jointing compound or tape Whereverrequired to make flanged joints, they shall conform to BS l0 Table D

Furnish and install all pipe passing through floors and walls wlth sleevesof G.l. sheet, 18 gauge, the inside dia. of which shall be at least 1/2greater than the outside dia of the pipe passing through it. Sleeves inexterior walls and pits shall have anchor flanges and space between pipeand sleeve shall be caulked and sealed watertight. At waterpfooflocations, an approved water-prooftype pipe sleeve shall be provided

All embedded water supply piping shall be wrapped with approved antFcorrosion polyethylene tape. All exposed piping shall be painted with twocoats of enamel paint over a coat of red oxide.

lnsulalion

All hot water supply andherein. Prior to insulationcleaned.

Nominal PipeDia. (mm)

15 (1t2',)20 (3t4\25 (1 )32 (1,1t4',)40 (1-1t2',)50 (2)65 (2-'1r2',)75 (3)

Insulation shall consists of pre-formed fibefglass pipe insulation, withfactory applied reinforced aluminum vapor barrier, single layer in semFcircular halves, consisting of long, fine glass fibers bounded with atemoefature fesistance binder, free from shot or coarse fibers, damageresistance , light in weight easy to handle, cut and fit The product shallcomply with the requirements of B.S. 3958: part 4. the insulation shall berot-proof, odorless non-hygroscopic and shall not sustain vermin Thefiberglass insulation shall be covered with a layer of approvedpolyethylene tape in the field. Further reinforcement shall be provided bythe use of 20 mm wide soft aluminum bands, generally spaced at 457 mmand on either side of elbows and tees. All butt joints shall be sealed with

return piping shall be installed as specifiedthe pipes shall be hydfaulically tested and

Thickness of pre form fiber glass pipeinsulation. (mm)

2525

2525

25

self-adhesive type of approved quality adhesive tape.

15400-12

All trimmed sections shallself-adhesive tape to formdone in a neat andrecommended pfactice.

be secured by wrapping of approved type ofa comolete waterproof seal. All work shall beworkmanlike manner, and should reflect

All hot water and hot water return lines concealed in walls only, shall beprovided with glass wool blanket insulation.

Pipe work Supports

All supports, clips, steel rods and hangers shall be of mild steel paintedwith two coats of appfoved metallic zinc primer. All clips and bracketsshall be equipped with 9 mm seciional rubber liners (shore-hardness A40+5 ).

Pipe work supports shall be installed in order to allow free movement dueto expansions and contfaction. Supports shall be arranged adjacent tojoints, changes of direction and branches. Each support shall carry theoverall weight of pipe work and water to be borne by jt. The intervalsbetween pipe supports shall not exceed the following:

..................... M.?.Iir.'gtlj1''!-.,.ry,91'p9!y--e,-e-n.,99pp"9[.19..fi!:]-e-!9t-il.....Steel pipes

HorizontalNominalDia mm

'10'1520

40506580

1.72 .02 .42 .7

3 .03 .4

3 .74 .1

Vertical2 .02 .42 .72 .73 .53 .94.34.3

100

aDimensions of support Materials

Nominal Dia Flat iron bandsmm mm

Support rodsmm

U-boltsmm

6666'101010121212

25x325x325x325x340x540x540x55 ( J x t i50x650x6

10

20253240

6580'100

6

66101010121212

a

Single pipes hung from floor slabs shall be supported on rod hangers.Where two or more pipes are involved a channel or angle from shallfitted to the underside of slab by two hangers and the pipes shallsupported ffom the channel iron by rod hangers and flal iron hands

15400-13

5.3

5 .4

All hanger rods shall have double nuts and beveled washers to allow thehanger rod to swing.

fiIult iple pipe runs along walls shall be supported on purpose madesubstantial angle and channel frames securely fixed to the wall, floor andceiling as necessary. All pipes shall be arranged to slide on the steelsupports and U-bolts shall be provided to form a rigid guide.

Exposed pipe work shall be supported on channel, angle iron or with U-bolts to form a rigid guide.

All U-bolts. except used as anchors, shall have a pair of nut and washerson each leg with the supporting steel flange clamped tight between thepair of nuts to form a rigid guide and allowing the pipe to slide axially,. U-bolts shall be provided on alternate pipe bracket.

Small pipe work running along skirting shall be supported by standardbuilt-in or screw-on type cliPS.

Pipes shall be indivldually supported. Pipes shall not hung from otherpipes.

Points at which pipes pass through watls, floors, connections to plant,eouipment and heat emitters, etc. do not constitute points of supports forthe oioes.

Vertical pipes shall be supported at the base or at anchor points towithstand the total weight of the risef. Bfackets from riserc shall not beused as a means-of support for the rise-

Vibfation isolators to be provided with the hangers as approved by theEngineer.

PPRC PIPES

WATER PIPES AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BUILDING (EXTERWORKS)

5.4.1 HANDLING

Pipe and accessories shall be handed in such a manner as to ensuretheir delivery to the trench in sound, un-damaged condition. lf any pipe orfitting is damaged, the repair or replacement shall be made by theContractor at his expenses in a saiisfactory mannef No other pipe ormaterial of any kind shall be placed inside of a pipe or fittings ripe shallbe carried into position and not dragged. The interior of pipe andaccessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before beinglowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operationsby ptugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe shallOe inspected for defects. Material found to be defective before or after

o

laying shall be feplaced with sound materialwithout additional expense tothe Employer. Rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediatelyshall be stored in a cool dark place and pfotected against the direct i4ys . .of the sun.

4.- $

l54ou-r4 ' rh

' l\\*"'

5,3.2 CUTTING OF PIPE

This shall be done in a neat and workman-like manner without damage tothe pipe. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer or recommendedby the manufacturer, cutting shall be done with a mechanical cutter ofapproved type. Wheel cutters shall be used wherever practicable.

5.3.3 LOCATION

Where the location of the water pipe is not clearly defined by dimensionson the Drawings, the water pipe shall be located as directed by theEngineer.

5.3,4 DEFLECTION

lvlaximum allowable deflections from a straight line or grade, as requiredby vertical curves, horizontal curves, or offsets will be 2"degrees unlessotherwise recommended by the manufacturer. lf the alignment requiresdeflections in excess of the specified limitations, special bends or asufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provideangular deflections within the limit set forth, as approved.

5,3,5 PLACING AND LAYING

Pipe and accessoies shall be carefully lowered into the trench by meansof derrick ropes, belt sl ings, or other suitable equipment. Under nocircumstances shall any of the water line matedals be dropped or dumpedinto the trench. Care shall be taken to avoid abrasion of the pipe coating.Poles used as levers shall be of wood and shall have broad flat faces toprevent darnage to the pipe. Except where necessary in makingconnectidns with other lines of authorized by the Engineer pipe shall belaid with the bells facing in the direction of laying. The full length of eachsection of pipe shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed, with recessesexcavated to accommodate bell coupljng and joints. Pipe that has thegrade or the joint disturbed after laying shall be taken out and re-laid.Pipe shall not be laid in water shall be kept out of the trench until thematedals in the joints have hardened or unti l caulking or jointing iscompleted. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fittings; andvalves shall be secufely closed so that no trench water, earth, or othersubstances will entef the pipes or fiitings. Whefe any part of a coating orlining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at hisexpense in a satisfactory manner. Plpes shall be installed in accordancewith recommendations of the pipe manufactufef. Pipe ends left fof futureconnections shall be valved, plugged or capped, and anchored, as shownor as directed, where connections shall be made by using specials andfittings to suit the actual conditions.

5.3,6 JOINTING

The joints shall be in accordance with the recommendations of themanufacturer or as approved by the Engineer. Connections beh/veendifferent types of pipes and accessories shall be made with transitionfiitings where recommended by the pipe manufactufer.

Service connections shall be made as indicated and in accordance withthe recommendations of the pipe manufactu

15400-15

a 5.3.7 THRUST BLOCKS

Plugs, caps, tees, bends and fire hydrants shall be provided with concretethrust blocks. Backing shall be placed between solid ground and thehydrant or fitting to be anchored. The area of bearing shall be as shownon the Drawings. The backing shall be so placed that fitting joints shall beaccessible for repair. The concrete shall be class C plain cementconcrete.

5-3.8 PIPE BEDDING

Fine sand as pipe bedding material shall be used for bedding of pipesand fittings. The sand shall be free from clay, site, salts, organicimpurities and debris. Approval of pipe bedding materials shall beobtained from the Engineer prior to placing.

5 .3 .9 FLUSHING

The Contractor shall provide facilities for llushing the line Water forflushing the line shall be affanged by the Contractor. Flushing of line shallbe done section by section. Fof each valved section of pipeline theContractor shall make a temporary hose connection between the waterpipeline and the pipeline under test Water shall be pumped into thesection flushed. Other arrangements for storing and pumping of watershall be subject to the approval of Engineer' Due precautions shall betaken by the Contractof for the disposal of water. The pipeline shall beflushed by keeping all the branching pipes open. Flushing shall becontinued until clean water starts flowing through the other end Sectionby section, the entire pipeline shall be flushed at a minimum flushingvelocity of 2.5 fi./sec.

5 .3 ,10 PIPELINE DISINFECTION

The contractor shall furnish all equipment, labour and material for theproper disinfection of the pipeline. Disinfection shall be accomplished bychlorination after the lines have been tested for leakage but before theyhave been connected to the main system Disin{ections of the plpelinesshall be done in the presence of the Engineer representative withequipment approved bY him.

Chtorination A chlorine and water mixture shall be supplied by means ofa solution feed chlorination device. The chlorine solution shall be appliedat one end of the pipeline through a trap, in such a manner that as thepipeline is filled with water, the dosage applied to the water entering thepipe shall be atleast (25 p.p.m) or enough to meet the requirements givenhereinatter.

Retention Period Chlorination water shall be retained in the pipeline for aDeriod of at least 24 houfs. After the chlorine treated water has beenretained for the required time, the chlorine residual at the pipe extremitiesand at such other representative points shall be at least l0 parts permillion. This procedure shall be repeated until the required residualchlorine concentration is obtained.

Chlorination of Valves ouring the process ofvalves or other appurtenances shall e opewith the heavily chlorinated Water.

5 ,3 .11 F INAL FLUSHING

Following complete disinfection of the pipelinthoroughly flushed from the pipeline at its ext

the pipeline, all

15400-16

l ine is f i l led

5.4

waier used for flushing the pipelines shall be disposed of in a mannerinstructed by the Engineer. Fresh treated water shall be filled in the lineand water tested from presence of coliform. The test result shouldindicate negative coliform presence. lf the test indicates any positivecoliform, the entire process of disinfection shall be repeated or improveduDon until coliform free samples are obtained.

5.3.12 SAMPLING AND TESTING

Disinfection of the pipeline and appurtenances shall be the responsibilityof the Contractof. The first set of samples will be collected for analysis bythe Engineer. Should the samples reveal presence of coliform theContractor shall again disinfect the pipeline and appurtenances at noextra cost to the Employer for sampling and testing for subsequent retestsuntil coliform free samples are obtained. The charges for re-sampling andretesting shall be recovefed from the Contractor.

5.3,,13 CLEAN-UP

Upon completion of the installation of ihe water supply lines, distributionsystem and appurtenances, all debris and surplus materials resulting fromthe work will be removed and disposed off in a manner satisfactory to theEngineer.

SOIL, WASTE, VENT & RAIN WATER DRAINAGE PIPES & PIPEFITTINGS

All cast iron soil pipes and fittings shall be installed to the lines andgrades shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Whenrequired to be installed above ground floor level, suitable and substantialnumber of hangers and suppofts of approved type and make shall beprovided. No piping shall be hung from the piping of other systems.ClamDs shall be provided on not more than 1.5 meter centres or aminimum of one hanger per each length of pipe whichever is smaller.Where excessive numbers of fittings are installed, additional clamps willbe provided.

All steel clamps, hangers and support etc, shall be given one coat of redoxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint. All exposed C.l.soil/vent pipes shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel paint.Materials for painting shall be high quality product of well-knownmanufacturer and V!/ill be approved by the Engineer before using. Theinstructions of the manufactufer regardjng all painting work shall strictlybe adhered to Pipes passing thfough walls, floors, etc. shall be providedwith sleeves of approved design. All vent pipes to be installed in thesystem shall be provided with approved cowl and will rise at least 0.70meter above the roof.

Caulked joints for cast iron bell-and-spigot soil pipe shall be firmly packedwith oakum or kemp and filled with molten lead not less than 22 mm deepand not to extend more than 3 mm below the rim of the hub. Rubber ringjoints shall also be allowed. No paint, varnish, or other coatings shall bepermitted on the jointing material unit after the joint has been tested andaooroved

shall be provided with sleeves ofinstalled in the system shall be

Pipes passing through walls, floors, etc.approved design. All veni pipe to theprovided with approved cowl and will firoof.

15400-17

70 meter above the

DELIVERY CONDITIONS

The internal and external surfaces of pipes and fittings shall be smoothand free from grooving, blistering and any other surface defect. Thematerials shall not contain visible impurities or pores. Pipe ends shall becleanly cut, and the ends of pipes and fittings shall be square with theaxis of the pipe

MARKINGS

Pipes, f itt ings and sealing rings shall be marked clearly and indelibly sothat legibility is maintained for the life of products under normalconditions of storage, weather and use.

The ma*ings may be integral with the product or on a label. Themarkings shall not damage the product.

PIPES

Pipes shall be marked with at least the following information:

Manufacturer's name or trade mark;Pipe material;Nominal diameter of pipe;Nominalwall thickness of pipelvlanufacturing infomation, in plain text or in code, providingtractability ot the pfoduction period to withln the year andmonth and the production site if the manufacturer is producingat several national or international sitesThe number of this International Standard.

Pipes with a nominal laying length up to and including 22 meters shallbe marked with at least once. Pipes with a nominal laying lengthgreater than z, meters shall be marked at intervals of 4 meters atthe most. The values of 22 and 23 shall be as specified byauthodties in each country.

Fittings

Fittings shall be marked with at least the following information:

Manufacturer's name or trade mark;

a.b .c.d .e ,

t.

b. Fitting matedal (may be given on packing only in the case ofPVC, provided this information is not required on each articleby national authorities);Nominal diameter of filting;Classification (where applicable)Values of angles, if any;Manufacturing information, in plain text of in code, providingtractability of the production period to within the year andmonth and the production site if the manufacturer isproducing at several national or international sites (may begiven on packing only, provided this information is not

c.d .

f.

requifed on each article by national authorities);g. The number of this Intemational Standard (may

packing only, provided this information is noteach article by national authorities).

15400-18

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

6,,1 G,I. HOT WATER AND COLD WATER PIPES

All water distribution system shall be tested whole or in part to 2 times theworking pressure with a minimum test pressure of 100psi. The contractorshall pay for all device, materials, supplies, labor and power required forthe test. The test will be run for trivo hours at the specified pressure andthere should be not leakage in the system. Defects revealed by the testshall be repaired and the whole test rerun until the system proves to besatisfactory.

After all the pipes and fixtures have been properly laid and tested, theyshall be flushed clean with water and then disinfected with water solutionof chlorine of at least 50 ppm strength for a contact period of 6 hours Thesystem will be finally flushed with clean water.

6.2 SOIL. WASTE, VENT & RAIN WATER DMINAGE PIPES & PIPEFITTINGS

The entire system of drains, waste, and vent piping inside the buildingshall be tested by this Contractor under a water test. Every portion of thesystem shall be tested to a hydrostatic pfessure equivalent to at least 3-meter head of water. After filling this Contfactor shall shut off water supplyand shall allow it to stand two hours, under test during which time thereshall be no loss or leakage.

The Contractor shall furnish and pay for all devices, materials, supp,ies,labor and power required in connection with all tests. All tests shall bemade in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for the repair of this work & othertfades work that may be damaged or disturbed by the tests. Defectsdisclosed by the tests repaired. Work shall be replaced with new workwithout extra cost to the Employer. Tests shall be repeated as directed'until all work is proven satisfactory.

Allfixtures shall be tested for soundness, stability, support and satisfactoryoperation.

7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7,1 COLD & HOT WATER PIPES & FITTINGS

7.1.1 l\, ' leasurement

l,'leasuremeni for acceptably completed works of supply and installationof cold and hot water pipes shall be in running FEET length.

a. In building works, no measurement shall be made fof earthworks, pipefitt ings, jointing, hangers, clamps, brackets, sleeves, jnsulation, cutting

b . In external works, no measurement shall be made for pipe fittings,jointing, insulation, cutting and breaking concrete and then making itgood, applying protective painting, coating, cleaning, flushing, testing anddisinfecting etc. and the measurement will be for the full work specifiedherein. However, earthworks (excavation, backfilling, sand bedding), andthrust blocks shall be paid separately as specified in Bill of Quantities.

7 .1 .2 Paymentquantity vliill be made at theof cold and hot water pipesamount bid shall be the full

Payment fof acceptable measuredunit rate per running FEET length

7.2

quoted in the Bill of Quantities. Thepayment for completion of the workheretn.

C,I, SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES

7.2.1 MEASUREMENT

in all respects as specified

Measurement for acceptably completed works of supply andinstallation of C.t. pipes, wil l be in running FEET length and thework to be done shall include all pipe fittings, jointing, hangers,clamps, brackets, sleeves, cutting and bfeaking concrete and thenmaking lt good, applying proteciive painting coating, cleaning andtestinq.

7.2.2 Payment

Payment will be made at the unit rate of bid per running FEETlength of pipe acceptably supplied and installed. The amount bidshall be full payment for the work specified herein.

PLUI\,{BING FIXTURES

7.3.1 l\/easurementl\4easurement for plumbing fixtures will be made as per actualnumber acceptably installed. The Contfactor's bid against theseitems shall include installation of complete unit as specifjed herein,inclusjve of all work from inlet connection of water supply to outletconnection with the sanitary system, complete as per ContfactDocuments and/or as directed by the Engineer.

7.3.2 Paymenl

Payment for plumbing fixtures shall be made at the applicable unitprice per number bid for the respective item in the Bill ofQuantities. The amount bid shall be full payment for the workspecified herein.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

7-4.'1 Measufement

Measufement for acceptably completed works of floor drains, roofdrains, cleanouts, glass mirror, towel rail, toilet paper holder, soaptrays, mirror trays, water coolers, water heaters, flexible watertanks etc. shall be made on the basis of actual number acceptablyinstalled in position. The Contractor's bid these items shallinclude installation complete as speon the Drawings.

7.4.2 Payment

7 .3

a

7.4

\ )

1s400-20

o Payment for acceptably measured quantity of floor drains, roofdrains, cleanouts, glass mirrors, towel rails, toilet paper holders,soap trays, mirror trays electric water coolers, water heaters,flexible water tanks etc. shall be made at the applicable unit rateper number quoted in the Bil l of Quantit ies, The bid amount shallbe full payment for the works specified herein and as shown onthe Drawings.

o

t5400-l I

a sEcTloN - 15440

PLUMBING PUMPS

SCOPE OF WORK

The work to be done under this section of the specificatjons includes furnishingall plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing attoperations reouired in connection with the installation of pumping machineryincluding ail accessories as specified herein or shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Engineer.

MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

l\,4aterials and rnachinery shall conform to the latest referenced specifications andother provisions specified herein and shall be new and unused, in case wheremanufacturers are specified, material and equipment will be of the samemanufacturers. In all other cases the Contractor shall submit the names andaddresses of the Manufacturers and trade names of the materials and equipmentthat he intends to buy. Other information such as diagram, drawing anddescriptive data will be supplied if so desired by the Engineer. Approval ofmaterials and all the machinery under this provision shall not be construed asauthorising any deviations from the specifications. The approval of machinery ofmanufacturer other than specified will be purely on the discretion of the Engineer.The Engineer llvill fully asceftain the facts and satisfy himself as to theperformance ofthe machinery offefed by the Contfactor.

SPECIAL REOUIREMENTS OF PUMPS

The Contractor shall furnish with each pump properly identified characteristiccurves prepared and certified by the manufacturer showing capacity, head,eificiency and brake horsepowef throughout the entire range ofthe pump.

The pumps shall stable throttling curves and be suitable for unrestricted paralleloperation. The pumps and their drives shall not overload or trip when operatingagatnst zero pressure.

The design, construction and materials shall be such that damage as a result ofcavitation is completely eliminated.

Pumps shall have beadngs and be suitable for continuous as well as intermittentoperation without external seating or cooling water.

The pumps shall be such that they shall come into operation at once after aprolonged shutdown period without having to take special measufes,

Pumps shall be capable of delivering specified quantity of water at the specifiedpressure- Pumps shall be tested at site before their final acceptance

Pumps shall be installed at positions shown on the Drawings and/or as directedthe Engineer-

Pumps and their drives shall be jn perfect alignment when installed in position.

The centrifugal water pump shall be complete with pump CC foundation,starters suitable specify electric motor, discharged ar ectron

1 .

valves and accessories as per typical connectionsorawrngs.

15500-1

the

o

O

The pump shall be suitable for quiet and coniinuous operation at actual head anddischarge, the pump shall be closed coupled type, single stage, cast iron bodyand impeller.

The casing and bearing housing shall be of cast ifon, highest point in the casingshould be provided with air vent and lowest point should be provided with drainplug.

The shaft seals shall be mechanical seal type.

The impeller, irnpeller guide, glands, stuffing box ring, and shaft sleeve shall beof cast iron.

The shaft shall be of steel, tumed and ground.

The bearing frame qssembly of the pump should be fitted with non-graspable ballbearing equivalent to electric motor's bearing standard.

The pumo and motor shall be mounted on a common base plate of heavystructuralsteel.

The pump casing shall be designed to withstand a discharge head specified plusthe static head on system plus 50% of total head, but not less 10 Bars.

The electric motors shall be ddp proof type provided with suitable starters andtotally enclosed. Fan cooled type, with overload protection.

The pumps shall be non-overloadrng at any point on the characterisiic curve.

The flexible connection shall be provided on discharge ofthe pump.

Eleciric motor shall have Class "F" insulation for high ambient temperature

PUMP AND MOTOR

4.1 POTABLE WATER PUMP & MOTOR

4.1.1 Specifications

The pump sets will consist of close coupled, horizontal, centrifugalpumps of specified capacity and head and duty and shall behorizontally mounted, totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrelinduction motors of specified power.

Pump materialshall be as under:15500-2

o Body Fine grained grey cast iron.impeller BronzeShaft Bronze or stainless steel

Pumps shall have mechanical seal. The suction and dischargeflanges shall be rated for a working pressure of 10 kg/cm'zforpotable water pumps. The flanges shall be dril led to BS 19 (Table'D' or 'E') or BS 4504.

l\ilotors shall run on 3-phase, 400 volts + 'l0olo, 50 cis A,/C powermotors shall be protected from low voltage, overload, andovefieating and phase failure.

4.1.2 Installation

Potable water pumps and motors shall be installed on concretefoundation with anchor bolts.

4.1.3 Operation

For potable water pumps, one pump shall be duty and one shallbe standby. Duty shall however change between the pumps oneach starvstop/cycle of the pumP.

Operation ol potable water pumps shall be controlled by waterIevel indicators provided on the roof tank of the building.

- Duty pumps shall automatically start, when the water levelreaches the low water level-1 (L.WL-1)

- Duty pumps shall automatically stop when the water levelreaches high water level (H.W.L).

- In case the duty pump fails to start, the stand by pump shallstad automatically at lowest water level-2 (L.W.L.-2).

In case the stand by pump also fails to start, the emalarm will be automatically sounded.

ACCESSORIES

5.1 Pressure Gauge

Strainers shall be'Y'types with bronze body and75mm diameter Screen shall be of 20 mesh monel-

Pressufe gauge shall be of copper alloy, bourdon tube type with 100 mmdiameter dial face. The dial shall be engraved in black on whitebackground from zero to 6 bars or 1.5 times the working pressurewhichever is larger. Gauge shall be installed socket welded to the pipelinewith the isolating plug/ball valve. Gauge shall be installed no highef than1.8 M above the finished floor. lf the pipeline installation is such that theabove requirement can not be met pressure gauge of remote readingtype shall be installed.

5.2 Y-Stfainers

15500-l

threaded ends upto

a Strainers above 75 mm shall have Cast lron body with flanged ends:Screen cover shall be provided with blow off tapping. Screen shall be ofperforated stainless steel.

36 holes per Sq.Cm., with'1.14 mm diameter and 0.5 mm thick. Allstrainers for water supply application shall be suitable for 10.5k9/Crn2and 120 degree C. All strainers for fire protection service shall be suitableIo( 21 Kglom2 and 120 degree C.

5.3 Foot Valve for Pumps

Shall be installed on the suction Line of the pumps where required orindicated on the drawing. Foot valve shall be of brass, and shall beprovided with integral strainer. Foot valve shall be provided with a springloaded vertical check disc with gasket for tight shut-off.

MOTOR PROTECTION

Motors of 3kw or less power shall be started direct on line. Larger motors shall besiarted by Star-Delta Starter.

Motor shall be protected against under voltage over voltage ovedoad, over-heating and phase failure.

Motor shall be rated for normal operation against a voltage fluctuation of + 10oloand frequency fluctuation +2H2.

MOTOR CONTROL PANEL

Refer to relevant electrical specifications and drawings.

MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TOOLS

8.1 A book or books containing the complete information in connection withthe assembly operation, lubrication, adjustment and repair of the pumpingequipmenl, electic motot, together with the detailed parts list with thedrawings or photographs shall be furnished in duplicate.

For the pumping station, special tools necessary for maintenance andrepair of the pumps and electric motors including tools kits, grease gunsetc. with accessories shall be furnished

The equipment to be supplied for the pumping staiion shall be providedwith spare parts necessary to the operational and maintenance for'1 year.

The manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts to be stocked by theAuthority shall be submitted by the Contfactor to the Engineer forapproval. Such spare parts will also be furnished by the Contractor.

Allthe maintenance manuals, tools, spare pads etc., shall be supplied bythe Contractor at no cost of the Authority and all cost shall be deemedincluded by the Contfactof in his bid against item of pumping set.

6.

8.

7 .

8.2

8.3

8 .4

8.5

15500-4

]}

s-00991

'peurceds uoM eql JoJ lueLlr^ed llnJ oq lleqs prqlunoLue aql sallllueno lo llr8 eql ur prq les ourdurnd rad eleJ llunalqecrldde eql le appu eq lleqs ourq9eur burdurnd .iol lueLu^ed

lueurled Z t 6

'JaeurouS atll Iq palceJlp se ro OOgur Jo 'urereq peupads se 'sourl^erc o$ uo uMoqs se cle 'sued

aJeds 'slool 'slenueu 'selJossecce lle 'sJolouJ cupele 'sdulnd

eq] ourpnlcur 'IJeulqceur ourdund oql ouuelsul pue outpt,rojd ;olsoc epnlcur lleqs Lle s ]l lsureoB prq s,.rolcerluoC eql :uoQrsod ulpellelsur pue papr^oJd elqeldecce sles 6urdu]nd Jo Jaqulnu lenlceeql oq lleqs ,{Jeurqceu.r ouldund lo tueui^ed roj lueuaJnseeL\

lueuJalnseor! t l, 6

fuou!qce|l! 6uldund l'6

tN]W,^.vd oNV lNfh|:|Unsv: lo

o

1 .

sEcTtoN - 15500

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

SCOPE

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of soil, waste and vent systemincluding, laying of pipe, jointing, cutting, excavation, backfi l l ing as specified hereinand as shown on drawings and as per instruction of Engineer.

MATERIAL

a. Cast lron Spun Pipes

Cast lron Spun pipes confirming to British Standard Specifications No 8S416 of1973 for soil, waste and vent system. Only cl spun fitting and specials will be used.

b. UPVC Pipes

3. INSTALLATION

All horizontal drainage piping should be installed in practical alignment ata uniform downstream slope'1:40 for pipes 4" and smaller and 1:100 forlarge pipes. Vent piping should be installed in practical alignment andsloped up works continuously from the lolvest connection with soil orwaste piping to its termination in the atmosphere above the building roof.

All underground soil, waste and vent fittings should be of "Y" type, longbend, 135o bends or as shown on the dfawlngs.

All underground pipes should be laid on a firm natural bed of earth for itsentire length, clean earth, sand or screened gravel should be placedunder, around and above the piping to at least 'l ft above it, and com-pacted carefully. Thereafter excavated earth should not be allowed intrench as backfill material.

t .

iv. All horizontal soil and waste piping should be provided with cleanouts/plug as required for fodding. An accessible clean out should beprovided at the base of the soil and waste stack

v. All supports and hangers will be provided and installed as perrecommendation of pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer'

The lubricant sealant asused.

recommended by the pipe manufacturer will be

{r15s00-l

a

1.

t

sEcTloN - 15600

SEWERAGE SYSTEM

SCOPE

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of sewerage system including, layingof pipes, excavation, backfilling and construction of manholes specified herein: asshown on drawings and as per instruction of Engineer In charge.

The work to be done under this section of the Specifications consists of providing allmaterial, labour, equipment and appliances and in performing alloperations includingearthwork, concrete, block masonry, plaster, fixing manhole cover and frame, makingholes etc. in connection with proper installation of miscellaneous sewerappurtenances i.e. manholes, grease traps, gully traps etc. complete in strictaccordance with this section of the Specifications and the drawings, and subject tothe terms and conditions of the Contract. All sewer appurtenances shall be placed atlocations on lines and levels as shown in the drawings and as directed by theEngineer.

MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION

i. R.c.C. pipes shall conform to B.S.S. 556(1955).

[ . The jointing of R.C.C pipes with collars shall be done first with tat cloih(dipped in silicon cement) fiited between the ends of the pipes andpressed together. the width. of the cloth shall not be less than 4" or asdirected by the Engineer. The collar shall than be brought in the middle ofthe joint, wooden wedges shall be placed at two or three places aroundthe pipe for pressing together. At a time five or six pipes shall be jointedtogether. After putting hemp rope suitable jacks and wedges or any otherapproved method shall be used. The inside of the collar and the outsidepodion of the collar and outside portion of the pipe shall be cleaned withbrush and cement mortar of 1-1 proportion shall then be inserted fromboth end of the collar. The mortar containing as little quantity of water aspossible shall be carefully inserted on the joints and tightly pressed withcaulked tool. The mortar shall be finished off on the outside at an angle of

O45 degrees. The wooden wedges shall be carefully removed. The jointsshall be protected from weather and maintained wet for at least tenand shall not be covered with back fill until the joints have beenand approval given by Engineer.

MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

t.

ii. Brick work to manholes and chambers shall be carried out with cementmorlar (1:3). The mortar shall be faked out at the joints as the workproceeds. The brick work shall be plastefed with water proof cementplaster ('1:3) 3/4" thick and finished smooth with cement from inside andflush pointed from outside.

i i i . The sizes of the manholes and chambers shall be the inside dimensions.

The size of manholes and chambers shall be according to the drawias directed.

Manholes covers shall be 4" thjck R.C.C. with standard weight CME m18" cast iron cover as shown on the drawing or as directed byEngineer Incharge.

15700-1

o All C.|/MS. covers steps, and grating shall be painted with three coats ofbitumastef paint.

The inverts and benchings shall be properly shaped to the forms anddimensions shown and shall be rendered with two coats of granolithicconcrete and brought upto a smooth face to the forms and gradientsindicated on the drawings. Steps shall be provided when depths exceed 1m from ground levelto benching.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, every manholes shall beprovided with a cast iron frame and cover of dimensions shown on theorawrngs.

All manhole covers shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, ffeefrom faults, cracks and other defects affecting their strength The covershall have a continuous and even bearing on the frame, and shall beproperly set to avoid knocking. All inequalities, projections or roughnesson abutting surfaces of the cover and the frame shall be removed, andthe cover fitted into the frame as neatly as possible without jamming.

vii .

4. GULLY TRAP

Glazed ware gully trap with chamber and Cl cover shall be used on the wastesystem from the sewer as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. ltshall be 75mm water seal.

5. SEPTIC TANKSeptic Tank shall be constructed in brick of concrete as per drawings. Thespecification for brick construction shall be as given in CivilWorks section 04'100 andthat for concrete as given in section 03300.

vii i .

15700-2

o sEcTtoN - 15700

BORING / DRILLING & INSTALLATION OF WELLS

Borehole Construction

Borehole shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent damage andleakage of pipe joints due to the dril l ing and shall be true to the dimensions, andgrades of the material with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape so as to leavethe finished works true to the dimensions shown on drawings or required by theEngineer and with the installation finish as specified.

Borehole pipes of exposed surfaces shall preferably be painted with appfovedpaints, or may with the Engineer's permission, be of uniform thickness. Exposed

1 . DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of furnishing all materials, plant, equipment and labourand performing all operations in connection with furnishing, water divining, bodngdrilling, development complete in place and in strict accordance with theseStandard Specifications, the Drawings, Special Provisions or as directed by theEngineer.

The Contractor shall furnish the bore in accordai"ice with an itemized list, whichwill be furnished to the Engineer, showing the number and lengths of the bore.

After the borehole has reached its final stipulated positions, after the sampleshave been taken out, as required by the Engineer and the borehole has beencompletely cleaned of all loose matter and otherwise made ready to receive thereinforcement and thereafter the concrete, the contractor shall so inform theEngineer.

Material requirements

Material shall be of Steel, wood, metal or other approved materials and shall befree from faults such as cofrosion, decay and time dependent erosion etc.matedal should be of sufficient rigidity to prevent from defects due to theeffect and other loads incident to the construction operations. /!

3. Borehole Design and Drawings

The Contractor shall prepafe working drawings and furnish material data foBorehole along with auxiliary equipment to be submitted to the Engineer forapproval unless otherwise directed.

o

prpesipes shall be smoothed at all sharp corners and shall be given rounded surfacesin the case of all projections, to ensure easy maintenance and removal

Fasteners consisting of bolts, clamps or other devices shall be used asnecessary. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to hold bolts lnposition will be permitted after getting approval from the Engineer. Metal tiesanchorage within the pipes shall be so installed as to permit theif maiwithout injury to the borehole.

15700-1

'tt q . " \

\t

\:o"..,4

The inside surfaces of pipes shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and foreignmaterial. Pipes which will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated with formoil prior to use. The form oil shall be of a good quality or other approved coatingwhich will permit the ready release of the pipes.

Soiland earth shall not be deposited on the pipes unti lallwork in connection withconstructing the borehole has been completed, all materials required to beembedded ln the concrete have been placed for the unit to be poured, and theEngineer has inspected and approved the borehole and materials.

The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness, and surface smoothness of usedpipes shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged portion must beresized and reshaped before being reused. Pipes that are unsatisfactory in anyrespect shall not be used.

lnsoection

Borehole will be inspected at the installation site. The Contractor shall notify theEngineer when materials have been delivered to the site and shall give theEngineer at least ten (10) days' notice before commencing the drilling operation

The Contfactor shall fumish to the Engineer, a copy of all mill orders, certified milltest reports and a Certificate of Compliance for all structural steel to be used inthe work other than steel which is to be used under the provisions as"Unidentified Stock l\4aterial". Certified mill test reports for steels with specificimpact values shall include, in addition other tesi results, the results of Charpy V-notch impact tests. Certified mill test reports and Certificates of Compliance shallbe furnished prior to start of drilling. The Certificates of Compliance shall besigned by the manufacturef and shall certify to the Engineer the specifications towhich the material has been manufactured and tested, and that the material is inconfofmance with the said specifications and test requirements.

Material to be used shall be made available to the Engineer so that the eachpiece can be examined. The Engineer shall have free access at all times toportion of the site where said material is stored or where work on said mateibeing performed.

DeveloDment of Well

The development of well shall be for a specified time as indicatedEngineer. The Contfactor shall furnish all equipment for the development of we

Testing and Commissioning of well

The testing & commissioning shall be for a period of al leasl 72 hours. TheContractor shall furnish all equipment for the testing and commissioning.

Equipment and Accessories

The bore pipe Casing shall be PVC 5 mm thick with PVC micro strainer at lower10 meter depth or as specified in the water diviner/ testing report or as showndrawings and as approved by the Engineer. The pump/ motor shall be of remake KSB or eouivalent. lt shall be provided with motor control unit and

15700-2

c accessories as indicated in the bill of quantities. The specificationsshall be as given in water supply.

pipes

L Measurement and Payment

The quantity to be paid for, shall be the calculated theoretical number ofkilograms of different shapes of members.

The items to be paid shall include erection and installation with protective coating(painting). The measurement shall be the total weight of the finished membercomprising pipes, rolled sections, shear connectors, stiffeners, splice plates andall incidentals, necessary to complete the item, without allowance for tolerancefor rolling margin and other permissible deviations from standard weights, andincluding the weights of welds, fillets, bolts, nuts, washers and pfotectivecoatings. No deductions shall be made for notches, holes and the like each lessthan 0.01 souare meter measured in areas.

15700-l

1 .

sEcTloN - 15990

TESTING OF WATER TANKS

SCOPE

The work under this section of the specifications includes furnishing all labour,plant, equipment, appljances and materials by the Contractor and performing alloperations in connection with testing of water tank for imperuiousness, complefein strict accordance with this section of the specifications, the applicabledrawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract The scope ofthis section of specification is covered with detailed specification as laid downheretn.

TESTS

2.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Engineer's Representative inadvance of making the imperviousness test, so that arrangement may bemade for their presence to witness the test.

2.2 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for all devices, material, supplies,labour required for alltest.

2.3 The Contractor shall fill the water tank with water for a period of sevendays After expiry of this period, the Contractor shall record the level of thesurface of water and further observations be recorded at intervals of 24hours for seven days. The permissible drop in the surface level of tankdue to absorption and evaporation shall be decided by the Engineer' !fthe total drop in the surface level does not exoeed 12mm (1/2 inch) inseven days, the water tank may be deemed to be water tight.

When the water tank does not satisfy the conditions of the test, and thedaily dfop in water level continues, the period of test may be extended forfurther seven days observation and if. the specified limits is then reachedthe structure may be considered as satisfactory.

2.4 Att test shall be made in the presense and to the satisfaction of theEngineer/Engineef s Representative.

2.5 During the test the outside surface of tank shall be inspected by theEngineer for any leakage and wet patches.

2.6 lf during the test the tank is found leaking the Contractor would suggest tothe Engineer necessary remedial measures which will be carried by theContractor at his own cost after approval by the Engineer.

2.7 Approval by the Engineer \.tvill not relieve the Contfactor of hisobligation of making the tank tight.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Measurement

lvleasurement ofbe made on job

acceptably completed works of tesiing of water tankbasis including all devices, materials, supplies and I

contractual

15990-1

I required for testing of water tank, water used for testing of water tank, allremedial measures to make the reservoir water-tight, etc complete.

Payment

Payment will be made for acceptably completed job of testing anddisinfection of reservoir on lump sum basis quoted in the Bills of Quantitiesand shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the item

3.2

I

o

c15990-2

1 ,

sEcTtoN - 16010

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of this contract covers all operation and activities required forconstruction of the works related to the Electrical that are included in the scope ofthis Contract are shown on the Tender Drawings, stated in the Bill of Quantitiesand explained in these Specifications. Allthe equipment & allied accessories andtheir installation shall also comply with General Specifications described here-under. with other relevant orovisions of Tender Document and other utilities'latest Specifications/Standards- Electrical & Communication systems shallbroadly include but not limited to the following:

- Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Lighting fixtures/Ceilingfans

- Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Low Voltage Singlecore/multicore PVC/PVC & PVC/SWA,/PVC Copper conductor cables.

- Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Earthing of Electricalsystem and grounding of atmospheric electric charge.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawing to The Engineer for his approval priorto start any activity/work.

The scope shall include the continuing of the contractor to remain responsible forremoval of defects detected in the works and for achieving satisfactoryoperation/functioning/service of the works during defect liability period.

The contract shall include furnishing of all construction equipment. tools, labour,supervisory staff, plants, transport, power, testing apparatus/arrangements andall construction materials as shall be required for satisfactory completion of worksstrictly in accordance with the Technical Specifications and Bill of Quantitiesforming part of these Tender Documents and as per levels and dimensions asshown on the drawings supplied with these tender documents and in drawingswhich may be supplied by the Employer from time to time under approvedvariation orders.

The Contractor shall also be responsible to supply any other equipment notspecifically mentioned in these Documents but which is necessary for properope|ation of the works/ system included in the scope of this Contract. TheContractor shall solely be responsible for ensuring proper functionalrequirements of various equipments. He shall also be responsible for furnishingany additional piece of equipment and for making modification in the equipmentas desired and/of approved by the Project lvlanager to achieve proper co-ordination with various other eouipment's offered in the bid and also with thoseinstalled by others.

16600-1

2. RULES & REGULATIONS

The entire Electrical & Communication systems installation/work shall be carriedout by licensed Contractor, authorized to undertake such woR under theprovisions of the Electricity Act 19'10 and The Electdcity Rules 1937 as adoptedand modified upto date by the Government of Pakistan.

All works shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edilion of theRegulations of the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by the lnstitute ofElectrical Engineerc-London, 16'n edition, NEC 1999, the Contract Docqments,the Electricity Rules 1937 and bye-laws that are in force from time to time.

Any discrepancy behreen these specjficaiions and the standards/ regulationsshall be brought to the notice of Project Manager for his instructions and decisiono the Project lvlanager shall be final and conclusive.

The Contractor shall be responsible completing all formalities and submitting thetear certificates as per prevailing rules and regulations, and shall have theinstallation passed by the Government Electric Inspector of that region. AIIrequirements of the Electdc Inspector and the utility company shall be compliedwith.

MARKINGS

The Contractor shall provide "Danger Boards" and "Shock Charts", whereverrequired, to comply with the requirements of local Electricity Rules and accordingto normal practice.

4. STANDARDS

The latest standafds and codes of reputable organizations shall be applicable forthe material and equipment specified herein and for installaiion work. Suchorganizatiois shall be British Standard Insiitution (BSS), International Electrotechnical Commission (lEC), IEEE and NEC. In case the Specifications laid downherein differ from those given in the standards, then the better specifications shallgovern. Wherever applicable, the equipment shall also conform to therequirements of Pakistan Standards Institute (PSl).

5. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

All equipment shall be boxed, crated or otherwise enclosed and protected duringshipment, handling, storage and after installation until final acceptance of theequipment. Electrical matedals shall be delivered in manufacturer's originalcaftons or containers with seals intact, as applicable. Large multi-componentassemblies shall be delivered in sections that facilitate field handling andinstallation.

Unless designed for outdoorand covered from exposurehaving anti-friction or sleeve

use, all equipment shallto weather. Electricalbearings shall be sto

be kept dry, otf the groundequipment and equipmentd iar&qather tight storage

16600-2

7.

8.

facilities. Heaters in equipment shall be connected and operated until theequipment is placed in operation. The Contractor shall prevent corrosion,contamination or deterioration of stored equipment.

Equipment and materials shall be handled in accordance with manufactufer'srecommendations. Large or heavy items shall only be lifted from the designatedpoints. Padded slings and hooks shall be used for lifting to prevent damage.

All equipment shall be protected until final acceptance and all factory surfacesmust be protected from impact, abrasion, discolouration and other damage. Alldamaged equipment must be repaired or replaced before final acceptance.

MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall supply to the Project Manager Three (3) copies ofmanufacturer's instruction manuals in properly bound form for installation, testing,commissioning, operation and maintenance of the specified equipment includingmanuals of spare parts and tools of the equipment. One copy of the documentsshall be submitted in odginal. The installation instructions shall be submitted four(4) weeks prior to commencement of installation of each equipment andoperation & maintenance instructions at least two (2) weeks before the time ofcommissioning. lf the contractor fails to provide the documents, the PfojectManager shall withhold issuance of requisite ceftificates and deduct suitableamount from the payments to the Contractor.

GUARANITEE

In addition to the Contractor's guarantee and liabilities fof satisfactory operationof the works, wherever advised by Project Manager, the Contractor shall alsofurnish written guarantee of the manufacturer or supplief with respect tosatisfactory performance of each equipment. Guafantee shall be given fofreplacement and repair of part or whole of the equipment that may be founddefective in material or workmanship. The guarantee shall as a minimum coverthe duration of Maintenance Period as defined in the Conditions ofContfact. ThisguaEntee shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and he will be fullyresponsible for the repair or replacement of any defective material in time, so asnot to cause any undue delay in carrying out the repairs and/or replacements.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipmeni required toinstall, connect, test and commission all electrical equipment specified herein,whether or not such equipment is furnished by him or by others.

16600-3

o

sEcTtoN - 16020 SWITCHES, SOCKETS AND ACCESSORIES

A) GENERAL

Switches to 8S-3676, sockets to 85-196/546 ceiling roses, to B5-76 etc. generally toBS-5733 shall be of while moulded plastic, all insulated type, suitable flush mounting.

b) swtTcHES

Switches shall be of Architect's approved make or as per Bill of Quantities and to beinstalled on 16 SWG sheet steel back box where specified on drawing two way switchshall be installed.

Unless otherwise specified, wherever switch control only the light points, these shall begang type switches installed on outlet boxes.

For locations where switches and fan regulators are installed together, single switchesshall be grouped and multi holes face plate screwed to a sheet steel box of appropriatedimension. The fixing of plate on outlet boxes shall be by means of flat headcountersunk galvanized screw with the head of the screw finish with the suface of theplate. Except of switches controlling light points, all single switches for fans, sockets,etc., shall have identification symbol on the operating levers.

c) swtTcH socKET uNlr-1 PHASE.

Switch - socket units shall be 250 volts a.c 3 pin, rated for 13 or 15 Amps, combined 3pin rated for 5 / 10 Amps, or a specified in the bill of quantities.

The 15 A, 3-Pin switch socket unit shall be Multipurpose pins whereas for computeroower it shallf lat oin.

d) OUTLET BOXES

The outlet boxes for installation of switches, fan dimmers and sockets outlet shall be ofwooden having appropriate dimensions. The box shall have knock-out nipple welded forreceiving the conduit. An earth terminal for connecting specified earth continuityconductor shall be provided. The outlet box shall be given one coat of anti- rust oxideprimer and finished in heavy enamel gray paint. These shall be recessed mounted suchthat face Dlate or 0lastic sheet shall flush with the wall surface. An earth connectingterminal shall be Drovided in the box.

e) cEtLtNG ROSE

The ceiling rose, wherever provided at light points, shall be suitable for 5 Amps, 250volts, single phase AC. lt shall have white plastic moulded base plate, copper or brassterminals for wiring with 2.5 sq.mm cable. The ceiling rose shall have a dome coverhaving cable inlet hole. Terminalfor connecting the ECC shall be provided.

16600-4

o

g) |NSTALLAT|ON

Switches and switch sockets unit shall be installed on recessed-in-wall on 1.63mm thicksheet steel boxes or as specified, having appropriate dimensions. At locations whereswitches and fan dimmers are provided at one place, these shall be grouped togetherand installed on a common sheet steel box so as to finish flush with the surface of thewall. These shall be fixed by means of flat head galvanized screws sunk in the plasticDlate so as to finish with the surface.

h} INSTALLATION

Prime quality fan dimmer with switch with plastic/Pvc back box complete in all respectsas appfoved by The Engineer. (Clipsal, Legrand)

o16600-5

o

sEcTIoN 15030 WIRE AND CABLES

A) GENERAL

The Cont|actor shall fumish and install all wires and cables along with the accessoriesas specified herein, in Bill of Ouantities and Drawings. Apart from the material specified,the Contractor shall provide, the necessary material for termination or fixing of wires andcables such as lugs, solder, supports, bushes, glands for a complete widng installation.lvliscellaneous materials, like filing compound, identification tags, markers and earthingstrips shall be furnished for completion ofworks in accordance with the best engineerjngstandards and practice. The wifing installation shall be carried out in strict accordancewith the scheme, cable sizes and circuit details shown on the drawings or as specified.The contractor is to produce purchase certificate from recommended manufacturers IikePakistan Cables, New age Cables or fast Cables for each & every lot and each andevery coil of wires to be stamped by consultants before it is being sent to site for use.

b) L.V. CABLES AND WIRING

Cable and conductors shall be PVC insulated, PVC sheathed with copperconductors, single /multicore, armoured/ unarmoufed 450/750 volts g|ade for light andsocket circuits and 600/'1000 grade for motor power circuits, to BS 6004 and BS 6346

The neutral and phase conductors shall be coloured black and red/yellowbluerespectively. The circuit protective conductors shall be of hard drawn stranded bareelectrolytic copper above the size ot 6mmx2 (12 SWG), & for 6 sq.mm and below agreen PVC insulated conductor shall be used.

Each cifcuit shall have its own separates neutral, and the "looping in" system for wiringshall be used. Joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards and panels,sockets outlets, light fan points and switch boxes only; no joints shall be made in jointboxes, nor will any "through joints" be allowed.

PVC/PVC 3-core flexible cords, shall be used for connection to the luminaries andfixtures from the ceiling rose/outlet box, through 3-terminal PVC connectors. Soldered orcrimped tinned copper lugs, shall be used on the termination of cables and conductors'lOsq.mm and larger. All multi-core cables shall be provided with compression glands, ofthe correct size and type, at panel entry positions.

c) INSTALLATION

The wiring through exposed or concealed conduit shall be started only after the conduatsystem is completely installed and all junction boxes, outlet boxes, switch boards, etc.have been fixed in proper position. For outdoor installation, where specified the cablesshall be run direct in ground or in pipes as specified. The cables shall be pulled throughconduit or pipes with care to prevent any damage to cables. To facilitate pulling,lubrication only as recommended by cable manufacturer may be used for decreasingfriction. Under no circumstances shall oil or soap be used for cable pulling. Whereseveral wires are to occupy the conduit or pipes they shall be pulled along together withearth continuity conductor. ln general, the wires shall not be bend to radius less than ten

16600-6

times the overall diameter of the wire, or as otherwise recommended by cable manufac-turer. The contractor shallfurnish all installation material and labor for installation, testingand commissioning of cable system.

The wiring to power circuit and 15 amperes single phase socket outlet shall be run anconduit separate from light wiring conduits. Care shall be taken to ensure that all phaseconductors are connected to the proper terminals and correct phase sequence ismaintained. Wherever the size of conduit is not stated on drawings, it shall be inaccordance with the following Table based on l.E.E. Regulations.

TABLE FOR NUMBER OF WIRES TO BE LAID IN GIVEN SIZE OF PVC CONDUIT,

WIRE SIZE OF CONDUIT(sq.mm.) ( mm. dia)

50382520

1.52 .54 .06 .010.016.0

13 20I '13

3 6 1 '14834 ;

2

2

The wires or cables shall be terminated at lighi points, switchboard, etc. such that theinsulation is always led into the equipment to which connection is made. The cable entryhole in equipment shall be such as not to damage the cable. Inside the switchboards orcontrol boards, the wires or cables shall be securely fanned out in a neat arrangementand laced with wax cord. The wires of different phases shall preferably be bunchedseparately. ldentification tags or ferrules shatl be provided at termination of wires inswitchboards with respect to connected equipment for ease of installation andmatntenance.

d) POWER, LIGHTING IKVAND CONTROL CABLES.

'1.4.1 Under ground Cables

PVC Cable for underground installation shall be PVC insulated, sheathed and armoredwith galvanized steel wire of specified sizes.

'1.4.2 Surface Cables

Cables for distribution sysiem on surface shall be either single-core or multicroe,as required and PVC insulated and PVC sheathed.

16600-7

1.4.3 Cables in Conduits

All cables/wires, in conduits shall be of copper, PVC sheathed or PVC insulated.

PHASE IDENTIFICATION

All cables shall have phase identification colours on insulation of each phase The colourcode for three phase circuits shall be red, yellow and blue for phase conductor and blackfor neutral conductor.

Single phase circuits shall have red for phase and black fof neutral conductor.

e) CABLE ACCESSORTES

Best quality cable accessories should be used with the approval of consultant. The cableaccessories, include, cable tray, cable trunking, floor trunking, clips, saddles (allgalvanized). Cable glands made of brass should be used when cable enters/leaves apanel/Distribution Board. ldentification tags made of engraved brass plates to be usedfor all cables. All the cables should be security fixed to cable tray or trunking with help ofplastic ties. Cable lugs should be compression type of BICC U.K, Elpress Sweden orequivalent. Lugs should be pressed with help of compresslon machine approved byconsultants.

I} CONDUITWIRING-INSTALLATION

The wiring through conduit shall be started only aftef the conduit system is completelyinstalled and all outlet boxes, junction boxes, etc. are fixed in position.

The wires shall be pulled in conduit with care and, to facilitate pulling, the cablemanufacturefs recommended lLlbricant shall be used. Use of any kind of oil or soap willnot be permitted.

Where several wires afe to be dfawn in thb same conduit, they shall be pulled together.The wires shall not be beni to a radius less than ten times the overall diameter of thewire, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

The wiring shall be coniinuous between termination. The looping in system shall befollowed throughout. Any joint in wires will not be allowed. The use of connectors willonly be allowed at location where looping-in is rendered difficult. The consent of theConsultant in writing, will be required for using connectors. The connector shall be ofsuitable rating having pofcelains body, sunk-in screw terminals and terminal strips Theconnector shall be wrapped with PVC insulation tape after its installation. A minimum of150 mm extra length of cableltire shall be pfovided at each termination to facilitaterepairs in future.

g) WIRING SYSTEM / CONDUIT

All electical work shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition(including amendments) of'The IEE Regulation for the Electrical Equipment ofBuildings" except where such regulations are modified by these specifications.

16600-8

h) MATERIALS

a. Except where otherwise specified all materials shall be supplied fixed,connected and completed by the contractor.

b. (1) All materials shall comply with the relevant and latest BS orequivalent Pakistan Standad Specifications.

(2) Fittings and Accessories:- Allthe fittings andaccessories should conform cunent British or its equivalent Pakis-tan standard Specifications. No material of inferior quality shall beallowed for use in work.

(3) Cable of Conductori All cable and cords shall be of CIVIA grade orequivalent Pakistan grade, approved by Engineer ln-charge from timeto time.

(4) Sizes of Conductors:- The minimum sizes of conductors shall be:-

conductor of 1.ssq.mm

t

sectionalarea.

(iD Lighting flexible cords with conductorof0.75sq.mm sectional area.

(iiD Power cables with conductors of 2.50sq.mmsectionalarea.

(iv) Sub-mains cables wlth conductors of 4sq.mm sectionalarea.

Any other size of conductors when required shall comply with IEE regulations and asspecified in BOQ.

5) Socket Outlet Points (3 Pin, 5 Amps and 15 Amps):-

(i) Socket outlets shall be of shuttered pattern.

(i) Lighting cables with

BUILDING WORK

The position all holes or cutting will be agreed with the Engineerjn-Chargebefore the work is taken in hand. All making good shall match the existingsurfoundrngs.

o16600-9

l ) SITING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

The siting of cable/conduit runs, conirols, fittings, accessodes, etc., mustbe in accordance with the plans and settled on site in conjunction with theEngineer-in-Charge before work commences.

The height from the floor levelto botiom offittings shall be as follows:-

(1) Main control.

(2) Distributionboard.

(3) Pendant and interior bracket

(4) board for lighting switches and fan regulators 1 25 m

(5) Socket outlets (generally).

a .

b.

1 .75 m

1 .75 m

I

1-sft

c. The siting of main switches, meters and distribution boards for oiflcer'sbungalows and important buildings shall be done inside the rearlsideverandah or in any suitable place in the rear of the building.

K) MOUNTING OF FITTING AND ACCESSORIES

b .

Ordinary pendant, batten and similar lighting fittings andshall be mounted direct in/on conduit box,/wooden blocks, etc.

Switch fuse, distribution board and the like shall be securedwood screws, coach screws, rag bolts or other suitable

accessones

by means ofmethod as

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

c. Spacer bar saddle shall be secured by screws of minimum length of 25mm,

CONDUIT WIRING

a. (1) The system shallscrewed steel conduitsspecified.

consist of single core PVC un-heated cables ininstalled for surface or concealed wiring as

2) The loop-in system shall be employedadvisable, teeing off by means of taped porcelainconduit boxes may be utilized as approved by the

Where necessary orheated connectors in

Engineer-in-Charge.

Conduit and Conduit Fittings:-

16600-10

(1) All other conduits shall be heavy gauge class B welded seam asper BSS 31 table 1 as given below. BSS-31 - Table 1

STANDARD DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS OFSTEEL CONDUIT

Outside dia

Threads per 25mm

Max. length of threadson ends.

Nominal ,thickness.

Minimum thickness.

Weight per meterbefore

25mm 40mm 50mm20mm

'16

14mm

1.83mm

'1.68mm

16

'17mm 20mm

'1.83mm 2.03mm

1.68mm 2.00mm

23mm

2.34mm

2.29mm

enameling/galvanizing 0.79k9 1.08k9 1.85k9 2.86k9

Conduit for magazines, explosive stores and POL installations shall be soliddrawn.

(2\ The conduit boxes and covers shall be of malleable cast iron and shallconform to latest specifications. Solid fittings will not be permiited.Inspection elbows tees or bends will be used for surface wiring at theends of conduits immediately behind fittings or accessofles wherespecif ically apProved.

(3) Fixing screws fof conduit and inspeciioh covers be of brass or rust proofmateial.

c. Erection:-

(1) All conduit and conduit fittings shall be erected befofe any cables aredrawn in. The number of cables allowed, in the conduits shall be inaccordance with IEE Regulations. All screwed connections shall be metalto metal and exposed screw thread and parts where the galvanizing orenamels has been damaged shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted withtwo coats of anti-corfosive paint, such painting being done as the workproceeds.

a16600-11

(2)

(3)

All points shall be such as to ensure perfect electrical continuity andwhere running joints are necessary, lock nuts shall be utilized.

Where conduit passes thfough principals, raftefs, purlins orjoists whetherof wood, iron or steel, these must be drilled in approved position to takethe conduits, the holes being of the smallest possible dia, consistent withrequrrements.

Whefe the conduit passes through a floor, wall, partition or ceiling thehole shall be made good with cement or similar incombustible materials tothe full thickness of the floor, wall, paftition or ceiling and space throughwhich a fire might spfead shall not be left. Junction between conduit andadaptable boxes, back outlet boxes and the like, not provided with entryspouts,, also between conduit and iron clad distribution boards andcontrol gear, shall be effected by means of lock nuts and conduit couplersinto which will be screwed a brass hexagonal smooth bore bush, from theinside of box or case. In addition to ensufe perfect continuity where boxesshall be fitted between the bush and box or case. Conduit system shall beerected as far as possible to avoid traps where water may accumulatefrom condensation.

Where this is unavoidable, suitable provision for drainage shall be madeConduit shall be kept at least '150 mm clear of and preferably belowsteam or hot watef pioes.

Bonding and Earthing:- All conduit system shall be electrically continuousthroughout the installation. The maximun conductivity resistance of theconduit together with earthing lead shall not exceed one ohm. All conduitsystems shall be efficiently earihed.

o

d .

m) SURFACE CONDUIT WIRING

No conduit shallbe lessthan 20 mm dia.

Normally the conduit shall be carried on the surface of walls and ceilings,but where conditions permit, the conduit may be run within hollow spacesof walls, floors, partitions, and ceilings or in roof spaces. Diagonal run willnot be permitted for surface wiring and particular attention shall be paidto "Sets" which must fit as close to the walls, etc., as possible. Theconduit shall be secured by means of spacer bar saddles made of Clpressed steel fixed at intervals of maximum 900 mm with a saddle withinlOO mm of each fitting or accessory. Spacer bar saddle plates shall be 3mm thick for conduits upto 40 mm dia and 5 mm for larger sizes ofconduit. The saddle plates shall be secured by wood screws. Whereconduit is attached to iron or steeljoists or pillars, suitable or girder clips'spaced at 900 mm

16600-12

intervals shall be utilized.

a

n) CONCEALED CONDUIT WIRING

a.(1) No conduit shall be less than 20 mm dia. Normally the conduit shall besunk in walls and ceilings to such depth that there is not less than 20 mmcover but where the construction of the buildings is such that it is foundimpossible or inadvisable to sink the conduit, may with the approval of theEngineer-in-Charge, be installed as for surface wiing.

The conduit shall be secured by means of hooks or other means fixed atintervals of 1.25 m or within 100mm of each fitting or accessory. Not morethan four bends shall be provided in a single run of conduit.

Q\ Where a concealed conduit is to traverse on RCC roofs, it shall beembedded in the concrete and not run on the surface of the slabs.

b. Where junction boxes are fixed in walls, etc., fofdrawing in, the covers must fit flush with the plaster at all points.

c. Where junction boxes are laid under or in concrete or floors, trapsof approved design having a flanged outer frame for keying intothe concrete, etc., and fitted with a recessed cover suitable forfilling in with the floor material shall be utilized.

Where junction boxes are laid undef wooden floors, properlyconstructed traps shall be put in the flooring and secured withsuitable counter sunk brass screws.

Number oftraps in the floors must be kept to a minimum.

Whefe flush type switches or socket outlets are specified, theplate must over-lap the caviiy and fit flush with the plaster at allpolnts. No "filling" or "packing" wili be permitted.

Conduit buried in plaster is, in ordinary circumstances, deemednot to be in a damp situation.

o

a

d .

e .

O) FLAME PROOF CONDUIT WIRING

(1)a. The system shall consist of single cofe PVC unheated cables in screwed steelconduits installed for suface wiring as specified.

(2) The loop-in system shall be employed. Where necessary or advisable, teeingby means of taped porcelain in heated connectors in conduit boxes mayutilized as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

(1) All conduits shall be class 'B' screwed, solid drawn, heavy gauge in accordancewith BS 3'1 of 1940.

(2) a. Fof Storage of Explosive Group-15.

offbe

i6600-13

'14

{3)

(4)

o

o.

c.

MAXIKIUM CAPACI|Y OF CANDT]ITS

20 mm 25 mm 40 mm so hmPVC / SteetpVC/ Steet pVCT Siuur pVC/ Steel

12 12 20 19 41 39

11 10 18 17 32 30

24240

The.fittings shall be flame proof dutu Ir"'ti"s i;;;"i#" 1#:"''#,'J":,:?i"".,{::rtffi . 35r""il; ":?,i!.3":,lxFor Slorage of Exploslve Groups_l,2accorqance wth Bss^3BoZl64

& 4. The fittings shall be du$t proof in

For Storage of Remaining Explosive Etraccorqance wrth BSS-2817157 L The fittings shall be totalty enclosed in

igl'",JJi::,'J"J ;ili:,*:x? j:$.jli;.x?il: :13,,i::,-,,ru,,,, jloJ.,',;:tt:iffi;t:$:*"t

sjzes or steet/pvc conduits jn rerms or cabres are siven in

Siz€ ofConduit

Size of Cables

1sq.mm

1.5 sq .mm

2.5 sq.mm

(1/1.78)

2.5 sq.mm

(7/0.67)

4 Sq.mm

6 sq.rnm

10 sq.mm

16 sq.ntm

25 sq.mm

35 sq.mm

70 sq.mm

7712 11

5599

4477

2244

2233

20

17

'11

9

7

4

3

2

19

16

10

8

6

3

3

38

30

19

17

13

7

6

36

28

18

6

5

a

--

16600-14

2 3

p) EARTHING (Neutral) Conductor

a. ln all cases where the supply conduclors include an earth neutral, anindication of a permanent nature shall be provided to enable such neutfalconductor to be distinguished from any live conductor at the point.

q) PRECAUTIONS VIS"A-VIS GAS, WATER SUPPLY, ETC., FITTINGS

In bath rooms, Iavatories, sculleries, kitchens, or any places where gas or watertaps or fittings or masses of metal connected to earth are handled, specialprecautions shall be taken so that it is impossible to touch the electricalapparatus fittings or the accessories and the gas or water system, etc,simuitaneously.

4 ITEMS DESCRIPTION FOR SMALL WIRING

Work under this includes supply, installation, testing and commissioning of allmaterial, labour, tools and accessories as required for the completion of systemin accordance with the specification, drawing and instruction of Engineer-Incharge.

All back boxes for switches and socket outlet to be of 16 SWG sheet steelwith provision for connection of earthing wire.

All wiring shall be done by 1-core PVC insulated wires inappropriate,ispecification conduit shall be installed in wall, column, ceiling, underfloor or exposed on surface.

s) LIGHT CIRCUIT WIRING

Widng with 2x2.5 sqmm+Ecc 1x1.5including any wiring between switch

sqmm 'l-core wires ffom DB to switch boardboards on some circuit.

t)

and

u)

SWITCH TO POINT WIRING.

Wiring from switch boafd to lighvfan point withas neutralfor all poini on one circuit .

POINT TO POINT WIRING

Same as wiring for "switch to point " but point to point.

V} POINT WIRING FOR TWO-SWITCH

3x1.5 sqmm for phase, ECC

o16600-15

a

o

w)

x)

v)

z)

Wiring between two-switches and lighufan point with 1.5 sq.mm wires. The sizeof neutral & ECC wires shall be as described in switch to point wiring. The sameshall be point to point wiring.

DB TO POINT WIRING

Wiring fof group control of light directly from Distribution board to first light pointwith 2x2.5 sqmm + 1x'I.5 sqmm 1-core wires as specified in BOQ.

Same wires shall be used for point to point wiring.

WIRING FOR lOA,SOCKETS

Wiring for 10A, 3-Pin Sockets shall be done with 3x2.5 sqmm wires from DB tofirst outlet including connection/ termination in sockets- The same wires shall beused for outlet to outlet wiring.

WIRING FOR 15A SOCKETS

Wiring for 15Ams. sockets shall be with 3x4 sq.mm or 3 x 6 sq.mm wires fromDist. Board to first socket outlet. The same wires shall be used for wiring fromoutlet, including connection on both ends

WIRING FOR AIR.CONDITIONING UNITSWiring for single phase A,/c units upto 2.0 tons shall be done with 3x6.0 sq.mmwires from Dist. Board to A/c outlet, including connection at both ends.

STANDARDS

tEc 71-1tEc 56

and IEC '129 For impulse level and test voltage.

tEc 185 / BS-3939tEc 186 / BS-3941

For circuit breaker.Current taansformer.Potential transformer.

o

a16600-16

a

a)

sEcTtoN - '16040 CONDUITS & PIPES

GENERAL

The work under this seclion consists of supplying, installing, and commissioningof all material and services of the complete conduit & pipe system asspecified herein andlor shown on Tender Drawings and stated in the Bill ofQuantit ies.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-ordinate at site with other services for exact route, location and position of theelectrical lines.

bt Pvc coNDUtTs

All wiring for light, power, control and other circuits shall be carried out in class-BPVC pipe, minimum 3/4" dia. The conduits and pipes shall be supplied completewith all accessories including bends, joints junction boxes and all cutting, repair,excavation backfilling, eic., requi.ed for complete installation. The conduits forinternal wiring to lights, sockets and power circuit shall be of approved brand.

Manufactured smooth bends shall be used wherever conduit change direction.The sharp 90 degree bends or tees shall not be allowed. All conduit accessoriesshall conform to same material specification as given above for conduit.

The bends shall have enlarged ends to receive conduit without any reduction inthe internal diameter atjoints.

The round junction box lor ceiling light polnts shall be of PVC having minimumdimensions of 63 mm diameter and 63mm deep. The outlet box at wall lightpoints shall be general purpose type having minimum dimensions of 63 mmdiameter and 38 mm deep. Pull boxes and inspection boxes shall be installed inconduit runs where required to limit the pulling of the cables or for inspectionpufposes. The pull boxes shall be square having minimum dimension of 100mmand 50 mm deep. In all cases, the minimum length of inspection boxes shall benot less than four times the cable manufacturers recommended bending radius ofthe cable.

These dimensions afe minimum only and the Contractor shall determine theexact size keeping in view ease of maintenance and installation. ln general theuse of pull boxes and inspection boxes shall be avoided. The pull boxes andinspection boxes shall be of 16 SWG. sheet steel provided with anti-rust paintand finished in gray enamel paint.

Wherever installed, pull boxes and inspection boxes shall have a cover of 3 mmthick ply- board with white formica sheet glued firmly to it. The face plate shall besecured to the box by means offlat head galvanized screw.

-A)

{,{ro

16600-17

a

c) GALVANIZED IRON (G.I) PIPES

The c.l. pipes shall be of M.S., galvanized inside and outside by hofdipgalvanizing process. The pipes shall be ffee from stains, burrs or any otherdefect, and shall conform to BS-'137. The accessories for G.l. pipes such assockets, bends, etc-, shall be galvanized inside and outside and shall be of samequality and specifications as the pipes.

G.l. pipes for underground installations shall be given bituminous paint coatingbefore installation.

STEEL CONDUIT

Where required, wiring shall be carried out in heavy gauge (5/8 inch minimumwall thickness, Class B) screwed steel conduit, to BS 31, minimum 3/4 inch dia,protected with two coats of rcd oxide anti-corrosion primer and two coais olenamel, clipped to the surface.

Conduit accessories, to BS 31, shall be cast-iron or of 16 b.g sheet steel conduilterminations shall be provided with soft, rounded, brass bushes and lock nuts.Saddles shall be of heavy duty hospital-type, and shall be installed at spaoesrecommended by the IEE regulations.

Additional supports in the form of 1-112 inch x l/8 inch flates ot 1-112 inch x1/8 inch angle iron shall be provided wherever necessary. No welding to thestructure shall be permitted.

Flexible steel conduit. to BS 731, shall be used for final connections to motorsand other equipment subject to vibration and movement. The flexible conduitshall be encased in water-proof plastic fixed with jubilee clips. Ends of theconduit shall be welded to brass couplers/adaptors.

R.C.C PIPE

Where required, cabling shall be laid in reinforced cement concrete pipes (ClassA), to ASTlvl C-14, installed 24 inches below grade, with 4 inches thick fineriddled / sieved sand bedding under and over the pipe. Joints in pipe shall bemade by wrapping one lap of a tarred gasket around the spigot of one pipe andplacing it into the collar of the other pipe. The joint shall be filled with cement-sand ('1:' l) mortar.

f) TNSTALLAT|ON

3.6.1 Conduits

The conduit shall be installed concealed in wall, column ceiling or underfloor, on surface, above the false ceiling oras stated on the drawings.The drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate the location of

d)

O

16600-18

o

junction boxes, pull boxes or inspection boxes which shall be provided tosuit site conditions.

The concealed conduits shall have a minimum of 25 mm concrete cover,when concealed in R.C.C works. The conduits in R.C.C works shall belaid before pouring of concrete. Chases shall not be made in R.C.Cstructure fof conduits and accessories after pouring of concrete. In slab,conduits shall be laid over the bottom reinforcernent steel and tied fkmlyto it. The conduit outlet boxes shall be held firmly to finish with the soffit ofthe slab or beam. At expansions joints, flexible conduits or alternatearrangement shall be Provided.

Where conduits have to be concealed in cement concrete work afterconcreting or in block masonry, chases shall be made with appropriatetools and of required depth. The conduit shatl then be tixed firmly in therecess and covered after plastering. All chases for concealing conduitsshall be carried out by the Coniractor. The Contractor will be responsiblefor bringing back the general finish to the condition that it was before thecutting and chiseling by the Contractor.

The work ofconduit installation and cutting in cement concrete work orbrick work shall be coordinated with civil construction so as not to causeany undue hindrances and delays in pfogress. The Contractor shallobtain approval of the Consultant for route, etc. to suit the site conditionsbefore starting chasing and cutting. Alljunction boxes, outlet boxes, pullboxes etc. shall be installed concealed so as to finish with the surface.

Conduits installed on surface sh6ll be fixed by means of blackenameled steel saddles and clamps having thickness of 3 mm. Theclamps shall be installed at a distance of not more than 600 mm.

Bending of conduits by heating or otherwise can be adopted provided thatthe recommendation of conduit manufacturers are stricily followed. Aftercompletion of conduit installation, the system shall be checked for anycharred or h^/isted portion prior to the pulling of wire. At all joints, PVCjointing solution must be used.

The termination of conduits is shown diagrammatically on the drawings-

The exact final location of the termination shall be coordinated with theequipment to be installed. Conduit ends pointing upwards or downwardsshall be properly plugged, in order to prevent the entry of foreignmaterials. All openings through which concrete may leak shall be carefullyplugged and boxes shall be suitably protected against tilling withconcrete. At all termination of conduit, soft bushes shall be fixed topfevent sharp edges of @nduit ends from cutting or damaging the wiresor cables to be pulled through them.

r6600-19

s)

The entire conduit system shall be installed and tested before wiring iscarried out. Any obstruction found shall be cleared by use of a cutting orother aooroved device and the conduit be cleaned out before theinstallation of cable.

3.6.2 Steel conduit

At all joints the pipe shall be firmly screwed and cotton yarnwith water- proof compound shall be used to make the

ioint water-Proof.

At each termination, the pipe end shall have threads and socketscrewed on thread for installing soft metal bush. The soft metalbush shall be of approved quality and shall be male type

The installation of pipes shall be complete in all respects includingits fixing at terminations before wiring work is started All sharpedges and burrs shall be removed by using reamer or anyaoDroved device.

OTHER ACCESSORIES

Outlet boxes, pull boxes, inspection boxes, switch and socket outlet boxes, fanregulator boxes, etc, to BS 4662, shall be of 16 SWG sheet steel' derusted,degreased, rust-proof wiih two coats of zinc chormate primer and painted withen;mel, complete with earthing teminal. All boxes shall have ample wiringsoace, and boxes used outdoors shall be weather-proof

o

o1660c-20

sEcTroN - 16050 LIGHTING FIXTURES

Tubular fluofescent lamps BS 1853Ballast for tubular f luorescent lamps IEC 60921Starters for fluorescent lamps BS 3772Lamp holders and starter holders for fluorescent lapscapacitors for use in TL, HP mercury and LP sodiumvapour discharge lamp circuits

a) GENERAL

All lighting finures complete with lamps, accessories, installation materials, etc.shall be furnished and installed as per drawings. The fixtures shall be designedand built to give reliable service continuously at the normal voltage and currentrating.

The light litting schedule is given on the drawing and each type is specified lndetail in the Bill of Quaniities. The manufacturefs type and catalog numberspecified shall serve as illustration of the type of fixture req!,ired and any otherapproved equivalent fitting shall be acceptable. The equivalency shall be basedon certified photometric data, as well as on construction material, shape, finish,etc. The Contractor shall submit complete technical details and/or samples ofeach and every lighting tixture specified and obtain approval of the Consultantbefore commencing with placement of order.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODESThe latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be applicable to thematerial soecified within the scope ofthis section:

tEc 60081tEc 60920

rEc 60400tEc 60566BS 3677BS 3767BS 4017

b) MATERIAL

a4.1 Fluorescent Light Fixtures

The fluorescent light fixtufes shall have lamps, ballasts, starters and power factorimprovement capacitors of proper rating. Each lamp shall be provided withindependent ballast.

The fluorescent lamps shall be tubular in shape. The fluorcscent

VOLTAGERATINGWATTS

LENGTHIt4t\l

LAtvtPCURRENT

16600-21

lamps shall have following minimum technical specifications:

(') After 100 burning Hours

The ballast shall be impregnated copper/iron type totally enclosed and suitable tooperate upto 250 Volt AC at 50 HZ. The power loss shall not be more than 10watts for ballasts of all ratings. A wiring diagram, wattage, voltage and currenlfigures shall be printed on the body of ihe ballast.

The lamp holders shall be rotary lock-in type. The starters shall be glow type withradio interference suppresser/by-pass capacitor.

The internal wiring of the fluorescent light fixtures shall be done with healresistant wires and provided with appropriate connectors for wiring.

The body of the fluorescent light fixtures shall be minimum 22 SWG sheet steel,derusted, degreased, finished in heat resistant paint, stove enameled.Appropriate size bushed wire entry holes, fixing holes and earth terminal shall beprovided.

C) MATERIALS

4.2.1. Fluorescent Light Fixtures

Fluorescent fixtures shall be of the 22 gauge sheet steel, with anti-corrosionbase treatment ofthe metal and white/gray stove-enameling, with deep drying byinfra-red lamps. Wire and bolts shall be of the corrosion resistant type. Allcomponents, high-efficiency fluorescent lamps, noiseless, lowjoss high p.f.electronic Ballast, rotary location{ype lamp holders, glow starters, with radiointerference suppression and holders, matching capacitors in a duo-circuit toimprove the p.f. to 0.95 etc., shall be compatible and of the best available quality.

All lluorescent light fixtures shall be provided with capacitofs for improving thepower factor to 0.9. The acrylic diffuser of fluorescent light fitting shall be 3mmthick.

The body of the light fitting shall be minimum 24 gauge sheet steel, finished instove enameled finish color as stated in manufacturer catalog unless otherwisedirected by the Consultant. Bushed wife entry holes and fixing holes of suitablesize shall be provided. The mouniing channels of fitting shall be painted withsprayed coat of white impact resistant coating of synthetic enamel.

4.2.'1.a Incandescent Light Fixtures

Recessed type down or up-lighter shall consist of Aluminum reflector inside it andIamp. The glass shade or globe of incandescent light fittings shall be of superiorquality glass, free from air bubbles or voids. The glass shall be opal white color

a16600-22

o

or clear as specified. The incandescent fitting shall have bi-pin lamp holders otbrass if not specifies in BOQ.

The surface-mounting incandescent or fluorescent light fittings shall be installedwith the fixture back, flush with the ceiling surface. Nylon plugs shall be used forfixing the fixture on the ceiling or wall. The pendant-type fluorescent light fittingshatl be hung from the ceiling by two 3/4 inch dia 16SWG white enameledtunbses swiel -joint hanger at the top for fixing directly on to the recessed outlelbox or on the ceiling. The recessed type fluorescent or incandescent light fittingshall be install recessed in the false ceiling by cutting the false ceiling to therequired dimensions, suah that the frame of the fitting overlaps the ceiling. Thefluorescent fittings to be installed in a row shall utilize end plates to fix the fixtufeends in level so as to form a continuous row without break or void.

4.2.1.b InternalWking

Internal wiring of fixture shall be with heat resistant wires and shall contain nospllces.

4.2.2 Construction Requifements

All metallic or extruded parts of lighting fixlures shall be close grained, soundand free from imperfections or discolorations. Cast or extruded parts shall beigid, irue to

pattern, of ample weight and thickness. Cast or extruded pads shall be properlyfitted, filed, ground buffed and chased to provided finished surface and joints ffeeof imperfections with all details of ornamentation brought out- Finished thicknessof all cast parts shall not be less than 3 mm. Excepi where specifically indicatedto the contrary, all fixtures shall be provided with a final synthetic hightemperature stove enamel coating of color and finish as specified or directed.Unless otherwise specified, all stove enameled reflective surface shall be white,with a minimum reflectance of 86% prior to painting. All parts shall receive properadhesive surface prepaEtion to assufe adequate paint adherence and durability.

Where slainless steel or non-ferrous metal surface other than reflector are toremain unpainted or whefe steel surface are to be electroplated they shall be,unless otherwise specified satin-finished and coated with a baked lacquer topreserve the surface. Where aluminum surface are treated with an anodizingprocess, the clear lacquer coating may be omitted.

Where aluminum is to be utilized as a reflector surface the aluminum shall betreated as specified by alzak or anodizing process to ensure a permanentreflective suface with a minimum 85% reflectance. Recessed fixtures shall bedesigned so as to be properly coordinated with the ceiling construction.

Fixtures shall be furnished with all appurtenances necessary for the propersupoort of the fixture. Frame shall be either manufactured of nonferrous metal orif manufactured of steel shall be suitablv rust-proof after fabrication as hereinbefore described.

o16600-23

o)

All lenses, louvers or other light diffusing elements contained in fixture framesshall be removable but positively held within the frame so that hinging or othermotion ofthe frame will not cause the diffusing element to drop out.

LIGHT FIXTURE FOR EXTERNAL ILLUIiIINATION

Incandescent and H.l.D. fixtures, to BS 232l'1950/3533 shall be of heavy gaugecorrosion-proof metal construction, with brass/porcelain lamp holde|s. Thediffusers shall be of first grade heat resisting glass, l/8 inch thick, free fromvoids, or opal plexi-formed material as required. High bay fittings shall be of thethrough-venting type. All components, incandescent lamps, to BS 16'1, HPMVlamps, to BS 4782, matching capacitofs, to BS 4017, to improve the p.f. to 0.95,etc. shall be compatible and ofthe best available quality.

Fixtures for use outdoor or in areas designated on drawings as damp locationsshall be suitably casketed to prevent access of moisture into electric€components of the enclosing diffusers, lenses or globes. All metal parts offixtures for use in damp locations and shall be painted with suitable weather andmoisture resistant paints exhibiting qualities equal to epoxy based coatings. Aaluminum pa(s of fixturcs for use in damp vacations that are specified in asrequidng and unpainted linish shall be anodized.

Post top light fixture for external illumination if specified shall be of specifiedshape and specified type, consisting of corrosion resistant aluminum body, bowi,weatherproof gasket, complete with porcelain lamp holder and lamp. The fixtureshall be suitable for mounting on a G.l pipe post painted in black enamel paintwith mate finish.

LAIVIPS

The fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, noiseless operation tubular in shapefor general lighting services and wired for lead/lag cifcuit with E27 type holder asPhilips Tornado 23 watt

Spot lamps shall be incandescent blown bulb or pressed glass lamps with theirown built-in parabolic reflector producing narrow or flood beams of high luminousintensity or as mentioned in BOQ.

INSTALLATION

The light fixtures shall be installed pendant, on surface ofwall/ceiling or recessedin false ceiling. All surface mounted fixtures shall be installed by means ofgalvanized steel screws or bolts depending on the type of fixture and as advisedby the Consultant. Light fixtures installed in the false ceiling shall be supported tothe roof in ordef to avoid loading on false ceiling.

0

o16600-24

a

st

s)

Pendant light fixtures shall be supported to ceiling with single M.S pipes forincandescent spot fixtures and double M.S pipe for fluorescent light fixtures. Allpipes supports shall be 10 mm dia minimum and provided with suitable fixingarrangement, nuts, washer, etc. Where fluorescent lighting are installedcontinuously in row, the same shall be installed on a sheet steel plate pendantmounted from ceiling. All material shall be anti-corrosive painted and finished incolor as advised by the Consultant.

The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant details of fixing affangement forapproval prior to commencement of assembly/fabrication work.

Road Lighting Pole:

The Pole mild sieel tubular swagedlivelded Silver enameled painted Road lightsingle arm or Double arm as required of over all length l0fultrs having 3 stepsand dimension of '150x'100x75mm & tube thickness 6-5-4mm respectively forfixing road light complete with M.S. baseplate having 20mm thickness and300sqmm long curved bracket with 800mm radius for mounting light fixture withall required civil works (including PCC foundations wherever required as perrelevant standards and as per instructions) with suitable precautions for ensuringprevention of watering and proper water proof-termination of cables and wires asApproved by The Engineer.

I Type Lighting Pole for Flood Light:

The l.type mild steeltubular swaged/welded Road light pole of over all length 9Mhaving 3 steps and dimension of 150x100x75mm & tube thickness 6-5-4mmrespectively for lixing road light complete with M.S. baseplate having 20mmthickness and 300sqmm long curved bracket with 800mm radius for mountinglight fixture with all required civil works (including PCC foundations whereverreauired as pef felevant standards and as per instructions) with suitableprecautions for ensuring prevention of watering and proper water proof-termination of cables and wires as approved by The Engineer.

Gl braket must be silver enameled on top the pole for the installation of theintegral flood light luminaire at 9 mtf long pole as required for flood/road lights.

.n)

)

o16600-25

o

a)

sEcTtoN - 16060 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

SCOPE OF WORK

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing andcommissioning of all material and accessories for l\4iscellaneous ltems asspecified herein and/or shown on the Drawings and given in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Project lvlanager andco-ordinate at site with othef services for exact locations and positions of theMiscellaneous ltems.

The Miscellaneous ltems with accessories shall also comply with the GeneralSpecifications Jor Electrical Works Section - 8001 and with other relevantprovisions of the Tender Document and latest WAPDA Specifications.

GENERAL

The miscellaneous items as described in this section shall comply with othersedions of these Specifications as applicable. No specific reference to anymanufacturer has been made and ihe Contractor shall ensure that all themiscellaneous items be suppliedfabricated ffom the reputable manufacturers,who have already supplied/fabricated similar items.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS/CODES

The latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be gpplicable to themateJial spesified within the scope of this Section:

b)

c)

d)

BS 4934

tEc 60439

MATERIAL

Safety requirements for electric fans and regulators

Factory built assemblies of LV switchgear & controlgeaf

MCB/MCCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel Box

The single pole 250 Volts miniature circuit bfeakers ([/CB) and triple pole500 Volis moulded case circuit breakers (l\,4CCB) are used for supplyingsingle phase/three phase power to the equipment shown on the Drawingsand given in the Bil l of Quantit ies.

The N4CB/MCCB shall conform to the same specifications as given insection LV distribution boards of these specifications. lt shall be installedin a 16 SWG sheet steel box of such a size which can easilyaccommodate the MCCB and incoming/outgoing wires or cables.Sufficient numbers of PVC connectorc shall also be provided inside thesheet steel box for terminating the eadh continuity conductors and neutral

4 .1

16600-26

4.2

wires. The front olate fixed on the sheet steel box shall be of sheet steelfixed with G.i. screws having an opening for operating the ON-OFF leverof tvtcB/tvtccB.

Ceiling Fan

Ceiling fan shall be capacitof type, suitable for 250 Volt AC. The airdlsplacement shall be 12;000 cfm for 56" (1422 mm) sweep and 10,000cfm for 48" (1219 mm) sweep at maximum speed. The fan motor shall becapacitor type and bearing shall be groove type to give noiselessoperaton.

The down rod of ceiling fans shall be appropriate length such that theceiling fan motor and blades are minimum 12 inches below false ceiling.

Ceil ing Hook for Fan

The fan hook shall be made of 16 mm diameter mild steel rod. lt shouldbe in the form of a loop about 75 mm long and about 50 mm wide. Therod should be bent to have at least 200 mm extension for tying toreinforcement steel of roofing with rubber sheet to prevent electriccontact. The fan shall be deluxe model, of specified make.

Wall Bracket Fan

Fan motor shall be capacitor type and bearing shall be groove type togive noiseless ooeration. The fan regulator shall be builFin type with highgrade steel laminations and shall have five speed marks and one "OFF"mark. The fan shall be finished in white colour, matching the ceiling andshall be of specified make.

Exhaust Fans

Exhaust fans shall be of plastic body and blades. The 6" dia fans shallhave circular frame suitable for fixing in window glass. lt shall have a cardconlrol shutter. The 9" and 12" exhaust fans shall have square shapedplastic body and blades. lt shall be suitable for installation in wallopenings. The fan shall have a card switch for reversible operation.

4.3

4.4

4 .5

INSTALLATION

5.1 General

The mounting heights of all thedrawings or in general notes.

miscellaneous items are stated on theIn case the mounting height is not

mentioned, the instructions of the Project l\/anager shall be obtainedbefore fixing the item.

5.2 MCB/MCCB Enclosed in Sheet SteelBox

The miniature/moulded case circuit breakers (MCB/MCCB) shall beinstalled on 1.63 mm ('16 SWG) thick sheet steel box with screws or somesuitable arrangements as approved by Project l\/anager. White face plate

F]t ;

16600-2'7

for sheet steel box shall be fixed by means of flat head galvanized screwssunk in the plastic ptate so as to finish flush with the wall surface. Theedges of the plate shall be chamfered.

5.3 Ceil ing Fan

Fan hook shall be installed in the RCC ceiling and to the reinforcementbefore pouring of concrete. The installation of fan shall including fixing ofblades, down-rod, clamp, canopy, including testing and commissioning

The down rod shall be of required length having long threads and shall beprovided with check nuts io secure it fifmly with the clamp and with thebody of the fan. A slit pin shall be provided both at the fan body end andat the clamp for safety. Any scratches on the body of the fan or fan rodappearing during installation shall be cleaned and painted properly withthe same quality paint as provided by the manufacturer.

Wiring between the ceiling rose and the fan terminals shall be three core'1.5 mm'? PVC insulated, PVC sheathed flexible cable.

f) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

General

The Contractofs bid amount against each Bill of Quantities item as givenbelow shall include supply, installation, testing, commissioning andcompletion for all work specified herein, as shown on the TenderDrawings and given in the Bill of Quantities related to the item.

MCBIMCCB Enclosed in Sheet Steel

6 .1

6.2

6.2.1 llleasurement

Measurement shallacceptablY suPPliedcomplete unit.

be made for the number of each itemand installed by the Contractor as a

6.2.2 Payment

Payment shall be made for the number of units measured asprovided above at the Contfact unit price each and shall constitutefull compensation for supplying, installing, connecting, testing andcomptetion of each item including sheet steel outlet box, plate andaccessories as required

16600-28

a

6.3 Ceiling Fans

6.3.1 Measurement

Measurement shall beaccessories acceptablyas a conrplete unii.

made fof each type of Ceiling fan &supplied and installed by the Contractor

6.3.2 Payment

Payment shall be made for the numbef of units measured asprovided above at the Contract unit price each and shallconstitute full compensation for supplying, installing, connecting,testing and commissioning of Ceiling fans including mounting,accessories such as nuts, bolts, hooks, down rod of appropriatelength etc. and wiring between ceiling rose and fan terminalscomolete in all respects.

a

{n

),i,

16600-29

sEcTtoN " 16070

The circuit breakers shall be triple pole /drawings manual operating device. The

DISTRIBUTIONBOARDS

sheet steel fabricated totally enclosed,or surface mounting on wall. lt shall beall accessories and finighes with two

least one coat of approved color paint,

circuit breakers shall havefelease and magnetic short-

5 .1 GENERAL

The distribution boards (DB) shall be ofdust & damp proof suitable for recessedfactory assembled, tested complete withbase coats of antijcorfosive paint and aistove enameled.

a

The cabling inside the DB shall be properly harnessed. An earth bar or terminalstip of suitable section be provided, which shall be permanently connected to bebody of DB. Flexible copper strip shall earth the door of the DB. All componentsand circuits shall be labeled consistent with the wiring and distribution of cifcuitsby permanent fire resistant plastic tape.

The distribution board shall be designed for front operation and shall:

- be rated fof 4401250 volts, 3 phase 4 wire, 50 Hz system.

- be designed forflush mounting of all instruments on the front side.

* have incoming and outgoing cable termination arrangement,terminal block / line up terminals etc.

have name plate and suitable danger signs on the front and wiringdiagram on the back side of door. The distribution board shall befabricated with minimum 16 SWG thick sheet steel. All thecomponents shall be mounted on a common component mountingplate fixed inside the enclosure with a screwed sheet steel frontplate. The enclosure shall be provided with rubber gasketslockable hinged door with cam fastener. Locks shall be providedwhere advised by Consultant.

The distribution board shall be supplied complete with all installation materials asrecommended by the manufacturer and required for completion ofwork.

The short circuit current carrying capacity shall be as shown onback-up fuses for meeting the short circuit level is not permitted.

COMPONENTS

5.2.1 Circuit Breakers (CB)

drawings. Use of

single pole as sh

5.2

tempefature compensated thermal over loadcircuit release.

16600-30

5.2-2 Ammeters and Vollmeters

All meters shall be flush mounting, moving iron, spring controlled. Thefront dimensions shall be 96 mm x 96 mm.

The meters shall have accuracy class 1.5. Ihe ammeter shall be suitablefor direct connection or to 5 Amp secondary of current tfansformers asshown on the drawings. The ammeters and voltmeters shall havemeasuring fange as indicated on the drawings.

5.2.3 CurrentTransformer

Air cooled, ring type current transformers (CT) shall be provided havingtransformation ratio as indicated on the dfawings. The CTs shall be ofsuitable burden having accuracy class 1.0.

5-2.4 SelectorSwitches

Ammeter and voltmeter selector switches shall be complete with frontplate, grip handle and R-Y-B and OFF positions for ammeters and RY-YB-BR-RN and OFF positions for voltmeters.

5.2.5 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamps shall be suitable for fiush mounting complete with bases,230 volt incandescent bulb and rosettes of approved colors.

Miniature Circuit Breaker (lvlcB)

The MCB'S shall be Single pole 250 Volt of current fatings as shown onthe drawings. These shall have fixed magnetic short cifcuit and fixedihermal overload protections, The Single pole miniature circuit breakersshall have a 6 kA short circuit breaking capacity as per Interndtionalstandard IEC 60157 Category P2

The lvliniature Circuit Breakers shall be installed such that theif switchinglevers are accessible through the front plate inside the Switch Boards foroperations. Circuit Numbers and Designation on all circuits shall beclearly marked to facilitate connection and maintenance. These CjrcuitBreakers shall be suitable for working on lighting and power circuits.

Push Buttons

Push buttons shall be momentary make break contact type (normallyopen/normally close). These shall be suitable for flush mounting orDistribution board, plastic face plate etc. Push buttons shall haveround/souare head.

16600-3 |

Indicating Lamps

lndicating lampE shall be suitable for flush mounting, complete with base,either 230 Volt neon or '12 Volt incandescent lamp through auxiliarytransformer and shall have rosettes of suitable colour.

INSTALLATION

The location of distribution boards are shown diagrammaticallydrawings. The actual location shall be determined qt site, keeningthe site conditions and in coordination with other equipment-

Low Voltage distribution board for recessed mounting in wall shall beinstalled such that the door shall finish flush with the surface of wall. Therecess mounted distribution board shall be installed before the plasteringof walls. The DB shall be protected to avoid any damage due to the civilwork.

A{l loose parts despatched separately with the DB shall be installed asper manufacturer's instructions and all adjustments or setting shall bemade, as fequired. All screws, nuts and bolts used for fixing thedistribution board shall be galvanized. The distribution boards installationshall include connecting all incoming and outgoing cables. The cableentry in the boafds shall be provided from top or bottom as required.

The distribution board body shall be connected to earth as perinstructions given in section "Earthing" of these Specifications. Theswltchboard shall be tested and commissioned in the presence of theProject Manager. The LV distribution boards shall be tested beforeenergizing as per instructions contained in the afticle "Testing" ofGeneral Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 of theseSpecifications.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Genefal

The Contractor's bid amount against each item of Bill of Quantities asgiven below shall include design, fabrication, supply, inslallation, testing,commissioning and completion for all works specified herein and/or asshown on the Tender Drawing related to the item.

LV Distribution Board

6.2.1 Measurement

Measurement shall be made for the numbef of eachtype/designation of LV distribution boards acceptably suppliedand installed by the Contractor as a

on me

6.1

6.2

16600-32

a

6.2.2 Payment

Payment shall be made for the number of eachtype/designation of jobs measured, as provided above, at theContract unit price each for design, fabricating, supplying,installing, testing, and commissioning of the LV distributionboards, including fixing arrangement and accessories forcomplete installation.

5.3. INSTALLATION

The location of DB as shown on the drawings is indicative and exact locationshall be determined at site in co- ordination with other works and other services.

The surface mounted DB shall be installed by means of bolts on the mountingframe Drovided on the DB. The recessed mounted DB shall be installed beforeplastering of walls in a manner such that the door finishes flush with the surface.

All materials and accessories used for fixing of DB shall be of galvanized steel.Distribution board shall be as manufactured by approved Panel Manufacturer byThe Enqineer.

/"/)<i6600-33

a

6.1

sEcTtoN -.t6080 TELEPHONE SYSTEM

GENERAL

The work under this section includes all material and labor required for com0leteinstallation of the system as shown on Drawings and as contained in Bill ofQuantit ies.

This shall include the telephone exchange, telephone instruments, laying ofconduit, outlet boxes, rosettes and telephone distribution boards and otherfacilities as requked for completion of system. The Contractor shall be required topull in 18 SWG galvanized steel wire wherever empty telephone conduits arerequired. The Contractor is to co-ordinate and comply with the requirements localTelegraph & Telephone Department in all respect.

TELEPHONE EXCHANGE (PABX)

The telephone exchange shall be electronic, with capacity stated on the drawingsand/or Bill of Quantitaes.

The unit shall be equipped with an AC power supply for connection to a singlephase 230V, 50-60 Hz supply. The unit shall include battery facilities comprisinglead storage batteries suflicient for 2 busy hours backup.

The batteries shall be of the sealed maintenance ffee type. The equipment shallbe from manufacturer acceptable to localTelephone Department.

The PABX shall have the following feaiures!

* Fully digital.

-- Dialing method shall be either DTMF or rotary.

: Direct inward dialing.

- Programmable features for direct outward calling, code dialing etc.

All extensions shall have the following minimum features available:-

- Automatic call-back

: Abbreviated dialing- Callforwarding

-- Booking of outside line

- Call-parking and other requisite facilities

6.2

16600-34

o

6.4

TELEPHONE SETS

Teleohone sets shall have push button dial with auto recall facility. lt shall besupplied in approved color. Telephone rosette shall be furnished with each set.

TELEPHONE CABLES

Telephone cables shall be PVC insulated, PVC sheathed multipair 0 6mmdiameter tinned copper conductor conforming to lEC. publication 189. The PVCinsulation shall comply with BS 7646. The conductor shalt be tinned solid highconductivity soft annealed copper complying with BS 6360. The insulation ofconductors shall be color coded as per above mentioned publications TheContractor shall install approved cable of the Telephone Department

CONDUITS & CONDUIT ACCESSORIES

The specification for conduits conduit accessories shall be same as contained insection conduits & pipes of these specifications. The telephone outlet boxes shallbe 63 mm x 63 mm deep made of 16 SWG (1.63mm) sheet steel and providedwith earth terminal and 3mm white plastic front plate.

TELEPHONE JUNGTION BOXES

This shall comprise l6 SWG (l.63mm) sheet steel box with hinged cover to befixed flushed with the wall. The copper terminal strips shall be installed oninsulated material sheet inside the sheet steel box and the number of telminalsshall be as contained in the Bill of Quantities.

INSTALLATION

All complete telephone system, i.e. telephone exchange, conduits, outlet boxes,telephone junction boxes etc., shall be installed in complete conformity with thedrawings, and recommendations details in felevant section of thesespecifications of equipment manufacturel

ldentification marking shall be given on the free end of conduit both by color orsuitable approved tag.

o16600-35

o

sEcTtoN - 16090 EARTHING & LIGHTING PROTECTION

7.1 GENERAL.

The work under this section shall include the earthing and lightning pfotectionwhole building as described herein, in the drawing and upto the satisfactionengineer.

EARTHING SYSTEM

Each and every electrical/mechanical equipment, computer accessories, outlet,fixture should be connected to earthing system. the eadhing system should bemade by connecting all the earthing electrodes by copper conductor dia 35 mm 2or as shown on drawing, in such a way to from a ring-

Contfactor has to ensure a min, earth resistance of 1.0 OHIVI by four rods type oftest with earth tester. lf difficulty is faced in getting this value additional earthelectrodes be added into the ring. the drawing fof lightening proiection & earthingshows, how the system should be made, but doesn't relive the contractor ol hisresponsibiliiy to provide a most effective & dependable system. Therefore thesystem should come from specialist manufacturers, names given in therecommended manufacturers list and should be designed specially for thisproject by the selected manufacture at no extfa cost. The earth for the computershall not be connected to the existing earihing system.

EARTHING CONDUCTOR

35 Sq.mm earth Conductors shall be laid and connected to the A.C. ElectricCabinet for computer power as shown on drawing.

TEST POINTS

These points are for testing of earthing systems. At these points hot work can beseparated and can be tested for continuity and rcsistance. Test points should bemade of brass and solidly fixed to wall at a height of 1.5 meter.

EARTH PITS

These should be made of pre cost concrete with a cover lid and should be placedover the electrode in level with the finished gfound level. The cover lid shouldhave marking showing its number and wfitten "Earth Electrode" in Urdu &

ofof

1r.I!. I

o

English.

16600-36

o

o

7.8

HARDENED STEEL TIP

lt should be able to accept conductors ol 25 - 70 sq.mm dia. should be ofhardened steel, length to be 135 mm.

EARTH CONNECTION POINT/PLATE

For Computer room a earth point should be provided consisting of electrolyticcopper type earth bar of dimensions as shown in specific mesh and a separateearth rod. This plate is for connection to all the equipment in that particular room.

EARTHING MESH

lf required an earthing mesh is to be provided to connect earthing & lightprotection network as per drawing and instruction of consultant,

COPPER TAPE

7.10 CLAMP

7.11 LIGHTNINGARRESTOR

16600-37

a

a).

b)_

c).

d ) .

sEcTtoN - 16100 DIESEL GENERATOR

9.'I A.C DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN ELECTRIC GENERATING SET AND ALLIEDEOUIPMENTS

Scope ofwork

The continue feeding electical to light & A,/C cifcuit of the rooms during malnfailure hours, an emergency diesel generation set with canopy shall be providedand installed at the place shown on the drawing. The installation shall becomplete with all necesgary auxiliary equipments. Automatic change -over panel,control and protective gears, oil tanks, pumps and related piping, ducting andcabling to provide a complete operational system of emergency power supply.

Rating

b. 1 The diesel engine driven generating set shall have thefollowing rating and electdcal characteisticsi

b. '1.1 Generating Capacity as indicated in ihe BOQb.1.2 Voltage 400 Voltsb.1.3 System 3 Phase 4 wireb.1.4 Frequency 50 Hzb.1.5 Number of revolLrtion per minute As per manufacturer's

specifications

Climate Conditions

c.1 The emergency diesel generating set shall be designed to withstand the' climatic conditions prevailing in Kharian / Sohawa throughout the yearand as such maximum ambient temperatures, maximum humidity andaltitude shall be considered for the design of his equipment.

Special Requirements

d.'1 The emergency set shall be designed in such a way thai the capacityshall be sufficient to give 10 % over load for one hour in any period oftwelve hours operation.

e). OperationDescriptione.1 The A.C. diesel engine ddven electric generating set shall be aranged for

electric starting and for automatic mains failure operation. With the mainswithin limits, the set shall stay in stand-by position. 24(vii)-2

O16600-J8

f).

It shall automatically start supply power io the load within approximately 0to 5 second of the complete cessation of mains supply failure on one ormore phases, or when the voliage is reduced by 20o/o ol nominal, andautomatically shut down the plant and re-transfer the load back to themains supply to stabiles before retransfer of the load takes place, andshall be adjustable over the '1-'10 minute range.

Alternator Soecif ications

f.1 The alternator shall be continuously rated and fabricated steelconstruction. lt shall be A.C brushless type. The bearing shall be greaselubricated or roller bearings.

f.2 The rotor shall consist of dynamically balanced salient pole revolvingfield. The magnetic poles shall be equipped with damper windings. Thefield coils shall be able to withstand high centrifugal stresses withoutdeveloping any damage. Rotor insulation shall conform to Class-B.The stator core shall be made form high laminated silicon steel andcarefully tighiened to prevent occurrence of magnetic vibrations. Thestator windings shall be provided insulation conforming to Class-F. Allwindings shall be fully impregnated for topical climates with high qualityoil resistant varnish.The A.C exciter shall have permanent magnets in the field ensuringpositive voltage build-up. The rectification shall be affected by a suitablyrated silicon diode assembly over-hung to the shaft. The rotatingrectifier assembly shall be built to withstand vibralion and centrifugalforces.The inherent charactedstics of the alternator shall be such maintain theoutput voltage under all conditions of load, power factor and temperature,within the limits of 2 % of nominal.The alternator shall have seli-contained excitation system withtfansistorized automatic voltage regulator. The automatic voltageregulator and control gear shall be mounted in a component box on theside of the machine using antivibration mounting. Electrical connectionsto the voltage regulator shall be taken thfousih a multi-way plug andsocKeLThe alternator shall be screen protected and drip proot lt shall haveefficient cooling system centrifugal fans. lt shall be provided with a largeterminal box for outgoing cable connections.The alternator shall be able to suppress radio or television interference inaccordance with BS 800.Line voltage waveform shall contain not morethan approximately 2% total harmonic contents. 24(vii)-3The temperature rise and performance shall comply with BSS 2613/1957.

Diesel Engine Specifications

The engine shall be 6 cylinder,4 stroke, direct injection, continuouslyrating as shown in the BOQ., water-cooled industrial diesel engine.The engine shall withstand a 'l0olo overload for a period of t hour (in 12hours) in accordance with BS 649i1958).The engine driven pump shall circulated the lubricating oiland full flow filters with replace-able shall be fitted.

under pressure

f .3

f.4

f.5

t6

f .8

f.9

s)g.' l

9 .1

9 .2

+o

16600-39

o

g.3 An inline fuel injection pump and a diaphragm type lift pump with filterswith replaceable element and a fuel solenoid shall be provided.

9.4 Governing shall conform to class-A limits of BS 649/1958 and awoodward governor shall be provided.

h) Engine Instruments

h.1 The diesel engine shall be provided with the following instruments andmeters:

h.1.1 Oil pressure gauge.h.1.2 Water temperature gauge.h.1.3 Engine hourc run recorder.h.1.4 Battery charging ammeter.h.1.5 RPM meter.

Engine Protection Equipments

i.'1 Engine protection equipment shall be incorporated to shut downautomatically the set with a visual cum-audio alarm of the followingconditions:

i.1.1 Low lubricating oil pressure (Below a safe working value)i.1.2 High cooling watef temperaturei-1.3 Engine over speed.i.1.4 With fuel oil level down engine protection system shall develop visual

cum-audio alarm.

j) Mechanical Coupling

i.1 The diesel engine and A.C brushless generator shall be coupled witheach other by means of flexible coupling

j.2 The generator end shield and the engine flywheel housing faces shall befully machined with spigots concentric to their shafts. A fabricated steelcoupling ring with both faces machined shall be flange mounted to theflwvheel housing and generator end shield by steel pipes

i.3 A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generaiorprovide the drive and shall be suitable to absorb the transmission

toof

shock loads.i.4 The distortional flexibility shall be designed to match the distortional

characteristics of the system 10 prevent resonant conditions.

k) MountingDescription

k.'1 The combined engine-generator unit witch canopy shall be bolted to aseparate sub-frame witch shall be attached to the main frame through'Resilient lvlounting'so providing complete protection from the enginevibration to the control gear, and other set mounted components

16600..40

l) Cooling System

t . 1

t.2

1.4

The diesel engine shall be water cooled. The cooling water shall becirculated by a centrifugal pump through a tropical duty radiator, cooledby a reverse flow fan.A fan cowl and hand protection guard shall be fltted.A thermostat shall be pass the coolant, until a pre- determined operatingtemperature is reached.An immersion heater shall be incorporated in the cooling system.In order to provide sufficient air flow along the radiator an air duct shall bemade form the radiator to the outside wall without any extra cost of theowner.The contractor shall provide all material and labor that is necessary toachieve this ouroose.

m) Starting System

m.l The starting system shall consist of a heaw starter motor and starterswitch, a set of 24 voll heavy duty lead acid stafting batteries ofadequate capacity, allarranged for automatic electric starting.

m.2 The starter motor shall automatically disengage when the engine shallfire. There shall be three automatic starting attempts before the startingbatteries are disconnected, should the engine fail to start due to shortageoffuel, etc.

m.3 Battery charging shall be affected by an engine driven generator,completewith regulator, whilst the set is running, and by means of amains operated tickle charging unit, when the set is at rest.

m.4 The batteries shall be housed in a cradle on the main base frame.

Conlrol Gear and Meters

n.1 All diesel engine control gear, load change-over equipment and meteringshall be contained within a cubicle type of gubstantial gauge,

n.2 The froht of the cubical shall be mounted with the following instrumentsand visualsignals:One -AC voltmeter with selector switchOne -AC ammeterwith selectof switchOne - WattmeterOne - Battery charge ammeterwith charge switchOne - Power factor meter.One - Duty selector switch with position. Off automatic test handOne - lvlanual staft push button.(engine)One - BellOne - Low lubricating oil pressure fault indicating lampOne - Engine over speed indicating lampOne - Fuel oil level down indicating lampOne - Reverse power indicating lampOne -'Fail to start ' indicating lampOne -'Alternator available' indicating lampOne -'Alternatof on load' indicating lampOne -'Alternator on load' indicating lamp

n)

a

o16600-41

o

o)

p)

One - Generator voltage relay with delayed coniactsOne - Relay for mains/generator changeover commandOne - Auxiliary contractor for manual retransfer of load to maimsOne - Auxiliary contractor for generator voltage monitoring androcKrngOne -Generator, suitably rated and complete with 3 low voltage HRCfuss, and delayed thermal over current relaysOne - Mains contractor, suitably rated and complete with 3 low voltageHRC fu6es, and delayed thermal over curent relays.The generator contactor shall be electrically and mechanically interlockwith the main contactor in such a way that only one these contractorsshall close at one time. The wiring shall be made in such a way that themains contactor shall always have preference over the generatorcontactor. Only in case of testing this preference shall be superseded.One - Triple pole adjustable magnetic overload unit which dashpot timedelay for generator overload protection.One - Set of current transformers for overload unit and instrumentation

Exhaust

A large and efficient residential acoustic type silencer with a suitablelength offlanged flexible exhaust pipe shall be installed. The pipe shall beol suitable dimension to it direct in the exhaust manifold to allow for thefree movement of the engine alternator and to give some isolation fromvibration to the surrounding fabric. The exhaust pipe shall be broughtoutside the building to suitable height.

n .5

Finish

p.1p.2

p.2p .2 .1

p .2 .1 .1p .2 .1 .2p .2 .1 .3p .2 .1 .4p .2 .1 .5

o.'1

One - Push button switches for closing and opening the mains contractorcase of manual controlOne - Push button switches for closing and opening the generatorcontractor case of manual controlOne - Push button switches fof canceling visual signalsOne - Push button switches for testing the indicating lampsOne - Push button switches fof manual retransfer of load to mains

Thefollowing components and auxiliaries shall be arranged inside thecubic in first class engineering like manner and giving sufficient access formaintenance and replacement fof purposes.

All sheet steel used shall be zinc coated.The set shall be painted with good quality primer and finished witha high gloss paint, blue color.AccessoriesThe AC diesel engine driven electric generating set shallsupplied with the following accessories and manuals.One - kit of engine tools.One - Set of holding down bolts.Three - Set of installation drawlngs.Three - Set of circuit diagramThree - Set of engine maintenance boo

t6600-42

a

q)

p.2.1.6p.2.1.7

Three - Set of spare Darts manual.Three - Set of generating set instruction manual.

Fuel Day Tank

q.1 The capacity of fuel day tank shall be suitable for the capacity of thegenerator as per the manufacture's recommendation mounted on aframework complete with cap and contents gauge. The tank shall bemanufactured from steel plate with welded seams.

q.2 The fuel day tank shall be complete with inlet and outlet connection.On/off cock and fully piped to the engine.

q.3 Provision shall be made to collect fuel leaking. Drain pipe with valve foremptying the tank for cleaning purpose shall also be provided.

Fuel Pump

r.'1.1 A fuel pump shall be provided with a capacity suitable with the capacily ofthe generator as specified in the BOQ. The pump shall gear type andconnected to a meter through a flexible coupling-

r.1.2 The pump and meter shall be mounted on a forged steel foundalion plate.r.1.3 Thepumpshall be supplied with necessary valve, pressure relief valve

and pressure gauge.t.2 Fuel Storage Tankf.2.'1 A fuel storage tank with a capacity suitable for 3 days (underground) shall

be provided outside. The iank shall be complete with fill pipe wiihconnection and vent pipe With cap.

r.2.2 The tank shall be provided with hvo provided with two manholes.r.2.3 Complete 20 mm diameter piping in first class engineering like manner

shall be of furnished between this tank and fuel day tank inside thebuilding. The overflow pipe going back from fuel day tank to the storagetank shall be of 50mm diameter.

r.2.4 ln order to control the pump, level switches shall be furnished mounted onthe fuelday tank and connected to the contfol cubicle.

INSTALLATION OF A.C. DIESEL GENERATING SET

r)

9 .2

9.21 The contractor shall provide all labor and material under for complete andoperational installation, testing and commission of the emergency power supplyunit. Before commencing the physical installation, the contractor submitsmanufacturer drawings and installation for foundation shall be prepared by thecivil contractor. Electric contractor shall supply and install the foundation boltslantivibration material and anothef foundation material to be embedded in cementconcrete foundations.

9.22 After the cement concrete foundations are constructed and cured, the emergencypower supply unit shall be installed with canopy and mechanical alignment andleveling shall be strictly in accordance with manufacturer's installations. All thesystem component parts, sub-assemblies are described in earlier articles shallbe installed in first class engineering like manner. All wiring material, fixingaccessories etc.. shall be provided without additional cost.

16600-43

a

o

After having installed and connected all the system components parts and sub-assemblies in accordance with the above specifications, as site test shall bemade to connivance the engineer for the proper functioning of the system. lf thesufficient load for testing shall not be available, then contractor shall furnish adummy load for the maximum load test.

o

a16600-44

t

1 .

sEcTtoN - 16110 WATER PUMPS

SCOPE OF WORK

The work to be done under this section of the specifications includes fumishingall plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing alloperations required in connection with the installation of pumping machineryincluding ail accessories as specified herein or shown on the Drawings or asdirected by the Project l\ilanager.

MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

lvlatedals and machinery shall conform to the latest referenced specifications andother provisions specified hefein and shall be new and unused, In case wheremanufacturers are specified, material and equipment will be of the samemanufacturers. ln all other cases the Contractor shall submit the names andaddresses ofthe Manufacturers and trade names ofthe materials and equipmentthat he intends to buy. Other information such as diagram, drawing anddescriptive data will be supplied if so desired by the Project lvlanagef. Approval ofmaterials and all the machinery under this provision shall not be construed asauthorising any deviations from the specifications. The approval of machinery ofmanufacturer other than specified will be purely on the discretion of the Projectlvlanagef. The Projeci Manager will fully ascertain the facts and satisfy himself asto the performance of ihe machinery offered by the Contractor.

SPECIAL REOUIREMENTS OF PUMPS

The Contractor shall furnish with each pump pfoperly identified characteristiccurves prepared and certified by the manufacturer showing capacity, head,efficiency and brake horsepower throughout the entire range ofthe pump.

The pumps shall stable throttling curyes and be suitable for unrestricted paralleloperation. The pumps and their drives shall not overload or trip when operatingagarnst zero pressure.

The design, construction and materials shall be such that damage as a result ofcavitation is completely eliminated.

Pumps shall have bearings and be suitable for continuous as well as intermittentoperation without externalseating of cooling water.

The pumps shall be such that they shall come into operation at once after aprolonged shutdown period without having to take special measures,

Pumps shall be capable of delivering specified quantity of water at the specifiedpressure. Pumps shall be tested at site before theif final acceptance.

4.

Pumos shall be installed at positions shown onthe Project l\/anager.

16600-45

the Drawings and/or as directed

4.

Pumps and their drives shall be in perfect alignment when installed in position.

PUMP AND MOTOR

4.1 POTABLE WATER PUMP & MOTOR

4.'1.4 Specifications

The pump sets will consist of close coupled, horizontal, centrifugalpumps of specified capacity and head and duty and shall behorizontally mounted, toially enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cageinduction motors of specified power.

Pump material shall be as under:

Body Fine grained grey cast iron.impeller BronzeShaft Bronze or stainless steel

Pumps shall have mechanical seal. The suction and dischargeflanges shall be rated for a working pressure of '10 kg/cm'forpotable water pumps. The flanges shall be drilled to BS 19 (Table'D'or'E') or BS 4504.

Motors shall run on 3-phase.400 volts + 10%.50 cis A,/C powermotors shall be protected frcm low voltage, overload, andoverheating and phase failure.

4.1.5 lnstallation

Potable water pumps and motors shall be instalied on concretefoundation with anchof bolts.

4.1.6 Operation

For potable water pumps, one pump shall be duty and one shallbe standby. Duty shall however change between the pumps oneach starustop/cycle oi the pump.

Operation of potable water pumps shall be contfolled by waierlevel indicators provided on the roof tank ofthe building.

- Duty pumps shall automatically start, when the watef levelreaches the low water level-1 (L.W.L-1)

Duty pumps shall automatically stop when the watef levelreaches high water level (H.W.L).

,,f'ist:\ilt

16600-46

In case the duty pump fails to start, the stand by pump shallstart automatically at lowest water level-2 (L.W.L.-2).

In case the stand by pump also fails to start, the emergencyalarm will be automatically sounded.

ACCESSORIES

7 .

5.1

5.4

Pressure Gauge

Pfessure gauge shall be of copper alloy, bourdon tube type with 100 mmdiameter dial face. The dial shall be engraved in black on whitebackground from zero to 6 bars or 1.5 times the worKng pressurewhichever is larger. Gauge shall be installed socket welded to the pipelinewith the isolating plug/ball valve. Gauge shall be installed no higher than1.8 lll above the finished floor. lf the pipeline installation is such that theabove requirement can not be met pressure gauge of remote readingtype shall be installed.

Y-StrainersStrainers shall be'Y'types with bronze body and threaded ends upto75mm diameter Screen shall be of 20 mesh monel.Strainers above 75 mm shall have Cast lron body with flanged ends:Screen Cover shall be provided with blow off tapping. Screen shall be ofperforated stainless steel.

36 holes per Sq.Cm., with 1.14 mm diameter and 0.5 mm thick. Allstrainers for watef supply application shall be suitable for 10.5k9/Crn2and 120 degree C. All stfainers for fire protection service shall be suitablelot 21 Kg/Cm2 and 120 degree C.

Foot Valve fof Pumps

Shall be installed on the suction Line of the pumps where required orindicated on the drawing. Foot valve shall be of brass, and shall beprovided wiih integral strainer. Foot valve shall be provided with a springloaded vertical check disc with gasket for tight shufoff.

MOTOR PROTECTION

Motors of 3kw or less power shall be started direct on line. Larger motors shall bestafted by Star-Delta Starter.

l\rotor shall be protected against under voltage over voltage overload, over-heating and phase failure.

lvlotor shall be rated for normal operation against a voltage fluctuation of + 10%and frequency fluctuation +2H2.

16600-47

7. MOTOR CONTROL PANEL

Refef to felevant electical specifications and drawings.

MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TOOLS8.

8.1 A book or books containing the complete information in connection withthe assembly operation, lubrication, adjustment and repair of the pumpingequipment, electric motor, together with the detailed parts list with thedrawings or photographs shall be furnished in duplicate.

For the pumping station, special tools necessary for maintenance andrepair of the pumps and electric motors including tools kits, grease gunsetc. with accessories shall be furnished.

The equipment to be supplied for the pumping station shall be providedwith spare parls necessary to the operational and maintenance for 1 year.

The manufactureas recommended list of spare parts to be stocked by theAuthority shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Project lvlanager forappfoval. Such spare parts will also be furnished by the Contractor.

AII the maintenance manuals, tools, spare parts etc., shall be supplied bythe Contractor at no cost of the Authority and all cost shall be deemedincluded by the Contractor in his bid against item of pumping set.

8.2

8.3

4.4

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

9.1 Pumping Machinery

9.1.3 lvleasurement

Measurement for payment of pumping machinery shall be theactual number of pumping sets acceptable provided and installedin position; the Contractor's bid against this item shall include costof providing and installing the pumping machinery, including thepumps, electric motors, all accessories, manuals, tools, spafeparts, etc. as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or inBOQ or as directed by the Project lvlanager.

9.'1.4 Payment

Payment for pumping machine shall be made at the applicableunit rate per pumping set bid in the Bill of Quantities. The amountbid shall be full payment for the work specified.

16600-48